第10讲 八年级(上)Units l l—12
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．invite(v．)邀请→invitation(n．)邀请
2．play(v．)播放→player(n．)唱机
3．care(v．)照顾→care(v．)在乎
4．comfortable(adj．)舒适的→uncomfortable(adj．)不舒服的
5．close(adj．)近的→close(v．)关
6．serve(v．)服务→service(n．)业务
7．easy(adj．)安逸的→easily(adv．)容易地
8．loud(adj．)响亮的→loudly(adv．)吵闹地
9．talent(n．)天赋→talented(adj．)天才的
10．perform(v．)演→performer(n．)演员
11．Success(n．)成功→successful(adj．)成功的
12．act(n．)一段表演→action(n．)动作
13．with(prep．)有→without(prep．反义词)没有
14．music(n．)音乐→musical(adj．)音乐的
15．distance(n．)距离-+distant(adj．)远的
16．near(adj．)近的→nearby(adv,)附近
17．far(adj．原级)远的→farther(adj．比较级)较远的→farthest(adj．最高级)最远的
18．south(n．)南方→southern(adj．)南方的
19．1ove(n．)爱→lovely(adj．)可爱的
20．north(n．)北方→northern(adj．)北方的
【重点短语】
1．do the dishes洗餐具 2．take out the trash倒垃圾
3．fold the clothes叠衣服 4．sweep the floor清扫地板
5．make the bed铺床 6．clean the room打扫房间 7．get a ride搭车
8．do chores做家务 9．do the laundry洗衣服 10．borrow some money借钱
11．invite sb．to do sth． 邀请某人做某事 12．take care of照顾
13．take sb．for a walk带某人去散步 14．play with sb． 和某人玩耍
15．see you再见16．come over过来 17．comfortable seats舒适的座位
18．be close t0…离……近 19．in a fun part of town在城镇的闹市区
20．friendly service友好的服务 21．the best movie theater最好的剧院
22．good quality质量好 23．do a survey做调查 24．play music播放音乐
25．win the prize for… 赢得……的奖项 26．without music没有音乐
27．the price of………的价格 28．cut the price打折
【重点句型】
1．－Could you please sweep the floor?你能扫一下地板吗?
－Yes，sure．当然可以。
2．－Could I use your computer?我能用一下你的电脑吗?
－Sorry．I’m going to work on it now．对不起，我马上就要用了。
3．Thanks for taking care of my dog．谢谢你照看我的狗。
4．Don’t forget to clean his beck别忘了打扫他的床。
5．It has the biggest screens and the most comfortable seats．它有最大的荧屏和最舒适的座位。
6．She played a beautiful piano piece．她演奏了一首非常优美的钢琴曲。
7．The price of a hotel room is about 320 yuan a night．宾馆的价格大约是一个晚上320元。
8．Tourists need to wear warm clothes．游客们需要穿保暖衣服。
9．Hotels usually cut their prices in winter．冬天宾馆通常会打折。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．forget v．意为“忘记”，通常指忘记具体的东西(如名字、号码、地址等)。
(1)forget to do sth．指的是“忘记要做某事”。如：Don’t forget to turn off the light when youleave．你离开时不要忘记关灯。
(2)forget doing sth．表示“忘记已经做了某事”。如：I forgot telling him about it．我忘记了曾把这件事告诉过他。
适时点津
remember to do／doing sth．的用法与forget相同。如：Remember to post the letter for me．记住给我邮寄这封信。I remember seeing him once．我记得见过他一次。
活学活用
(2011·怀化) －Don’t forget your homework，John．－OK．I’ll do it right now．
A．doing B．do C．to do
解析：forget to do sth．忘记去做某事(将要做的事)；forget doing sth．忘记做过某事(已经做过的事)。句意：－约翰，不要忘记做作业。－好的，我马上就做。
答案：C
2．take care of是动词短语。意为“照顾；照看”。同义短语是look after。
He is smart and can take care of himself．他很精明，可以照顾他自己。
适时点津
take care意为“小心；注意”，同义短语有be careful，look out。如：
Take care not to cut off the buds．当心不要把幼芽切掉。
活学活用
(2011·贵阳) －Marcia，could you please my dog when I’m on vacation? －Yes，sure．
A．look after B．1ook at C．look for
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。look after照顾；look at看；look for寻找。一Marcia，当我度假的时候，你能帮我照看一下我的狗吗?一是的，可以。
答案：A
3．without prep．没有。无
She sang an English song without music．她清唱了一首英语歌曲：
适时点津
without的反义词是with。如：He passed the exam with the help of his teacher．在
老师的帮助下，他通过了考试。
活学活用
(2011·金华)We eouldn’t finish our work so early your help．
A．without B．with C．for D．by
解析：本题考查介词的用法。句意：没有你的帮助，我们就不能这么早完成工作。
答案：A
【重点句型】
1．－Could you please clean your room?你能打扫一下房间吗? －Yes，sure．当然可以。
Could you please…?句型通常用于请求某人做某事时，也可说：Can you…please?肯定的回答常用：Certainly．／of course．／With pleasure．／No problem．／Yes，sure． 否定的回答常用：I’m afraid not．／Sorry，I can’t．／Certainly not．／No，I can’t．I have to…如：－Could you please do the dishes?你能洗一下餐具 吗?－Sorry，I can’t．I have to do my homework．对不起，我要做作业。
适时点津
表示请求的句式还有：
Would you like to do sth．?你愿意做某事吗?
Would you mind doing sth．?你介意做某事吗?
活学活用
(2011·青岛) －Could you please pass me the book？－
A．Yes,I could B．No,I couldn’t
C．Sure,Here you are D．No，that’s do problem
解析：本题考查交际用语。根据Could you please pass me the book?“请你把书递给我，好吗?”可知这是一个表示请求的一般疑问句，选项C意为“当然可以。给你”。
答案：C
2．It has the biggest ScrEens and the most comfortable seats．它有最大的荧屏和最舒适的座位。biggest是big的最高级，the most comfortable是comfortable的最高级。形容词的最高级用于三者或三者以上(人或物)的比较，它前面一般要加定冠词the，后面可带of／in短语来说明比较的范围。如：The Sunshine Hotel has the friendliest service．阳光假日酒店的服务最好。
适时点津
形容词／副词最高级的不规则变化：
good／well--better—best
bad／badly--worse--worst
many／much--more--most
1ittle—less—least
far—farther—farthest
活学活用
(2011·东营)Of all Gong Linna’S songs，I like her Uneasy(忐忑) ．
A．well B．better C．best D．the best
解析：本题考查形容词最高级的用法。由all可知比较对象是三者或三者以上，在三者或三者以上作比较时用最高级。like best意为“最喜欢”。句
意：在龚琳娜的所有歌中，我最喜欢她的《忐忑》。
答案：C
【巧辨异同】
1．Do与make
(1)不明确说出人们做的是什么活动时，用do。如：
He likes doing nothing．他喜欢什么事也不做。
what shall we do?我们该做什么?
Then she did a very strange thing．接着她做了一件很奇怪的事情。
(2)make常常用来表达构成、制作、创造的意思。如：
Let’s make a plan．咱们制订一个计划吧。
适时点津
请留意下列几个表达方式：
(1)do good，do one’s best，do business。do with
(2)make an excuse，make a noise，make a mistake，make the bed，make a phone call，make money
活学活用
－What are you doing? －I’m (做)a cake．
解析：本题考查do和make的区别，这里是要表达“制作蛋糕”，故应该是making。
答案：making
2．borrow与lend
(1)borrow是动词，意为“借，借入”，borrow sth． from sb．意为“向某人借”。如：
How much have you borrowed from him?你向他借了多少钱?
(2)lend也是动词，意为“借给，借出”，lend sb．sth．一lend sth．to sb．意为“借某物给某人”。如：Would you please lend me your pencil?请把铅笔借给我用用好吗?
适时点津
keep在表示“借”的含义时，通常表示“借多久”。如：You can keep the book for two days．这本书你可以借两天。
活学活用
(2010·东阳) －How long have you the bike?－For about two weeks．
A．bought B．kept C borrowed D．1ent
解析：根据答句“两个星期”是一段时间，它不能和表示短暂性的动词连用，只有keep是延续性动词，可以跟时间段。
答案：B
3．my与mine
(1)my是代词，意为“我的”，是形容词性物主代词，后面必须接名词或者名词短语。如：My hat fell to the ground．我的帽子掉在地上了。
(2)mine也是代词，是名词性物主代词，意为“我的”，后面不再接名词或者名词短语。如：－This is my dictionary．Where is yours?这是我的字典，你的呢? －Mine is over there．我的(字典)在那里。
适时点津
mine是形容词性物主代词，类似的还有：
your→yours，her→hers，his→his，our→ours，their→theirs
活学活用
(2011·烟台) －Do you know this dictionary belongs to? －Let me see．Oh，it’s ．
八who does；mine B．who；me C．whose；mine D．who；mine
解析：本题考查疑问词和代词的用法。belong to后面应该加某人，而不是加物主代词，所以第一个空用who；名词性物主代词mine想当于my dictionary。句意：－你知道这本词 典是谁的吗? －我看看。哦，是我的。
答案：D
典题剖析
真题1(2011·广安) －which is the season of a year? － Summer．
A．hot B．hotter C．hottest
解析：本题考查形容词的最高级。夏天是一年中最热的季节，要用hot的最高级形式：双写“t”+est。
答案：C
真题2 (2011·广安) －How nmch is the pair of shoes? －Twenty dollars enougk
A．is B．are C．am
解析：本题考查be动词的用法。根据句意，twenty dollars看成一个整体，表示单数概念，所以用is。
答案：A
真题3 (2011·济宁) －would you come to my birthday party tomorrow evening?
－I’m afraid I ．I have to look after my
sister．
A．wouldn’t B．can’t C．won’t D．mustn’t
解析：本题考查情态动词的用法。根据答语“I have to look after my sister．”可知是去不了的。
答案：B
真题4 (2011·威海) －Please to return my book by Friday．I’ll use it on Saturday．－No problem．I’ll finish reading it on Thursday．
A．don’t forget B．not to forget C．not forget D．forget not to
解析：本题考查祈使句的用法。由题意可知，这是一个否定的祈使句，故用“don’t+动词原形”。
答案：A
名师预测
( )1．We have a lovely room．It’s one of in the hotel．
A．nice B．nicer C．nicest D．the nicest
( )2．You wear sports shoes when you climb a mountain．
A．can’t B．shouldn’t C．mustn’t D．have to
( )3．－Could I borrow your computer，Bob? －Sorry I am it．
A．taking out B．turning on C．working on D．putting on
( )4．I don’t know how to begin a talk with Betty．She can sit all day long a
word．
A．by B．with C．in D．without
( )5．Water Park is a good place ．
A．to have fun B．have fun C．having fun D．to have a fun
同步训练l0八年级(上)Units ll—12
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．I could my bed and my clothes．
A．make；fold B．make；do C．fold；do D．fold；wash
( )2．—CouId you please buy drinks and snacks? —sorry,I don’t have money．
A．some；any B．any；any C．some；some D．any；Some
( )3．—Mom， I play computer games? —Yes,you can．But you have to finish your
homework first．
A．must B．may C．will D．need
( )4．— I bought a new book about stamp-collecting yesterday．
—Really?Could you ?
A．show me for it B．show me it
C．show it for me D．show it to me
( )5．—Could you tell me how to get to Xuzhou Railway Station，please? —
A．No，I couldn’t B．Don’t askme
C．Thank you all the same D．Certainly．You can take the No．1 bus
( )6．—Shall I help you move it to the corner?
— ．I can do it myself．
A．No，thanks B．Not at all C．Help yourself D．Never mind
( )7．—Could you please ?It’s so dirty．—I will do it fight away．
A．do the dishes B．clean the rooms
C．make breakfast D．sweep the floor
( )8．—Could you please go sightseeing with us this Sunday? — ．I have to finish my homework．
A．Yes，sure B．I’m sorry C．Excuseme D．Good idea
( )9．I think Liu Dehua is one of the movie stars in China．
A．popular B．popularest C．more popular D．most popular
( )10．His house is our school
A．close B．closely to C．close to D．close near
( )11．My little brother is to go to school．
A．old enough B．enough old
C．young enough D．enough young
( )12．Hainan is the south of China．
A to B．on C in D．at
( )13．When you choose what theater to go to ,which is ，friendly service or high price?
A．important B．importanter
C．more important D．the most important
( )14．He the prize the running this year．
A．made；on B． got；about C．won；for D．made；for
( )15．—Which is month of the year? —July，I think．
A．hot B．hoter C．hotter D．the hottest
二、用所给词的正确形式填空
1．Who runs (fast)in your class?
2．I think Ma Li is (athletic)of the three girls．
3．You’d better ask your father (send)you to the hospital．
4．The students clean the (read)room every day．
5．Could you please (not shut)the door?
6．Does everyone hate (make)the dishes?
7．All the movie theaters are good，but the Big Screen Complex has (comfortable)seats．
8．I don’t want to go Jasper’s clothes store．It has (bad)clothes in town．
9．What do you think is (creative)of all the music videos?
10．Who is(good)in physics in your class?
三、根据旬意和首字母提示写出单词
1．Jason has b quality than Trendy Teens．
2．Tom is a bad worker，but Jim is even w than him．
3．There isn’t e food for sixty people，so I’ll go and get same．
4．We need some more actors for the t show．
5．His answer is positive，but mine is n ．
6．Our teachers are having a m in the teachers’office．
7．Could I use your CD player?M is broken(坏了)．
8．Thank you for f my dog when I go out．
9．Let’s go to the supermarket and buy some drinks and s to eat．
10．We s the floor just half an hour ago．
四、用方框中所给短语的适当形式填空
think about，cut the price，in town，good service，as for
1．Do you like to live in the country or ?
2．What do you the play last night?
3．The restaurant has ,so I often eat there．
4． food for the party，I have prepared it．
5．The shops for the old clothes．
五、单词拼写
1．They sang a cute song (一起)．
2．Could I (借)your bike?Mine is broken．
3．Last week’s talent show was a great (成功)．
4．Do you like to (听)to music?
5．I can’t buy the computer because it’s too (昂贵)．
6．She often helps her father (洗)the car．
7．Jason’s clothes has the (最好)service．
8．Jasper’s has the (最友好的)service．
9．I think Cride Theater has the most (最舒适的)seats．
10．The Art Festival (持续)for ten days．
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·武汗)
I didn’t cry when I learned l was the parent of a disabled child．I just sat still and didn’t say anything．
When Jenny was old enough。I sent her to a kindergarten(幼儿园)．On the first mornin9，Jenny spent hours playing by herself．It seemed that she felt very 1 ．However，to my joy，Jenny’s classmates always 2 her。“You got all your spelling words right today!”In fact，her spelling list was the 3 ．Later，she faced a very painful 4 at the end of the term．there was a game which had． 5 to do with physical education．But Jenny was 6 in it．
My husband and l were anxious about the day．I wanted to let my child stay home!But my heart wouldn’t let me off that easily．So I 7 a pale．unwilling Jenny onto the school bus．
At the kindergarten，1 was quite worried because of her 8 action，Jenny would probably hold up her team．The game went well until it was time for the sack(19袋)race．Surely Jenny would find it 9 ．Now each child had to climb into a sack，jump to the finishing line，return and climb out of the sack．I noticed Jenny standing near the end of her line of players．
But as it was her turn to join，a change took place in her l0 ．The tallest boy behind Jenny placed his hands on her waist(腰)．Two other boys 11 in front of her．The moment the player before Jenny stepped out from the sack，the two boys l2 the sack suddenly and kept it open while the tall boy lifted Jenny and l3 her into it．A girl nearby took her hand and supported her l4 Jenny got her balance．Then she jumped forward，smiling and proud．In the cheers of the teachers，schoolmates and parents。I silently thanked the warm，understanding people in life who made it l 5 for my disabled daughter to be like her fellow human beings．Then I finally cried．
( )1．A．excited B．lonely C．happy D．weak
( )2．A．greeted B．expected C．encouraged D．followed
( )3．A．easiest B．10ngest C．smallest D．tidiest
( )4．A．choice B．problem C．result D．exam
( )5．A．nothing B．anything C．everything D．something
( )6．A．forward B．fast C．behind D．up
( )7．A．threw B．pushed C．knocked D．fixed
( )8．A．slow B．quiet C．quick D．secret
( )9．A．stupid B．simple C．relaxing D．difficult
( )10．A．school B．family C．team D．heart
( )11．A．ran B．1ay C．walked D．stood
( )12．A．picked up B．gave up C．cut up D．made up
( )13．A．drove B．hid C．put D．hit
( )14．A．when B．until C．after D．unless
( )15．A．popular B．special C．necessary D．possible
二、阅读理解
A(2011·嘉兴)
It’s l0：00 pm．A man leaves a restaurant，gets into his car and drives away．200 metres further he’s stopped by a police officer．
Officer：Good evening，sir．We’re testing drivers for drunk driving．Would you please blow(吹)into this machine?
Man：I’m sorry，I can’t do that．If I blow into that machine．I will get out of air．
Officer：Please come along to the office and we can give you a blood test．
Man：I can’t do that．If you give me a blood test，I will bleed(流血)to death．
Officer：Then you’ll have to get out and walk five metres along this white line．
Man：I can’t do that，either．
Officer：Why not?
Man：Because l’m dead drunk!I can’t open the door．
( )1．The man is stopped metres away from the restaurant．
A．5 B．10 C．200 D．205
( )2．The conversation probably happens in a(an)
A．office B．street C．hospital D．restaurant
( )3．The man wouldn’t have the test for drunk driving because ．
A．he is badly ill B．he will get out of air
C．he is dead drunk D．he will bleed to death
B(2011·宜宾)
Some people think only school children do not agree with their parents，however，it is not true．
Communication is a problem for parents and children of all ages．If it’s hard for you to communicate with your parents。don’t worry about it．Here are some advice for you to bridge the generation gap(代沟)．
Don’t argue(争辩)with your parents．Don’t get to your parents when you are angry．Your parents probably won’t consider your ideas if you are shouting at them．And you can’t express yourself well if you are angry．Go someplace to cool off．Make sure you understand why you are unhappy．Then think about what you want to say to your parents．If you don’t think you can speak to them at the moment，try writing a letter,
Try to reach a compromise(和解)．Perhaps you and you rparents disagree on something．You can keep your disagreement and try your best to accept each other．Michael’s mother didn’t agree with him about buying a motorcycle．They argued over it．But they finally came to a compromise．Michael bought the motorcycle，but only drove it on certain days．
Of course，your parents might refuse to compromise on something．In these situations，it is especially important to show love and respect(尊敬)to them．Showing respect will keep your relationship strong．
Talk about your values．The values of your parents are probably different from those of your own．Tell your parents what you care about，and why．Understanding your values might help them see your purposes in life．
A good relationship with your parents can make you a better and happier person．It is worth having a try!
( )4．According to the passage who have a communication problem?
A．Parents and other people．
B．Only school kids and their parents．
C．Teachers and their students．
D．Parents and children of all ages．
( )5．How many pieces of advice does the writer give us to bridge the generation gap?
A．5． B．4． C．3． D．2．
( )6．The underlined word“bridge”in the passage means“ ”．
A．建立 B．消除 C．通过 D．到达
( )7．If the values of your parents are different from those of yours，you’d better ．
A．argue with them B．keep away from them
C．agree with them all the time D．tell your parents what you care about
( )8．The best title for the passage is ．
A．How to bridge the generation gap B．How to deal with family problems
C．How to be good parents D．How to be a good child
三、任务型阅读(2011·菏泽)
It is said that more than four million people die each year from smoking．That number is frightening．
Yet people around the world continue to smoke．In the United States，about forty-seven million adults smoke．This year，more than 430，000 Americans died of diseases which have something to do with smoking．The American Cancer Society(美国癌症协会)says smoking harms the body greatly．It warns that smoking even a number of cigarettes is dangerous．
It’s(2) (戒烟是不容易的。)However，doctors say you probably will live longer if you do stop smoking．You will feel better and look better．You also will protect the health of family members who breathe your smoke．
“There is not one right way to stop smoking．”doctors say．Any way can help．You can take long walks or spend time in places where smoking is not allowed．Also，you can eat a small piece of fruit or vegetable instead of having a cigarette．(3)The sooner you stop smoking，the more you’ll reduce(减少)your chances of getting cancer and other diseases．
Stop smoking before smoking stops you !
1．根据短文内容，简要回答下列问题。
(1)How many people die from smoking each year?
(2)What does the American Cancer Society say about smoking?
2．根据短文中所给汉语完成句子。
It’s
3．把短文中划线的句子翻译成汉语。
4．给短文拟一个恰当的英文标题。
四、句子翻译
1．我讨厌做家务。(hate doing sth．)
2．当我度假时请问你能照顾我的猫吗?(take care of)
3．去年，姚明获得最佳篮球运动员称号。(win the prize for…)
4．妈妈，不要忘了喂金鱼。(forget to do sth．)
5．你能帮我打扫起居室吗?(help sb do sth．)
五、书面表达
请写一篇短文介绍你的家庭成员周末喜欢做些什么，去哪些地方，原因是什么，以及在家家务的分工并做适当的评价。可以根据需要适当增减内容。词数80词左右。
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 DDCDA
【同步训练10】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 AABDD 6—10 ADBDC 11—15 ACCCD
二、1．fastest 2．the most athletic 3．to send 4．reading 5．not shut 6．to make 7．the most cornfortable 8．the worst 9．the most creative l0．the best
三、1．better 2．worse 3．enough 4．talent 5．negative 6．meeting 7．Mine 8．Feeding
9．snacks l0．swept
四、1．in town 2．think about 3．good service 4．As for 5．cut the price
五、1．together 2．borrow 3．success 4．1isten 5．expensive 6．wash 7．best 8．friendliest 9．Comfortable l0．1asted
[能力提升]
一、1—5 BCABD 6—10 CBADC 11—15 DACBD
二、1—3 CBC 4—8 DCBDB
三、1. (1)More than four million people die from smoking each year． (2)The American Cancer Society says smoking harms the body greatly． 2．not easy to give up smoking． 3．你戒烟越早，就会更大地减少你患癌症和其他疾病的风险。4．Stop smoking before smoking stops you!
四、1．I hat doing chores． 2．Could you please take care of my cat when I am on vacation? 3．Yao Ming won the prize for the best basketball player last year．4．Mom，don’t forget to feed the goldfish． 5．Could you help me clean the living room?
五、One possible version：
I have a wonderful family，because we often have fun in many places and we often do chores．Xiamen is a beautiful city in southern China．There are many interesting places in Xiamen．The best restaurant in Xiamen is Jason’s．It has the friendliest service and the most comfortable seats．We often feel the most comfortable having lunch there．On weekends，my mom and I usually go to Jinyi to see the movies．Because it has the biggest screens．It is also the closest to my home．As for chores，my mom usually cleans the room．My dad does the dishes．And I sweep the floor．I like doing chores very much because I think it’s a good way to express my love to my parents．
第11讲 八年级(下)Units l—2
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．building(n．)建筑物→build(v．)建筑，建造→build(n．)体形
2．fewer(adj．)更少的→less(adj．同义词)更少的
3．alone(adv．)单独地，孤独地→lonely(adj．)孤独的，寂寞的
4．probably(adv．)大概；或许→perhaps／maybe／possibly(adv．同义词)大概；或许；可能
5．able(adj．)能；能够，ability(n．)能力
6．dress(v．)穿衣→dress(n．)裙子
7．unpleasant(adj．)使人不愉快的→pleasant(adj．反义词)使人愉快的→please(v．)使愉悦一pIeased(n．)愉快的→pleasure(n．)快乐
8．scientist(n．)科学家→cience(n．)科学→scientific(adj．)科学的
9．possible(adj．)可能的→impossible(adj．反义词)不可能的→possibly(adv．)可能地→possibility(n．)可能性
10．argue(v．)争论；争吵→argument(n．)争论；争吵
11．surprise(v．)使惊奇；使意夕→surprised(adj．)惊讶的→surprising(n．)令人惊奇的→surprise (n．)惊喜
12．except(prep．) →besides(prep．近义词)除……之外；而且
13．fail(v．) →failure(n．)失败
14．freedom(n．)自由→free(adj．)自由的；空闲的
15．sound(n．)声音→sound(v．)听起来
16．advice(n．) →suggestion(n．同义词) →advise(n．)建议
【重点短语】
1．in l00 years=100 years from now一百年后 2．1ive to be 200 years old活到两百岁
3．1ive on a space station生活在太空站上 4．1ive alone单独居住
5．fly rockets to the moon乘坐火箭去月球 6．fall in love with爱上
7．go skating／swimming去滑冰／游泳 8．be able to能够
9．come true(希望等)实现；达到 10．hundreds of大量；许多 11．in the future在将来
12．wake up醒来；叫醒 13．over and over again反复地；一次又一次
14．get bored感到厌烦 15．argue with跟……争吵 16．out of style过时的
17．in style时髦的 18．call sb．up打电话给某人 19．a ticket to…一张……的票
20．pay for付款 21．borrow sth．from sb． 向某人借某物
22．ask sb．for sth． 向某人要某物 23．buy sth．for sb． 买某物给某人
24．find out查明；查出 25．get a part—time job找兼职工作
26．be angry with…对……生气 27．get on well with．．． 与……相处融洽
28．have a fight with．．． 跟……打架 29．fit．．．into… 找到时间(做某事)
30．as…as possible尽可能…… 31．under too much pressure在太大的压力下
32．complain about抱怨 33．see sb．doing sth． 看见某人正在做某事
34．compare…with… 把……和……做比较
35．find it hard／difficult to do sth． 发现做某事很困难
36．on the one hand…on the other hand．．一方面……，另一方面……
37．the same as…与……一样 38．tell sb．to do sth． 告诉某人做某事
【重点句型】
1．People won’t use money．Everything will be free．人们不再用纸币，一切都将是免费的。
2．Kids won’t go to school．They’11 study at home oncomputers．孩子们不去上学，他们将在家里通过电脑学习。
3．There will be fewer trees．树木将会更少。
4．There will be less pollution．污染将会更少。
5．一What’s wrong?／What’S the matter?怎么了?
一My clothes are out of style．我的衣服过时了。
6．一What should I do?我该怎么办?
一Maybe you should buy some new clothes．或许你应该买一些新衣服。
7．You could write him a letter．你可以给他写一封信。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．fall．落下：跌落
(1)fall in love with爱上(某人或某物)
I went to Shanghai last year and fell in lovewith it．我去年去了上海，并爱上了它。
(2)fall down摔倒，倒下
Yesterday morning I fell down from my bike and broke my left le9．昨天上午我从自行车上摔下来，摔伤了我的左腿。
(3)fall off从……摔倒或掉落
The top button fell off the shirt．衬衫最上面的钮扣掉落下来了。
(4)fall asleep入睡
My father eouldn’t fall asleep last night because of his sore back．我爸爸昨晚因为背痛而睡不着觉。
适时点津
fall作为名词时意思为“秋天；秋季”，相当于autumn。
活学活用
The boy off the bike and hurt his left leg yesterday．
A． fall B．fell C．feel D．felt
解析：本题从句意可知是“从自行车上跌落”，需用短语“fall off”，时间为yesterday，故用过去式。
答案：B
2．advice n．建议
(1)advice为不可数名词，“建议”，可用some，much，a piece of，pieces of等修饰，不能说an advice或many／a few advices。
(2)表示“有关……的建议”时，用介词on接名词、代词或由疑问词引导的不定式。如：
Let，s ask for his advice on what to do next．我们去征求一下他的意见下一步该怎么办。
适时点津
与advice有关的常见搭配：
give advice on对……提出建议
take／follow one’s advice接受某人的建议
ask for advice征求意见
act on one’s advice照某人的建议去做
accept／refuse one’s advice接受(拒绝)某人的建议
offer advice to sb．向某人提供建议
want one’s advice需要某人的建议
活学活用
(2011·东营)I don’t know how to deal with my family problem．Can you give me some ?
A．advice B．messages C．information D．instructions
解析：本题考查名词词义辨析。句意为“我不知道怎样处理我的家庭问题。你能给我一些建议吗?”advice是不可数名词。
答案：A
3．hundreds of许多。大量
(1)当hundred前没有具体的数字时，表示“大量的，许多的”的意思，用hundreds of，类似的有thousands of，millions of。
(2)当hundred前有具体的数字时，hundred只能是单数，如three hundred，类似的有two thousand，five million。
适时点津
可以利用口诀记住这一类数词的用法：“有前无后，无前有后”。意思是前面有具体数字时，后面就不加s；而前面没有具体数字时，则后面加s变为复数，再加of。
适时点津
(2011·重庆)The government of Chongqing is building cheap and good houses for the people．
A．thousand B．thousands C．thousand of D．thousands of
解析：本题中空格前没有具体的数字，若要表达“成千上万”，根据“无前有后”的规则，正确的表达是thousands of。
答案：D
4．one of the biggest movie companies最大的电影公司之一
(1)one of…意为“……的其中之一”，通常后面接名词复数形式或宾格的人称代词。如one of the teachers，one of them。
(2)one of…的另一种用法：one of+形容词最高 级+名词复数形式。如：
Beijing is one of the biggest cities in the world．北京是世界上最大的城市之一。
适时点津
(2011·河北)Cici enjoys dancing．It’s one of her ．
A．prize B．prizes C．hobby D．hobbies
解析：本题中第一句讲的是爱好，根据one of．．．的用法，后接名词复数形式。
答案：D
【重点句型】
1．一般将来时
一般将来时表示将要发生的动作或存在的状态以及计划、打算做某事。其结构有如下几种：
(1)will+动词原形(will可以用于任何人称)，需要注意的是当主语是第一人称时will可以换成shall，特别是在以l或we作主语的问句中，一般用shall。
(2)be going to do sth．
(3)现在进行时be doin9也可表示将来。第(1)种结构的句式变化是：变否定句在will后边加not，变一般疑问句把will提前。第(2)种结构的句式变化要在be上做文章。
活学活用
一般将来时态的时间状语有如下几种：
(1)this引导的短语，如：this year。
(2)tomorrow及其相关短语，如：tomorrow morning。
(3)next引导的短语，如：next month。
(4)其他的还有from now on，in the future，in an hour等。
活学活用
(2011·绥化)There a heavy rain in Beijing tomorrow．
A ．is B．will be C．is going to have
解析：本题考查there be句型的时态。there be表示“有”，根据时间状语tomorrow可知句子要用一般将来时，there be的一般将来时态结构为there will be。
答案：B
2．there be句型
(1)there be句型用来表示存在关系，意思为“某地方有……”。如：
There is a kite in the tree．在树上有一只风筝。
(2)there be句型的构成形式一般为“there is／are+某物／某人+地点”，既可以表示某地方有某物，也可以表示某地方有什么人。一般将来时态中的构成形式为“there is／are going to be”或“there will be”。如：
There will be more tall buildings in the city．这座城市将会有更多的高楼。
活学活用
(2011·岳阳)There a football match on CCTV-5 at nine tomorrow evening．
A．will have B．is going to be C．is having
解析：本题考查there be句型的时态。根据时间状语at nine tomorrow evenin9可知，本题需要用there be的将来时态，后面接单数的主语，可以用there will be或there is going to be。
答案：B
适时点津
当be动词后的主语为并列主语时，be动词的形式要和它后面紧跟的名词保持一致，即要遵循就近原则，如果主语为单数可数名词或不可数名词，be动词形式应为单数，若为复数名词，be动词应为复数。
活学活用
There some milk，two eggs and a few cakes on the table．
A．is B．are C．has D．have
解析：本题考查there be句型的用法。be动词的形式要与后面靠近的名词保持一致，somemilk为不可数名词。
答案：A
2．find it+adj．+to do sth．发现做某事很……句中的it是形式宾语，真正的宾语是后面的动词不定式to do sth．。
活学活用
(2011·广东)Try to sing some English songs，you’ll find it interesting a foreign language．
A．learning B． learns C．learn D．to learn
解析：本题考查句型“find+it+口力．+to do sth．”的用法，意为“发现做某事很……”。
答案：D
【巧辨异同】
1．in与after
(1)in指以现在时间为起点的“在一段时间之后”，表示“在将来……(时间)之内”，往往与一般将来时态连用。after指以过去时间为起点的“在一段时间之后”，通常与一般过去时态连用。如：I will be back in two weeks．我将在两周以后回来。
She started on Monday and arrived in Shanghaiafter three days．她星期一动身，并在三天之后到达上海。
(2)after指某个特定的未来时刻或日期“之后”，可指以将来某一时间为起点的若干时间“之后”，可以与一般将来时态连用，并且after后接名词也可以用于一般将来时态中。如after class(课后)，after work(下班之后)。
适时点津
针对将来时态中“in+时间段”提问，必须用how soon。
活学活用
(2011·凉山)－ will your Englishteacher come back?In two days．
A．When B．How long C．How soon
解析：本题考查特殊疑问词的用法。根据答语In two days可知提问应该使用how soon，意思是“多久以后”。
答案：C
2．more，less与fewer
(1)more为many，much的比较级，意为“更多”，可修饰可数与不可数名词。
(2)less是little的比较级，意为“更少，较少”，修饰不可数名词。
(3)fewer是few的比较级，意为“更少”，修饰可数名词复数。
适时点津
a few表示“几个”，a little表示“一点”，两者都表示肯定。而few，little则表示否定，意为“几乎没有”。
活学活用
(2011·哈尔滨)Each of us has life goals，which will guide us to a bright future．Without life goals，we may waste our lifetime．
A．a little B．few C．a few
解析：根据句意“人人都有生活目标……”，表示肯定的意思，而后面跟的是可数名词复数。
答案：C
3．alone与lonely
(1)a1one强调形体上的单一，在句中多作表语或宾语补足语。alone还可作副词，表示“单独地，独自地”，在句中作状语。如：Leave me alone!别管我!(作宾语补足语)I don’t like living alone．我不喜欢一个人住。(作状语)
(2)lonely表示“孤独的；寂寞的”，强调内心的感受。它只能作形容词，在句中可作表语，也可作前置定语。lonely修饰地点时，意思为“荒凉的；偏僻的”。如：Though the old man is alone，he doesn’t feel lonely．这位老人虽然一个人，但他并不感到孤独。(作表语)
适时点津
强记：alone通常表示形体上的单一，而lonely通常形容精神上的孤单。
活学活用
Little Tom is an orphan．He now feels without his only friend the dog．
A．very more lonely B．even more lonely C．more still lonely D．more far alone
解析：从feel可知这里描述的是精神上感到孤单，需用lonely，而比较级more lonely一般要用a tittle，much，a lot，even等词修饰。
答案：B
4．except．besides与but
(1)except表示“除……之外(不包括在内)”，指从整体中排除except所指的人或物，其前常有all，every，any，no或其他复合词修饰。如：We all went to visit the museum except Liu Li．除了刘丽外，我们都去参观博物馆了。
(2)besides表示“除……之外(包括在内)”，其意义是在原来的基础上加上besides除外的人或物，其前常有other，another，any other，a few等修饰。如：
Besides singing English songs，there are many other fun ways of learning English．
除唱英文歌之外，还有许多其他学习英语的有趣方法。
(3)but表示“除……之外”，常与有否定意义的词连用。当but前有动词do的各种形式时，but后接动词原形。but作副词时，意为“不过，只”。如：
Last weekend I did nothing but watch DVDs．上周末我除了看DVD，什么事也没做。 ’
活学活用
Mary was disappointed when she found out they had gone to the cinema her．
A ．except B．besides C．for D．without
解析：从句意可知，Mary感到很失望，因为除了她之外，其他人都去看电影了。
答案：A
5．too either与also
(1)too用于肯定句中，置于句尾，其前常用逗号分开。
(2)either用于否定句中，置于句尾，其前常用逗号分开。
(3)also用于肯定句中，一般放在be动词和助动词之后、行为动词之前。如：
We visited the Great Wall．We also went to the Palace Museum．我们参观了长城，我们还去了故宫博物院。
活学活用
I don’t speak English well，Li Lei doesn’t，
A．too B．Also C．as well D．either
解析：either表示“也”，用于否定句，置于句末。而too和as well用于肯定句，also放在主谓之间。
答案：D
6．borrow，lend与keep
(1)borrow表示的是从别人那里借来东西，即我们通常所说的“借进来”。如：
We often borrow books from our school library．我们经常从学校图书馆借书。
(2)lend表示的是把自己的东西借给别人，即我们通常所说的“借出去”。如：
Thank you for lending me your bike．谢谢你把自行车借给我。
(3)keep的意思也是“借”，但一般是指借来后的保存或使用阶段，是一段持续的时间，因此可以与时间段连用。如：
You can keep my recorder for three days．我的录音机你可以借用三天。
适时点津
lend与borrow一样，是一个瞬间完成的动作，不能与一段时间连用，而keep可以与时间段连用。
活学活用
(2011·恩施) －May I your dictionary? －Sorry．LiLei it for five days．
A．1end；borrowed B． borrow：has kept
C．borrow；has borrowed D．1end：has lent
解析：本题中第一空是指“借用一下”的意思，需用borrow；而第二空后接时间段，指“借用多长时间”，需要用延续性动词keep的适当形式。
答案：B
7．Dress wear与put on
(1)dress意为“穿衣；打扮”，可作不及物动词用。如：
Do we have to dress for dinner?我们吃饭要换正式衣服吗?
dress也可作及物动词用，后面加表示人的词，不能加衣服，意为“给某人穿衣服”。如：
Could you please dress the children?你可以给孩子们穿上衣服吗?
(2)wear意为“穿着；佩戴着”，后面加衣服或鞋帽之类的名词。但wear仅表示状态，即穿上衣服之后的状态。如：My mother likes wearing a scarf．我妈妈喜欢戴围巾。
(3)put on意为“穿上；戴上”，后面加衣服或鞋帽之类的名词。但put on表示动作，即从没穿到穿上的动作。如：She put on the coat before she went out．她在出去之前穿上外套。
活学活用
(2011·广安) －David．can you yourself? －Of course，I can．
A．dress B． put on C．wear
解析：本题考查动词辨析。dress sb．给某人穿衣服；Put on是穿上(衣服)，表示动作；wear是穿着(衣服)，表示状态。根据空格后面所跟的词可知，这是在问大卫他能不能给自己穿衣服。
答案：A
8．find out。find与look for
(1)find out意为“找出，发现，查明”，多指通过调查、询问、打听、研究之后搞清楚，弄明白或指找出较难找到的、无形的抽象的东西。
(2)find意为“找到，发现”，通常指找到或发现有形的东西，也可指偶然发现某物的某种情况，强调找的结果。
(3)look for意为“寻找”，强调寻找的动作和过程。
活学活用
(2011·泰安) － Jack，could you help me when the plane will take off on the Internet?
－I’m sorry，my computer doesn’t work．
A．get out B．1ook out C．take out D．find out
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。9et out是“出去”的意思；look out是“当心，小心”的意思；take out是“取出，拿出”的意思；find out是“查明，找出”的意思。第一句句意：杰克，你能帮我在网上查一下飞机什么时候起飞吗?
答案：D
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·上海)We are glad to hear that the Greens to a new flat next week．
A．move B．moved C．will move D．have moved
解析：根据句子中的时间状语next week可以知道，本句需要用一般将来时。
答案：C
真题2 (2011·宁夏) －when will the second class begin? － two minutes．
A．For B．At C．In D．After
解析：在一般将来时态中，表示“……之后”要使用介词in，而after通常用于一般过去时。
答案：C
真题3 (2011·陕西)If there no buying and selling of animals，there no killing in nature．
A．is；will be’ B．will be；will be C．is；is D．will be；is
解析：本题将there be句型放在if引导的条件状语从句中考查。if条件状语从句要用一般现在时态，而主句根据句意可用各种不同的时态，通常使用一般将来时。
答案：A
真题4 (2011·苏州)If you don’t work．enough，I don’t think your dream will Come
A．hardly；truly B．hardly；true C．hard；true D．hard；truly
解析：本题考查形容词和副词的用法。副词用来修碲动词，hard意思为“努力地”，hardly意思为··几乎不”，work hard意思为“努力工作”，come true意思为“实现”。
答案：C
真题5 (2011·昆明) －What’s the matter with Tina? －
A．She is away B．She is cool
C．She has a sore throat D．She should take some medicine
解析：What’s the matter…?通常用来询问对方怎么了，一般针对身体状况。
答案：C
名师预测
从下面选出与下列各句中划线部分意思相同或相近，并能替换划线部分的选项。
A．flies B．as for C．gets lost D．says
( )1．The radio reports that there will be anotherstrong wind in South China．
( )2．Well，talkingabout my study，I’d like to begin with my English learnin9．
( )3．Little Kate usually loses her way in the city．
( )4．Time goes by,quickly!
同步训练11八年级(下)Units l--2
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．— ?—It doesn’t work．
A．How are you B．Where is your watch
C．What’s wrong with your watch D．How much is your watch
( )2．I hear that a speech on pollution tomorrow．
A．there will have B．there are C．there will be D．there is
( )3．(2011·呼和浩特) —Did you go to Jim’s birthday party?—No．I ．
A．haven’t invited B．didn’t invite
C．am not invited D．wasn’t invited
( )4．(2011·内江) —How much money did she you yesterday? —$500．I told her I would return it to her in three weeks．
A．give B．borrow C．lend D．make
( )5．(201 1·临沂)Chen Guangbiao says he all his money to charities when he dies．
A．leaves B．1eft C．willleave D．would leave
( )6．Everyone has his own dreams，but those dreams don’t always ．
A．come true B．come over C．keep true D．get out
( )7．—I don’t have her address． —Oh，my god，what shall we do?I don’t .
A．also B．too C．either D．neither
( )8．(2011·成都) — scientific attitude is needed in developing our city．—I agree with you．In this way，we can make mistakes．
A．Fewer；less B．Less；more C．More；fewer
( )9．(2011·内江)Eight students in our school are from countryside．
A．hun&'eds B．hundred C．hundreds of D．hundred of
( )10．(2011·哈尔滨)In order to speak English better，we be afraid of losing face．
Because the most important thing is to practice．Remember，practice makes perfect．
A．should B．shouldn’t C．have to
二、语篇填空
We have a lot of trouble in our life，but we have to face them．When you are feeling(1) (不高兴的)or forget how great you are，there are six ways to(2) (使)you feel good about yourself．
‘Look in the mirror(镜子)and say to yourself，“I’m a special person and there’s(3) (没有人)in the world just the same(4) (像)me．Ican do anything!”It may not(5) (听起来)so good，but it really works!
Do something nice for someone．(6) (帮助)others always makes you feel good．
Smile!Be(7) (友好的)to people you meet．Look for the good things in your friends and family．
Learn something new!Have you always wanted to decorate your own room or learn(8)
(如何)to swim?Go for it!New challenges are fun and give you a sense of accomplishment(满足)when you have finished．
Read and start a diary．Turn off the TV and let your imagination(想象)(9) (飞)!If you have any thoughts，dreams or anything you want，write them down!Writing always helps to express your feelings． Stay with your fanfily．We all(10) (需要)our family time．Talk with your Mum and Dad or maybe even your cousin．
三、用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空
1．She (visit)her grandparents next weekend．
2．We should eat lots of fruit and vegetables to keep (health)．
3．There are eight (hundred)students in our school．
4．There (not be)more pollution if there are fewer cars in the streets．
5．I want to work for (I)when l’m 30．
6．The Yangtze River is one of the (long)rivers in the world．
7．Kate，could you please tell your friend (come)tonight?
8．National Day is coming．I don’t know where (go)for vacation．
9．If you don’t go on a diet。it is (possible)for you to lose weight．
10．The local people had to move away because of the serious (pollute)．
四、用所给动词的适当形式填空
fall，seem，fail，fly，free
1．I rockets to the moon in the future．
2．I went to Hainan last month and in love with it．
3．It that it’s going to rain．
4．The people in Iraq keep fighting for their own ．
5．He was unhappy because he in yesterday’s English exam．
五、补全对话(2011·郴州)
M：Good morning，doctor．
W：Good morning，Jack．You don’t look well．(1)
M：I have a sore throat．
W：Have you got a fever?
M：(2) My temperature is a little high．
W：When did it start?
M：(3)
W：Did you have any medicine?
M：No，I didn’t．(4)
W：You should drink some tea with honey，and take the medicine．You will feel better soon．
M：(5)
W：You’re welcome．
[能力提升] · ’
一、完形填空
I was a happy boy until I lost my right leg in a traffic accident at the age of eleven．I was very sad，but I could do 1 ．Whenever my 2 played games happily outside，I had to stay in the classroom and looked out of the window painfully．I felt very 3 ．
For a long time，I felt hopeless， 4 my mother always encouraged me，“You are the best one in my eyes．If you work hard，nothing is 5 ．’’ I 6 books for help and soon they became my best friends．When l was sad，they 7 ．When I felt happy，they shared my feelings．They could take me to 8 wonderful world，in which I could learn 9 and enjoy myself．
I began to write down my thoughts in a notebook and spent much time 10 ．Sometimes I stayed up late．Luckily，when I 11 middle school。I met a good teacher．He always spoke highly of me and often read my compositions in class and kept helping me 12 writing．
Now I’m full of confidence．And I have already won the first l 3 in the writing competition all over China．I will work harder to be a writer and l4 give up．I believe l 5 the world is what you think it is．So smile at the world and the world will smile back．
( )1．A．anything B．something C．nothing D．everything
( )2．A．boys B．classmates C．students D．teachers
( )3．A．alone B．happy C．sadly D．lonely
( )4．A．although B．when C．if D．because
( )5．A．OK B．impossible C．possible D．necessary
( )6．A．turned B．ask C．turned to D．got
( )7．A．cheered up me B．cheered me up C．cheered on me D．cheered me on
( )8．A．other B．the other C．another D．others
( )9．A．many B．a lot of C too much D．a lot
( )10．A．writing B．write C．to write D．wrote
( )11．A．entered B．1earned C．studied D．entered into
( )12．A．to B．in C．with D．for
( )13．A．proud B．pride C．person D．prize
( )14．A．often B．never C．usually D．seldom
( )15．A．／ B．What C．if D．when
二、阅读理解
Tom and Joseph are best friends．They spent their summer vacation traveling in Africa．When they were walking through the desert(沙漠)，they started to argue about nothing．Tom became very angry and slapped(掌击)Joseph in the face．
Joseph felt hurt，but he didn’t say anything to Tom．Then Joseph wrote in the sand(沙地)：“Today my best friend slapped me in the face．’’
They kept on walking until they found a small lake．They decided to have a bath．But when Joseph got in the water，he started to sink．Tom jumped in after him and pulled him out．His friend saved his lire．
After he became well again，Joseph wrote on a stone(石头)：“Today my best friend saved my life．”
Tom couldn’t understand it，“After I hurt you，you wrote in the sand．Now you write on a stone．Why?”he asked．
“When someone hurts us we should write it down in sand and the wind will take it away，”Joseph answered，“But when someone does something good for us，we must write it in stone so that no one can ever take it away．’’
( )1．Tom slapped Joseph because ．
A．he wanted to play a trick on Joseph
B．he argued with Joseph and got angry with him
C．Joseph took him the wrong way in the desert
D．Joseph spent too much time playing with sand
( )2．What did Joseph do after Tom slapped him in the face?
A．He got very angry and began to cry．
B．He got very angry and slapped Tom in return．
C．He got very angry and wrote about it in the sand．
D．He got very angry but kept on walking with Tom．
( )3．What didn’t happen after Joseph got in the water?
A．He started to sink in the water．
B．Tom jumped in after him and pulled him out．
C．He was saved by Tom and became well again．
D．Tom looked at Joseph and walked away．
( )4．After he was saved by Tom，why did Joseph write about it on a stone?
A．Because no wind can ever take it away and he won’t forget it．
B．Because there were only stones for him to write on at that time．
C．Because it is easier for him to write on a stone than on the sand．
D．Because he writes better on the stone than on the sand．
( )5．What can we learn from the story?
A．Best friends should share everything in life．
B．Friendship is great and it deserves(值得) remembering forever．
C．It is better to write on a stone than on the sand．
D．We should try our best to help friends out of difficulty．
三、任务型阅读
在生活中，我们经常会遇到一些令人不愉快的事情，应该如何解决呢?请你把以下提供的几个问题和解决办法给予合理配对。
Problems：
1．There is more pollution than before because the people have bought more cars．
2．The NO．16 bus is always late．
3．My parents hope I stay at home and study all day，eyen on weekends．
4．My clothes are out of style．
5．Some students talk loudly in the library．
Solutions：
A．Tell them that we need to relax ourselves after studying for a long time or ask our teacher for help．
B．You’d better tell them to keep quiet．
C．Call the bus company and ask for the better service．
D．Make some posters to ask them to live a low-carbon life like riding bikes or taking a bus to work．
E．Maybe you should buy some new clothes．
1． 2． 3． 4． 5．
四、句子翻译
1．科学家正在努力使机器人看上去像人，而且跟我们做一样的事情。(the same as…)
2．我想你应该向你的父母要钱。(ask…for…)
3．如果你努力，你将能学好。(be able to)
4．我发现想学好英语很困难。(find it difficult to do sth．)
5．女孩子晚上一个人出去是危险的。(It’s+“力．+for sb．to do sth．)
五、书面表达(2011·北京)
根据中文和英文提示，写一篇意思连贯、符合逻辑、不少于60词的回信。信的开头和结尾已给出，其词数不计入所完成的回信。请不要写出你的校名和姓名。
成长中的每个人都要面对烦恼，并解决问题。假设你叫刘明，是美国中学生爱丽丝的朋友。你收到了她的电子邮件，请给她回复，回答她的问题，提出你的建议，并就此事谈谈你的看法。
Hi!Liu Ming，
I’m so sad．Angela is a close friend of mine．
This morning she wanted to borrow some money from me．If I lend her the money，I’m afraid she won’t I pay me back．I don’t know what to do．Do you have the same problem?I need your help．
I’m looking forward to hearing from you soon．
Yours，
Alice
Hi!Alice，
I’m glad to hear from you．
I hope what I said can help you．
Yours，
Liu Ming
答案
【名师预测】
1—4．DBCA
【同步训练11】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 CCDCC 6—10 ACCBB
二、1．unhappy 2．make 3．nobody 4．as 5．sound 6．Helping 7．friendly 8．how 9．fly 10．need
三、1．will visit 2．healthy 3．hundred 4．won’t be 5．myself 6．longest 7．to come 8．to go 9．impossible l0．pollution
四、1．will fly 2．fell 3．seems 4．freedom 5．failed
五、1．What’s the matter／the trouble／wrong(with you)?
2．Yes(，I have)．
3．It started two days ago／yesterday／last night．
4．What should I do?／What can I do?／Can you give me some advice?
5．Thank you(very much)．／Thanks(a lot)．
[能力提升]
一、1—5 CBDAB 6—10 CBCDA 11—15 ACDBA
二、1—5 BCDAB
三、1—5 DCAEB
四、1．Scientists are now trying to make robots look like people and do the same things as us．
2．I think you should ask your parents for some money．
3．If you work hard，you will be able to learn it well．
4．I find it difficult to learn English well．
5．It’s dangerous for girls to go out alone at night．
五、0ne possible version：
Hi!Alice，
I’m glad to hear from you．
Yes，I sometimes have the same problem．
I think if she really needs the money，you’d better lend it to her．You don’t need to worry too much．She’ll probably pay you back when she has money．If you don’t lend her the money，I’m afraid you may lose the friend．
I think everyone may have trouble in life and we should help each other．So when my friends need money．I will try my best to help them．Maybe I’ll get it back．or maybe I won’t．
I hope what I said can help you．
Yours，
Liu Ming
第12讲八年级(下)Units 3—4
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．experience(n．)→experience(v．)经历；体验
2．imagine(v．)想象→imagination(n．)想象力→imaginary(adj．)想象的
3．strange(adj．)奇怪的；陌生的→stranger(n．)陌生人
4．amazing(adj．)令人惊异的→surprising(adj．同义
词)令人惊异的→amazed(adj．)惊奇的→surprisod(adj．同义词)惊奇的
5．silence(n．)寂静；沉默silent(adj．)寂静的→silently(adv．)沉默地
6．meaning(n．)意义；含义→mean(v．)意味着→ meaningful(adj．)有意义的
7．true(adj．)真实的；确实的→truly(adv．)真实地；确实地→truth(n．)事实；真相
8．1ucky(adj．)幸运的→luck(n．)运气→luckily(adv．)幸运地→unluckily(adv．反义词)不幸地
9．own(adj．)自己的→own(v．)拥有→owner(n．)拥有者；主人
10．decision(n．) →decide(v．)决定
11．danger(n．)危险→dangerous(n西．)危险的→endangered(adj．)濒临灭绝的
【重点短语】
1．in front of．．． 在……前面 2．get out of．．． 从……出来
3．take off起飞；脱下 4．run away逃跑
5．have an unusual experience有一次不寻常的经历 6．think about考虑
7．at the doctor’s在医生的诊所里 8．hear about听说
9．in silence沉默地 10．take place发生
11．have meaning to…对……有意义 12．all over the world遍及世界
13．be／get mad at…=be／get angry with… 对 ……生气
14．not…anymore不再 15．first of all首先 16．pass(on)…to…传递……给……
17．be supposed to do sth． 理应做某事；被期望做某事
18．be good at=do well in在某方面做得好 19．be in good health身体健康
20．end-of-year exams期末考试 21．get nervous变得紧张
22．get over克服 23．have a hard time with… 在某方面有困难
24．be surprised to find… 很惊奇地发现…… 25．agree with同意；赞成
26．open up one’s eyes开拓视野 27．in danger处于危险中
【重点句型】
1．What were you doing when the UFO arrived?当不明飞行物到达时，你在做什么?
I was standing in front of the library．我正站在图书馆前。
2．While it was looking at the souvenirs，the shop as sistant called the police．当它在看纪念品时，售货员报了警。
3．You can imagine how strange it was!你可以想象它有多么奇怪
4．He said I was hard-working．他说我很努力。
5．She said she could speak three languages．她说她会说三种语言。
6．In English，I，m better at reading than listening．在英语方面，相比听力，我更擅长阅读。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．take off(飞机)起飞；脱下(衣帽等)
适时点津
与take相关的短语：
take away拿走/take down记下/take out拿出/take back收回
take after(在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像/take place发生
take photos拍照/take notes做笔记/take an interest in．．．对……有兴趣
活学活用
(2011·资阳)Hurry up，Mike．You must get to the airport an hour before the plane ．
A．gets off B．turns off C．takes off D．puts off
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。get off“下车”；turn off“关闭”；take off“起飞”；put off'‘推迟”。句意为：快点，马克。你必须在飞机起飞一个小时之前到达机场。
答案：C
2．happen v．发生
(1)happen是不及物动词，sth．+happen+地点／时问，意为“某地／某时发生某事”，主语通常是事情，如accident，what，that thing或something等词语。如：
Something strange happened in our neighborhood last night．昨晚我附近地区发生了奇怪的事情。
(2)sth．+happen to+sb．意为“某人出了某事”，常指不好的事发生在某人身上。
(3)sb．+happen+to do sth．意为“某人碰巧做某事”。此简单句可与句型“It happens／happened that…”互换使用。如：I happened to have no money with me．It happened that I had no money with me．我碰巧身上没带钱。
活学活用
(2011·铜仁)Great changes in Tongren in the past five years．
A．have happened B．have taken place
C．have been happened D．have been taken place
解析：happen和take place都不可用于被动语态，可先排除C、D。根据句意“铜仁在过去五年里发生了很大的变化。”这些变化在很大程度上有人为的参与，而不是偶然的变化。
答案：B
3．surprise
(1)surprise作名词，表示“惊奇，诧异”；to one’ssurprise表示“使……吃惊的是”。
(2)surprise作及物动词(后接某人作宾语)，表示“使……惊奇”。
(3)surprise的过去分词surprised作表语，表示“感到惊奇”，be surprised at sth．／sb．表示“对……感到惊奇”。
适时点津
surprised口彩：意为“感到惊奇的”，形容人；surprising adj．意为“令人惊奇的”，形容事或物。
活学活用
I’m the newspaper reporter interviewed me．
A．surprising B．surprise C．surprised D．surprises
解析：本题考查词义辨析。句意：我对新闻记者采访我一事感到吃惊。
答案：C
4．what to do
“疑问词+不定式”结构相当于一个名词性从句，常常可用同等成分的从句代替。改写时，只需在疑问词后面加一个适当的主语(这个主语一般与主旬的主语一致)，并将不定式改 成适当形式的谓语即可。如：
I don't know what to do．=I don’t know what Ishould do．
活学活用
(2011·青岛)一I often chat with my friends onthe Internet．一You are so smart!Will you please tell me ?
A．how to do B．how to do it C．how to use D．when can I use it
解析：本题考查“疑问词+动词不定式”。宾语从句必须为陈述语序，且句中连词在句中充当一定的成分，先排除D。how是用来提问如何做具体某事的方法和技巧，A和C都没有具体的某事，缺少宾语，故应排除。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．过去进行时
(1)过去进行时由“was／were+动词ing形式”构成。以动词work为例，其肯定式，否定式，疑问式和简略答语见下表：
肯定式
否定式
疑问式和简略答语
I／He／She／It
was working．
I／He／She／he was
not working
一Was I working?
一Yes，you were
We／You／They
were working．
We／You／They
were not working．
一Were we working?
一No。you weren’t
(2)过去进行时的用法：过去进行时表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间正在进行的动作。这一特定的过去时间，除有上、下文暗示以外，一般用时间状语来表示。
2．在陈述句中直接引语和间接引语的转换
(1)直接引语：说话人直接引用别人的原话。
(2)间接引语：说话人用自己的话把别人的意思转述出来。
(3)直接引语一般前后要加引号，间接引语则不用引号。
(4)规则：
①人称变化：从句中的第一人称多改为第三人称；第二人称根据情况改为第一或第三人称；第三人称不变。
②时态变化：如果主句的谓语动词是一般过去时，直接引语变为间接引语时从句的谓语动词在时态方面要做以下变化：
直接引语
间接引语
一般现在时
一般过去时(客观真理除外)
一般将来时
过去将来时
现在进行时
过去进行时
如果主句的谓语动词是一般现在时，直接引语变为间接引语时，从句的动词时态保持不变；直接引语如果是客观真理变为间接引语时，时态保持不变。
③直接引语中的一些指示代词，时间状语、地点状语和动词须作相应的变化：
直接引语
间接引语
指示代词
this这，these这些
that那，those那些
时
间
状
语
now现在
then那时
today今天
that day那天
tonight今晚
that night那天晚上
this week这星期
that week那个星期
yesterday昨天
the day before前一天
last week上星期
the week before前一个星期
ago以前
before以前
tomorrow明天
the next／following day第二天
next week下星期
the next／following week第二个星期
地点状语
here这里
there那里
动词
come来
go去
适时点津
直接引语中的时间状语根据实际情况转述为间接引语时，有时不需要改变。如tomorrow，如果转述的动作发生在当天，无需改变；如果转述的动作不在当天，则需将tomorrow变为the next day。
活学活用
(2011·枣庄)He said that light much faster than sound．
A．has travelled B．went C．travels D．travelled
解析：本题考查宾语从句的时态，如果从句讲述的是客观事实或真理，从句时态不受主句时态的限制，要用一般现在时。句意：他说光比声传播的速度快。
答案：C
3．感叹句
感叹旬的构成有：
(1)What+a／an+形容词+单数名词+主语+谓语!如：What a good book it is!它是多好的一本书啊!
(2)What+形容词+复数可数名词+主语+谓语!如：What easy questions they are!它们是多么简单的问题啊!
(3)what+形容词+不可数名词+主语+谓语!如：What cold weather it is!多么冷的天气啊!
(4)How+形容词+主语+be动词!如：How nice the watch is!这只表多么漂亮啊!
(5)How+副词+主语+谓语!如：How hard they are working!他们工作得多么辛苦啊!
活学活用
(2011·南京)－You can’t imagine great fun chatting online is．
－Really?But it may Cause you a lot of trouble．
A．what B．how C．why D．whether
解析：本题考查感叹句。分析句意可知这是一个感叹句，在名词性词组前，用感叹词what。答案：A
【巧辨异同】
1．when与while
Wnen
while
中文释义
当……时候
当……时候
英文释义
at or during the time that
at the same time that，
during the time that
词性
连词，引导时间状语从句
连词，引导时间状语
从句
时间类型
一点或一段时间
一段时间
动作类型
延续性动作或短暂性动作
延续性动作
时间顺序
主从句动作同时或先后发生
主从句动作同时发生
或主句动作在从旬动
作中发生
其他用法
(1)并列连词，“就在那时”，“突然”(and then)：
We were about to start when it began to rain．
(2)每当……时：
It’s cold when it snows．
(1)并列连词，“而”，
“却”(表示对比)。
(2)名词，“一会儿”：
after a while。
适时点津
(1)when的用法比while要广，一般都可用when。
(2)有两种情况通常用while：
①如果从句和主句的动作同时发生，两句都是过去进行时，通常用while。如：
They were singing while We were dancing．
②前后两句表示对比，这时while表示“而，却”。如：
He is strong while his brother is weak．
活学活用
(2011·梧州)I met a good friend of mine while I on the street．
A．walks B．walk C．Was walking D．am walking
解析：本题考查动词时态。while引导的时间状语从句要用过去进行时态。句意：当我在街上散步的时候，我遇见了我的一个好朋友。
答案：C
2．happen与take place
(1)happen与take place都是不及物动词，不可用于被动语态。
(2)happen常用来强调某事发生的偶然性；而take place常表示事先经过安排，有计划有预谋而发生的事。如：The Olympic Games takes place every four-years．奥运会每四年举办一次。
3．not…anymore。no more，not…any longer与no longer
(1)not…anymore—not…any more意为“不再……”。anymore是副词，一般用于疑问句或否定句中，多指“次数”或“数量”上的不再延续，多与短暂性动词连用。如：He won’t go to that kind of dangerous place anymore．他再也不去那种危险的地方了。
(2)no more的意思与not…anymore相同，但位置相对灵活。(1)中例句可转换为：He will no more go to that kind of dangerous place．
(3)not…any longer和no longer意为“不再……”，在通常情况下可以和not…anymore或no more互换使用，但not…any longer和no longer侧重指“时间”上的不再延续，多与延续性动词连用。如：Hurry up!I can’t wait any longer．=Hurryup!I carl no longer wait．快点儿!我不能再等了。
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·福州)It’s very hot here .Why not your coat?
A．put on B．put off
C．take off
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。put on是“穿上”的意思；put off是“推迟”的意思；take off是“脱掉”的意思。根据情境：天气热，要脱掉上衣。
答案：C
真题2 (2011·本溪) －were you at school when he came to see you?
－Yes，I a math class．
A．had B．was having C．am having D．have
解析：本题考查时态。根据句意“－当他来看你时你在学校吗?一是的，当时我正在上数学课。”过去进行时态用于表示过去的某个时刻正在做某事。
答案：B
真题3(2011·福州) － clever the girl is! －So she is．
A．How B．What C．What a
解析：本题考查感叹句。感叹句有两种结构：What+(a／an)+adj．+仡+主谓!和How+n彩．／adv．+主谓!句意：一这个女孩是多么聪明啊!一她确实如此。
答案：A
真题4 (2011·成都) －I like this set of sofa so much．but I don’t know it in my small house． －You’re supposed to put it in the living room．
A．where to put B．why to put C．how to put
解析：考查“疑问词+不定式”在特定语境中作宾语时的用法辨析。根据答句句意“你应该把它放在客厅”可知上句句意应该是：“但我不知道把它放到我小房子的什么地方。”
答案：A
真题5 (2011·滨州) －what was your Brother doing at this time yesterday?
－He was reading a magazine I was writing an e-mail at home．
A．as soon as B．after C．until D．while
解析：本题考查连词的用法。as soon as“一……就……”；after“在……之后”；until“直到……”；while“当……的时候，和……同时”。由答语“他在读杂志而我在写电子邮件”可知，两个动作同时进行。
答案：D
名师预测
阅读下面的短文，然后根据汉语或英语首字母提示
写出所缺英语单词的正确形式。
I had a very unusual experience on(1) (星期天)．At around ten o’clock in the morning，I was walking down the street when a UF0 landed in(2)f of me．You can imagine how(3) (奇怪的)it was!An alien got out and walked down the Center Street．I(4) (跟随)it to see where it was going，and I was very surprised when it went into a souvenir shop．While it was looking at the souvenirs，the assistant called the(5)P ．
同步训练l2八年级(下)Units 3—4
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．(2011·西宁)—I feel really before the interview． —Take it easy．Sure you are the best．
A．patient B．serious C．nervous D．cool
( )2．—What did Tim ? —He said he play basketball the next day．
A．said；would B．say；would C says；was going D．say；was going
( )3．(2011·西宁) —Did you see the girl in white pass by just now? —No，sir．I a newspaper．
A．read B．was reading C．will read D．am reading
( )4．(2011·昆明)While the alien a souvenir，the girl called the police．
A．was buying B．bought C．buys D．is buying
( )5．(2011·青岛)Tom rushed into the house his mother was cooking．
A．as B．before C．while D．after
( )6．(2011·呼和浩特)The girl with two cats in the yard when the earthquake happened．
A ．was playing B．is playing C．are playing D．were playing
( )7．(2011·长春)Internet is very useful．It can our eyes to the outside．
A．put up B．grow up C．turn up D．open up
( )8．(2011·衡阳) — Jack，will your family move to Shanghai?—Yes．That’s a very big
my parents made．
A．decide B．decision C．education
( )9．She’s at swimmin9，but she wants to do in it．
A．good；well B．well；better C．good；better D．better；better
( )10． beautiful the dress is!
A．What B．What a C．How a D．How
二、语篇填空
My best friend is Victor．He is an American boy．
He has been living in China(1) (自从)last year．He is very hard—working．So he is good at all thesubjects(2) (除……之外)Chinese．His English is excellent and he is very good at(3) (写作)in English．But I do(4) (差)in it，because I am a bit(5) (懒)and I don’t like reading English．I usually(6) (花)lots of time in playing sports．Mr Hu told us that l was much(7) (好)at P．E．than Victor．Yesterday Victor told us that he would like to be a volunteer teacher in a mountain(8) (村子)in Gansu．He．wanted to teach children something new．It could(9) (开阔)up their eyes．When I(10) (听到)the news，I was very surprised．
三、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空
1．—I phoned you yesterday morning，but you were not in．—We (fish)by the river．
2．Don’t worry about your son．He is old enough to be independent and live by (he)．
3． (final)，Grace made up her mind to 1ive abroad with her daughter．
4．The great (art)gave his first show in Shanghai and the tickets sold out in minutes．
5．Climb up to the (eleven)floor，and you can enjoy a better view．
6．While traveling in Africa，we had many happy and excmng (experience)．
7．Her classmates didn’t (return)her books．
8．The teacher told us that light (travel)much faster than sound．
9．He feels (disappoint)because he couldn’t get a ticket to The Sound of Music．
10．I’m happy (invite)you to my birthday party．
四、用方框中所给词组的适当形式填空
in good health，have a hard time，do well in，take place，take off
1．The story about two thousand years ago．
2．Linda drawing．She won lots of prizes．
3．My brother works in a primary school．He with the noisy children．
4．Hurry up!The plane in half an hour．
5．I hope you are ．
五、句型转换
1．I am surprised to find great changes have taken place in China．(改为同义句)
my ，I find great changes have taken place in China．
2．Our city is beautiful．(改为感叹句) our city is !
3．Should I arrive on time or a little later if someone invites me to dinner?(改为同义旬)
Am I arrive on time or a little later if someone invites me to dinner?
4．We will turn off the lights for an hour at 6：00．(就划线部分提问)
we turn off the lights for an hour?
5．It is interesting to send English messages to friends on a mobile phone．(改为感叹句)
interesting thing it is to send English messages to friends on a mobile phone!
[能力提升]
一、完形填空
Do you often communicate with your parents?
Some parents are always comparing their l with themselves when they were young，or with otherpeople when they were children．
“When l was your age。”a father said to 2 sixteen-year—old son one day．“l was at the top of my class every year．And I 3 what l wanted to do when I left school．I had goals．You are always al the bottom of your class 4 you have no goals．”
The man’s son said nothing．He had already heard this from his father 5 times．
“And when your mother was your age．’’the young man’s father 6 ，“she had a good job and she was earning money．You don’t even have a part—time job．You earn nothing．’’
The man’s son still said 7 ．He had heard this before， 8 ．“And 9 your elder brother was your age，”the young man’s father went on，“he studied hard．But you just 10 your time．”
And the man’s son still said nothing．
Finally，the young man’s 11 said。“And when Abraham Lincoln was your age，he worked all day and studied at night．’’
This time the son l 2 stay silent．
“And when Abraham Lincoln was your age。father，”he said，“He was the President of l3 United States， 14 are you?’’
His father had no answer to this．
Are your parents always comparing you l 5 others?And what’s your reply?Do you have a better way to communicate with each other?
( )1．A．children B．students C．teachers D．friends
( )2．A．my B．his C．her D．your
( )3．A．know B．knew C．will know D．have known
( )4．A．although B．or C．and D．unless
( )5．A．many B．few C．any D．much
( )6．A．went away B．went over C．went up D．went on
( )7．A．something B．anything C．nothing D．everything
( )8．A．also B．too C．either D．yet
( )9．A．after B．before C．as soon as D．when
( )10．A．save B．take C．waste D．keep
( )11．A．brother B．sister C．mother D．father
( )12．A．can B．can’t C．could D．couldn’t
( )13．A．a B．an C．the D．／
( )14．A．What B．How C．Where D．Who
( )15．A．to B．with C．about D．for
二、阅读理解(2011·泰州)
Yesterday l was shopping for a few items(物品)．
With nothing to do at home，my son，who just left university，was ready to go together with me．
As I pushed the basket towards the register(收银机)，I checked my items to see how many I had，thinking I might go to the Express Line(快速通道)where the sign said“Ten items or less”．
I started to go to that line and my son said，“Morn，you have twelve items!”I said，“I know，but they’re close．”He said，“Why are you in such a hurry to get home?You should go to the Regular lane because you have over ten items．’’
Knowing he was right．I agreed and then pushed the basket to the next line．So I was waiting for my turn there and l was j ust removing my items from the basket to pay for them when a young man came up behind me in line with two items．
I just left the Express Line because I had too many and now I really wanted to get finished．Again，my son came up．“Morn，he has only two items and the Express lane is very long now．Won’t you just let him go first?”I agreed，and the young man smiled widely and thanked me several times．
It felt good to be with my son and have him remind me not to live a hurried life．Do what’s right and also be kind．I really take pride in him．
( )1．The writer when she was pushing the basket towards the register．
A．lost something she liked best B．found her favourite item
C．checked her handbag D．counted the items she had
( )2．The writer went to the Regular Line because
A．she had 2 items B．she had l2 items
C．she was in a hurry to get home D．she wanted to wait for her son
( )3．Of the following，which order is right according to the story?
①prepare to remove the items from the basket
②let the young man behind go first
③walk towards the Express Line
④return to the Regular lane
A．②①④③ B．④②③① C．③④①② D．①③④②
( )4．If you pay for your items at the Express line，
A．you need to hell)others B．you must wait for a long time
C．you can get finished more quickly D．you should buy more than ten items
( )5．What did the writer learn from her son that day?
A．Enjoy your life and be kind． B．Don’t buy too many at a time．
C．Try to be friendly to your family． D．Never waste time waiting in line．
三、任务型阅读(2011·广东)
请阅读某网站论坛上关于“地球--4'时”的文章，根据所提供的信息，完成后面表格。
From 8：30 pm to 9：30 pm on Saturday，Mawh 26th，2011，a great number of people around the world turned off the lights for Earth Hour．It is a bit like an environmental New Year，providing a cha．']cc to help care for our earth and make people around the world learn how importanl it is to do that．
What can we do during this hour?We can do lots of fun things in the dark，such as planning a candlelight dinner for our family or a group of friends，telling stories and singing songs with：he kids and neighbors．
What did you do for Earth Hour this year?Let’s share the Earth Hour stories．
Emma
I was on one of the mountains near the city and took photos of my city．It was great to watch the stars and the moon after a busy day so that I could enjoy this relaxing moment．
Albert
I work as a waiter in a restaurant．Our restaurant was still open even for Earth Hour as we got lots of reservations(预定)that night．So we spent the hour working by candlelight．And guess what?Our customers loved that and promised to come for next Earth Hour．
Brandon
I turned off the main power to my house and went for a walk for Earth Hour．It was a little strange to walk in the dark，but it was only for one llour．Just think of what it must have been like before the invention of the light bulb l
Mary
I invited my，friends who know and support Earth Hour activities．We actually had a candlelight concert and we talked about the old happy days that we spent together in college．
Infonnation Card
The date of Earth Hour in 2011
(1)
Albert’s iob
(2)
What Brandon did when it was dark?
(3)
Who stayed with Mary during the hour?
(4)
The number of people who talked about their stories
(5)
四、句子翻译
1．她和她丈夫都认为那是个好主意。(both…and．．．)
2．虽然他很穷，但很快乐。(aIthough)
3．上网能开阔学生们对外面世界的视野。(open up)
4．她说她不再生她朋友的气了。(not…anymore)
5．当她打电话时发生了什么事?(while)
五、书面表达(2011·广安)
初中生活即将结束，我们有很多不能忘记的美好记忆。与同学之间的友好交往、与老师之间的坦诚沟通、与家长之间的倾心交流……已成为我们生活中的重要内容。
请以“My Past Beautiful Life”为题，写一件你与同学(或朋友、老师、家长)等曾经经历过的美好事情，以表达对他们的感激或怀念之情。
要求：1．书写规范，层次清楚，真情实意。
2．文章中不得使用你及你的朋友、同学、老师、家长的真实姓名和校名。
3．词数不少于80词。
部分参考词汇：an unforgotten time(一段难忘时光) meaningful(有意义的)
thankful(感激的) moved(感动的) My Past Beautiful Life
答案
【名师预测】
1．Sunday 2．front 3．strange 4．followed 5．police
【同步训练12】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 CBBAC 6—10 ADBCD
二、1．since 2．except 3．writing 4．badly 5．lazy 6．spend 7．better 8．village 9．open l0．heard
三、1．were fishing 2．himself 3．Finally 4．artist 5．eleventh 6．experiences 7．return 8．travels 9．disappointed l0．to invite
四、1．took place 2．does well in 3．has a hard time 4．will take off 5．in good health
五、1．To，surprise 2．How beautiful 3．supposed to 4．When will 5．What an
[能力提升]
一、1—5 ABBCA 6—10 DCBDC 11—15 DDCAB
二、1—5 DBCBA
三、1．March 26th 2．A waiter 3．He went for a walk．4．Her friends 5．Four／4
四、1．Both she and her husband thought that was a good idea． 2．Although he is poor，he is happy．3．Surfing the Internet can open up the students’eyes to the outside world．4．She said she wasn’t mad at her friend anymore． 5．What happened while she was talking on the phone?
五、0ne possible version：
My Past Beautiful Life
Our life in middle school will come to an end soon．It was an unforgotten time．I will never forget you an outgoing boy．There is always smile on your face and everybody likes to make friends with you．We used to play basketball on the playground．It was very meaningful for us to play basketball．Sometimes we went to the park and had a good time there．I always laughed a lot when I was with you．S0 I was thankful and moved．At this moment I’m saying goodbye to you，I just want to give you my best wishes：
I hope you are happy and healthy forever．
I hope you are successful in the future．
第13讲 八年级(下)Units 5—6
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．collect(v．)收集；搜集→collector(n．)收藏者→collection(n．)收藏品；收藏物
2．European(adj．)欧洲的；欧洲人的→Europe(n．)欧洲
3．Russian(adj．)俄罗斯的；俄罗斯人的；俄语的→Russia(n．)俄罗斯
4．Australian(adj．)澳大利亚的；澳大利亚人的→Australia(n．)澳大利亚
5．organize(v．)组织-→organization(n．)组织
6．foreigner(n．)外国人→foreign(adj．)外国的
7．certain(adj．)确实的；无疑的→certainly(adv．)当 然=of course
【重点短语】
1．have a great time玩得开心 2．1et sb．in让某人进来 3．take away拿走
4．travel around the world周游世界 5．go to college上大学
6．get an education接受教育 7．make a living(by)doing sth． (通过)做某事谋生
8．all the time一直 9．get injured受伤
10．have a difficult time doing sth． 做某事很困难
11．collect stamps集邮 12．a pair of一双；一对
13．raise money for charity为慈善筹款
14．the first one to do sth． 第一个做某事的人
15．the whole five hours 整整五个小时
1 6．three and a half years = three years and a half三年半
17．run out of=use up用光；耗尽 18．on my seventh birthday在我七岁生日那天
19．by the way顺便说一下 20．be interested in… 对……感兴趣
21．the capital of… ……的首都 22．in Russian style俄罗斯风格
23．be welcomed by… 受到……的欢迎
【重点句型】
1．If you go to the party，you’ll have a great time．如果你去参加聚会，你会玩得很开心。
2．－What will happen if they have the party today?如果他们今天举行聚会，将会发生什么事?
－If they have it today，half the class won’t come．如果他们今天举行的话，一半同学将不会来。
3．－How long have you been skating?你滑冰已经滑了多久了?
－I have been skating for five hours．我已经滑了五个小时了。
4．It’s+adj．+ for sb．to do sth．对某人来说，做某事是……的。
5．The+比较级…，the+比较级…越……，越……
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
if conj．如果……的话
if
中文
如果
是否
时态
在表示将来可能出现的情况时if从句用一般现在时代替一般将来时，if后面不能出现一般将来时，主句用一般将来时，即所谓的“主将从现”(主句一般将来时，从句一般现在时)。
根据句子意思确定相应的时态，if后面可用一般将来时。
位置
放在句首，主句之前，与主语之间用逗号隔开；放在主句后面，if前面不必用逗号。
不放在句首，只放在动词等后面。
(1)if可引导状语从句，意为“如果……，假使……”。
①就现在、过去、未来可能实现之事加以推测。如：
If you are tired，we will go straight home．如果你疲倦了，我们就直接回家。
②用于虚拟语气中。如：
If I were you，I would help him．如果我是你，我会帮助他。
(2)if可引导宾语从句，意为“是否”，基本等同于whether。如：
I wonder if he is in the school．我不知道他是否在学校。
活学活用
(2011·阜康) －Can you guess if they speaking English with us? －I think they will do if they free．
A．will practice；are B．will practice；will be
C．practicing；being D．practice；are
解析：本题中上一句是宾语从句，if意为“是否”，根据句意，后面应跟一般将来时态。而下一句中的if意为“如果”，用来引导条件状语从句，应该用一般现在时来代替一般将来时。
答案：A
【重点句型】
1．现在完成进行时
(1)现在完成进行时的含义：表示过去某一时间开始到现在经常重复的动作。
(2)现在完成进行时的构成：助动词have／has been+动词ing形式。当主语为第三人称单数时，助动词用has，其他人称用have。
(3)现在完成进行时的用法：主要表示现在以前这一段时间里一直在进行的一个动作，这个动作可能仍然在进行，也可能停止了一会儿。
活学活用
(2011·内江) － How long has Sam been skating? －He for five hours．
A．have been skating B．has been skating
C．was skating D．has been skated
解析：本题前一句用现在完成进行时问“Sam到现在已经滑冰了多长时间”，那么回答时也应该用同样的时态来回答，而主语he为第三人称单数，助动词应该用has。
答案：B
2．the+形容词或副词的比较级…，the+形容词或副词的比较级…这一句型意为“越……，越……”。
活学活用
(2011·广元)For a foreigner like me，the more I learn about Chinese history，
I enjoy livingin China．
A．the better B．the more C．the best
解析：本题考查形容词／副词比较级的用法。句意“对于像我这样的外国人来说。我对中国历史了解的越多，我就越喜欢住在中国。”由句意可知，这是“the+比较级，the+比较级”结构。
答案：B
【巧辨异同】
1．Run out与run out of
(1)run out“用完了”，主语通常为时间、食物、金钱，不用于被动语态。
(2)run out of“用完了”，表示主动含义，主语一般为人，多用于进行时和完成时。
活学活用
(2011·十堰) － All the oil in the world will have some day． －Yeah．What shall we use for power at that time?
A．given away B．put away C．run Out D．set out
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。9ive away泄露；put away收起；run out被用尽；set out起程。句意：一将来的某个时候，世界上所有的石油都将被用尽。一那时我们用什么作能源?
答案：C
2．for与since
(1)for的用法：
①在回答“How long…?”的问句时，for表示所指时间或距离的全部，在这个含义上与表示“特定期间中某个长度”的during不同。②可以用在过去时、现在时、将来时中，但是若表示持续进行到现在为止时，则不能用现在时，而要用现在完成时。如：
I have known him for years．我认识他很多年了。
③表示某事物在所述时间要发生。如：The next meeting was arranged for the fifthof June．下次会议定为6月5日举行。
(2)since的用法：
①作连词，意为“自……以后；自从”。后接从句表示以过去的某个时间为起点，持续到现在或过去的某个时候。since之后可以接过去时的句子，也可以接表示过去的时间点。如： I have been at his bedside since he became ill．自从他生病以来我一直在他床边陪伴着他。
②作介词，意为“自……来，从……(至今)”。如： I have been in this business since l980．自从1980年以来，我一直经营这个生意。
适时点津
(1)since除了可以与现在完成时连用外，还可以与过去完成时、现在完成进行时连用。
(2)since，for都可以与完成时态连用。since用来说明动作的起始时间，而for用来说明动作延续时间，因此，since后跟表示某一时间点的名词短语，for后面跟表示一段时间的名词短语。
活学活用
(2011·抚顺)I have been on the school basketball team 2010．
A．in B．for C．since D．during
解析：本句时态为现在完成时，后接表示一段时间的短语，可用“for+时间段”或“since+时间点”，空格之后的2010年属于一个时间起点，故选since。
答案：C
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·青岛) －How is your English study? －Not bad．But I learning English grammar．
A．am interested in B．am good at
C．have a little trouble D．have no trouble
解析：have trouble．doing sth．意为“做某事遇到了困难”；答语说“还不错。但是……”，由But这个转折词可以看出说话人在语法学习上遇到了一定的麻烦。
答案：C
真题2 (2011·潍坊)If Tom the game，we’ll give him a surprise．
A．win B．wins C．won D．winning
解析：本题考查if引导的条件状语从句，应该用一般现在时代替一般将来时，而主语Tom是第三人称单数，谓语动词需要用第三人称单数。
答案：B
真题3 (2011．邵阳)Dear students，please read every sentence carefully．The more
you are，the mistakes you’ll make．
A．carefully；fewer B．careful；less C．careful；fewer
解析：本题考查形容词比较级的用法。前半句有系动词are，可知缺少形容词，故排除选项A；mistakes为可数名词，用fewer来修饰。
答案：C
真题4 (2011·苏州)Good to see you again．It’s almost three years we met last time．
A．until B．before C．while D．since
解析：根据句意：“很高兴又见到你。自从我们上一次碰面已经有将近三年了。”故选D。
答案：D
真题5 (2011·湘西)Don’t talk loudly atthe meeting．If you ，you will have to leave．
A．do B．are C．did
解析：本题考查状语从句的时态。当主句为将来时态时，if引导的状语从句中用一般现在时态代替将来时，而这里需要助动词，不是系动词。
答案：A
名师预测
请根据短文内容，从下列五个选项中选择适当的句子还原到短文中，使短文完整与正确。
A．More people retire at an earlier age than before．
B．Hobbies can also help a patient to keep healthy．
C．The ancient Egyptians played games with balls made of wood．
D．They also go to concerts，climb mountains，go fishing，skate and swim．
E．Anyone，old or young，sick or well，rich or poor，can follow a good hobby，in spite of his age，health or money．
A hobby can be almost anything that a person likes to do in his spare time．Hobbyists raise pets，watch birds，paint pictures，play the piano and grow flowers．(1) They collect everything from books to butterflies and from boxes to stamps．
People take up hobbies because these activities offer enjoyment，friendship and relaxation．Hobbies help people relax after a long time of hard work，and provide a balance(平衡)between work and play． Hobbies offer interesting activities for the old．Some hobbies can make a child grow as a person，develop his interest and help him learn new skills．(2)
Doctors have found that hobbies are useful in helping patients(病人)recover(恢复)from illness．Hobbies give patients who can’t move around something to do，and provide interests that keep them from thinking about themselves．Many hospitals treat(治疗)patients by having them take up interesting hobbies．(3)
In early times，most people were too busy making a living to have many hobbies．But some persons who had spare time did enjoy hobbies．(4) People today have more time than ever before for hobbies．Machines have now reduced much time that
people must spend on their jobs．
(5) Those who have developed hobbies never need to worry about what to do with their newly-found free time hours．
Sir William osier，a famous Canadian doctor anpressed the value(价值)of hobbies by sayin9，“No man is really happy or safe without a hobby．”
同步训练l3八年级(下)Units 5—6
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．My skates are out of style．I’d like to buy a new ．
A．one B．piece C．skate D．pair
( )2．I have been studying English five years ago．
A．for B．until C．before D．since
( )3．(2011·济南) children there are in a family，their life will be．
A．The less；the better B．The fewer；the better
C．Fewer；richer D．More；poorer
( )4．Don’t play toys in class．If you do，the teacher will ．
A．take them off B．take off them
C．take them away D．take away them
( )5．Lucy is ill．She has been away from school for
A．one day and half B．one and a half days
C．one and half a day D．a half and one days
( )6．(2011·安顺)—David，how old is your father this year? — ．And we just had a special party for his birthday last weekend．
A．Fortieth；forty B．Forty；forty
C．Forty；fortieth D．Fortieth；fortieth
( )7．(2011·合肥)If you want to go to see the movie this evening，so I．
A．do B．am C．Will D．should
( )8．(2011·青岛) —I suggest buying her a Teddy Bear for her birthday．
— someone else brings the same present?
A．If’ B．What C．What if D．How about
( )9．(2011·长春)I am sure l will do it well you give me this chance．
A．if B．before C．until D．though
( )10．(201 1·益阳)I don’t know if she to my birthday party tomorrow． If she ，I’ll be very happy．
A．comes；comes
B．will come；comes
C．comes；will come
二、语篇填空(2011·广安)
根据短文内容和首字母提示，把所缺单词填写在短
文后面相应的横线上，使句意完整。
It’s very important for us to keep(1)h in our everyday life．Here is some(2)a
for you。First，you should have healthy diet．Different food helps us in different(3)w ．You should eat more fruit and vegetables instead(4)0
hamburgers，Beijing roast duck and so on．If you choose the right food，you can have healthy eating habits．Second，doing exercise is good(5)f your health．For exampie，climbing mountains，riding bikes or swimming．Third。you should(6)s at least eight hours a day and you shouldn’t work or study too hard．Finally，remember that(7)s is bad for your health，so don’t smoke，you will become(8) m healthier．
三、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空
1．Are those buildings in(Russia)style?
2．We are all (interest)in the interesting books．
3．Learning Chinese is very popular in (west)countries．
4．What (happen)if you don’t finish your homework on time?
5．What is Michael going to (organize)at school?
6．If you don’t show your ticket，I won’t (let)you go into the cinema．
7．Peter got a snow globe on his (twelve) birthday．
8．David and his parents all enjoy (1ive)in China．
9．My mother waters (flower)e very morning after she gets up．
10．David，I can’t send these letters without any (stamp)．
四、选择方框中单词的适当形式填空，完成短文
by，send，friend，fact，join，interest，collect，since，than，picture
Dear Joe，
How is everything going?I miss you very much．Thank you for(1) me the English stamps．How beautiful they are!I like them and I like collecting stamps very much．In(2) ，I have been doing this(3) I was eight years old．Now I have more(4) 5，000 stamps from different countries．
In my opinion，collecting s'tamps is fun and(5)
When you collect stamps，you will see many(6) of men and women，birds and animals on them．You will know a lot about the world．Last year I (7) a stamp(8)
club in my city．It has over l00 members and we are all stamp collectors．We meet every month and talk about our collections．I have made many(9) there．
(10) the way，what’s your hobby?What can I do for you?
Yours，
Li Ming
五、句子翻译
1．请不要把车停在商店前面!(in front of)
2．昨天这个时候，这个年轻人正在等他的朋友。(wait for)
3．我什么也不买了，因为我的钱用完了。(run out of)
4．如果我不完成作业，我的老师会生我的气的。(if)
5．中国是一个历史悠久的国家。(with)
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·南通)
When l was young。my father told me tl lat little acts of kindness may give one great happiness．Since then I have always tried to help people in l ．
One hot summer afternoon。I was 2 down the highway to New York when another car suddenly 3 into my lane(车道)．My car was in the far right lane，so it ran onto the roadside．As a(n) 4 driver，I moved my car quickly and skillfully back onto the highway without causing any accident．
I was 5 with that driver，but I thought that he just did not pay attention to the lane change，and he 6 did not do that on purpose(故意)．
The car ran away 7 after cutting me off．Very soon it disappeared from sight．
After a while，I came around a curve(弯道)and found the 8 car．The driver was walking along the roadside．He was an elderly man and looked 9 ．With no telephone nearby and the nearest services twenty miles away，I decided to 10 and see what th problem was．
The man’s car had a flat tire(瘪胎)．Although he had a spare tire。he had nothing to work with．I decided to 11 him．I changed the tire for him and allowed him to sit in my air-conditioned car while I did it．Fifteen minutes later，I l2 the work．I was hot and tired，but I really felt l 3 after an act of kindness to the man who had earlier l 4 my car run off the road．
You can really enjoy great l 5 from kindness acts，so always lend your hands to others in trouble．
( )1．A．need B．school C．danger D．summer
( )2．A．walking B．riding C．running D．driving
( )3．A．fell B．floated C．came D．climbed
( )4．A．active B．experienced C．frightened D．energetic
( )5．A．unhappy B．satisfied C．familiar D．friendly
( )6．A．even B．certainly C．almost D．simply
( )7．A．quickly B．quietly C．politely D．carefully
( )8．A．new B．red C．same D．other
( )9．A．excited B．relaxed C．surprised D．worried
( )10．A．stay B．research C．stop D．hide
( )11．A．punish B．train C．help D．encourage
( )12．A．began B．finished C．took D．continued
( )13．A．good B．sorry C．angry D．shy
( )14．A．noticed B．made C．watched D．heard
( )15．A．friendship B．success C．excitement D．happiness
二、阅读理解
In order to safeguard(保证)the education of all Hope Chinese School(HCS)students and the normal running of the school，the following rules should be followed：
★Be quiet in classrooms and hallways．Do not run or shout in classrooms or hallways．
★Do not drink or eat in classrooms or hallways．
★Stay in the school during school time as well as rest time．Do not leave the school or play out of the school area during school time．This includes rest time．
★Do not scribble on any desks or walls．
★Be respectful(尊敬)to teachers and parents．
★Help teachers and other students to keep the classroom clean．Do not move desks，chairs，and other furniture in the classroom without the teacher’s instructions．
( )1．Students in HCS can in classrooms．
A．run B．read C．shout D．eat
( )2．Students can’t during the time between classes at HCS．
A．play B．1eave school C．speak D．stay in classrooms
( )3．The underlined word“scribble”means“ ”in Chinese．
A．肆意摇晃 B．随意拿走 C．乱写乱画 D．胡乱搬动
( )4．Which of the following is NOT menticmed in the passage?
A．Looking after school furniture．
B．Keeping the classrooms clean．
C．Respecting teachers．
D．Doing homework．
( )5．The best"title for this passage is“ ”．
A．Hope Chinese School
B．How to Keep the School Clean
C．The Rules of HCS
D．How to Get on with Teachers
三、任务型阅读
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容，在短文后l～5小题
中句子的空白处填上适当的词语或句子。
We know that many animals do not stay in one place．Birds，fish and other animals move from one place to another place at a certain time．They move for different reasons：most of them move to find food more easily，but others move to get away from places that are too crowded．
When cold weather comes，many birds move to warmer places to find food．Some fishes give birth in warm water and move to cold water to feed．The most famous migration is probably the migration of fish，which is called“salmon”(鲑鱼)．This fish is born in fresh water but it travels many miles to salt water．There it spends its life．When it is old．it returns to its birthplace in fresh water．Then it gives birth and dies．In northern Europe，there is a kind of mouse．They leave their mountain homes when they become too crowded．They move down to the low land．Sometimes they move all the way to the seaside，and many of them are killed when they fall into the sea．
Recently，scientists have studied the migration of a kind of lobster(龙虾)．Every year，when the season of the bad weather arrives，the lobsters get into a long line and start to walk across the floor of the ocean．Nobody knows why they do this，and nobody knows where they go．so，sometimes we know why humans and animals move from one place to another place，but at other times we don’t．Maybe living things just like to travel．
1．The reason for most of the animals to move is
2．Find the word in the passage which means“the movement from one place to another of a large group of animals’’and write it down here：
3．The underlined word“There”in the second paragraph refers to(指的是)
4．The salmon comes back to its birthplace in order to
5．The lobsters begin to move to another place when
四、句子翻译
1．他性格外向，喜欢交朋友。(1ike doing sth．)
2．每天放学后，我们可以散散步来放松自己。(take a walk)
3．日本大地震后，世界各地的人们给予了很大帮助。(help a lot)
4．由于“世园会”的举办，西安今年会迎来更多的游客。(because of)
5．在去电影院的路上，他听到了这个消息。(on the way to…)
五、书面表达(2011·宁波)
为了使同学们更加健康快乐地成长，学校决定向同学们征求建议。假如你是刘波，用英语向校长写一篇80个词左右的建议信。注意：文中应包含所有要点，并适当发挥；不能出现真实的校名和姓名。开头和结尾已给出，不计入总词数。
Dear Headmaster，
I’m very glad to write a letter to you．These days we are talking about how to have a better school life．Here are some of my suggestions．First，I hope our school will
Hope my suggestions will be helpful．Thanks for reading my letter!
Yours sincerely，
Liu Bo
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 DBECA
【同步训练13】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 DDBCB 6—10 CCCAB
二、1．healthy 2．advice 3．ways 4．of 5．for 6．sleep 7．smoking 8．much
三、1．Russian 2．interested 3．western 4．will happen 5．organize 6．1et 7．twelfth 8．1iving 9．flowers l0．stamps
四、1．sending 2．fact 3．since 4．than 5．interesting 6．pictures 7．joined 8．collecting 9．friends l0．By
五、l．Don’t park the cars in front of the shop，please! 2．The young man was waiting for his friend this time yesterday． 3．I won’t buy anything because I have run out of money．4．If I don’t finish my homework，my teacher will be angry with me．5．China is a country with a long history．
[能力提升]
一、1—5 ADCBA 6—10 BACDC 11—15 CBABD
二、1—5 BBCDC
三、l．to find food more easily 2．migration 3．(in)salt water 4．give birth and die 5．the season of the bad weather arrives／the bad weather arrives
四、1．He is outgoing and likes making friends． 2．We can take a walk to relax ourselves after school every day．3．When the big earthquake hit Japan．people all over the world helped a lot．4．Because of the“Expo”， more tourists／visitors will come to Xi’an this year． 5．He heard the news on the way to the cinema．
五、0ne possible version：
Dear Headmaster，
I’m very glad to write a letter to you．These days we are talking about how to have a better school life．Here are some of my suggestions．First，I hope
our school will open the library more often．Second，I think our school can organize more after-class activities．Next I hope our school will give us more time
for sports，art and music．And I suggest our school should organize fewer exams as well．
As for our teachers．I hope they will be our friends and make classes more interesting．And if they can talk less but more clearly in class，we will be more interested in studying and have more time to practice．What’s more，I hope they will give us less homework and finish classes on time．
Hope my suggestions will be helpful．Thanks for reading my letter!
Yours sincerely，
Liu Bo
第14讲八年级(下)Units 7—8
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．polite(adj．)礼貌的→impolite(adj．反义词)无礼的；粗鲁的→politely(adv．)礼貌地
2．Asian(adj．)亚洲的；亚洲人的→Asia(n．)亚洲
3．careful(adj．)小心的；谨慎的→careless(adj．反义词)粗心的→care(v．)关心；在意→carefully(adv．) 仔细地
4．personal(adj．)私人的；个人的→person(n．)人→ personality(n．)性格
5．speeial(adj．)特别的；特殊的；专门的→especially (adv．)特别；尤其→speeial(n．)特色菜
6．asleep(adj．睡着的) →sleep(v．)睡觉→sleep(n．) 睡眠→sleepy(adj．)困倦的；昏昏欲睡的→awake (adj．反义词)醒着的
7．choose(v．) →choice(n．)选择
8．nearly(adv．) →almost(adv．同义词)几乎
9．clearly(adv．)清楚地；明显地→clear(adj．)清楚的
10．winner(n．)胜利者→win(v．)赢
11．encourage(v．)鼓励；激励→courage(n．)勇气→ discourage(v．反义词)使灰心
12．suggest(v．)建议；提议→suggestion(n．)建议
13．interested(adj．)感兴趣的-，interest(v．)使感兴
趣→interest(n．)兴趣→interesting(adj．)有趣的
【重点短语】
1．turn down／up(音量)调低／调高 2．not at all一点儿也不
3．right away／right now／in a minute立刻；马上 4．put on穿上
5．at a meeting在开会 6．make posters制作海报
7．wait in line排队等候 8．cut in line插队
9．get annoyed生气 10．happen to sb． 发生在某人身上
11．keep…down控制 12．take care=be careful 小心；仔细
13．break the rules违反规则 14．put out熄灭15．pick up捡起
16．drop litter扔垃圾 17．not special enough不够特别
18．a 6-year-old child一个六岁的孩子 19．too．．．to…太……而不能……
20．fall asleep入睡 21．give away捐赠；赠送
22．someone else其他什么人 23．rather than而不是
24．encourage sb．to do sth． 鼓励某人做某事 25．make progress取得进步
26．hear of／about听说 27．make friends with跟……交朋友
28．take an interest in = be interested in对……感兴趣
【重点句型】
1．－ Would you mind turning down the music?你介意调低一下音乐吗?
－ No，not at all．／Sorry．I’ll do it right away．不，根本不介意。／对不起，我马上低。
2．－ Would you mind not playing baseball here?你介意不要在这里打棒球吗?
－ Sorry．We’11 go and play in the park．对不起。我们到公园去打。
3．What should I get my sister? 我应该送我姐姐什么呢?
4．－ Why don’t you get her a scarf?／Why not get her a scarf?为什么不送她一条围巾? － No，that’s not interesting enough．不，那不够有意思。
5．－ How／What about a sweater?送一件毛衣怎么样? － No，that’s too boring．不，那太无聊了。
6．What’s the best gift you have ever received?你曾收到的最好的礼物是什么?
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．too…to．．．太……而不能……
to后面接动词原形，具有否定含义。这一句型常可以转换成So…that…句型。当这种too…to…句型转换成so…that句型时，为保持句意的一致，that引导的结果状语从句要根据时态用情态动词can’t或couldn’t加动词原形，that从旬中的谓语动词要带宾语。如：
The boy is too young to go to school．=The boy is so young that he can’t go to school．这个男孩太年轻而不能去上学。
The box is too big for me to carry．=The box is so big that I can’t carry it．这个箱子太重以至我不能搬动它。
适时点津
当动词不定式和主语在逻辑上构成动宾关系时，该动词后面不能再用it或them作宾语，该动词如果是不及物动词，则必须在其后面加上相当的介词或副词，方可与主语构成搭配。如：
The ice is too thin for me to skate on．这冰太薄而不能让我滑冰。
2．put out熄灭
活学活用
(2011·本溪) －Look at the sign“No Smoking”． －Sorry，I’ll my cigarette(香烟)at once．
A．put up B．put out C．put on D．put off
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。put up“举起，挂起”；put out“熄灭”；put on“穿上；上演”；put off“推迟”。句意：一看那个“不许吸烟”的标志。一对不起，我马上熄灭香烟。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．Would you mind doing sth．?
(1)Would you mind doing sth．? =Do you mind
doing sth．?“你介意……?”／“请你……好不好?”是一种比较客气的表达方式。如：
Would you mind opening the window?你介意打开窗户吗?
(2)如果要表示“请你不要做……好吗?”只需在doing前面加not。如：
Would you mind not sitting in front of me?你不要坐在我前面好吗?
(3)应答用语：
①如果同意表示不介意时，可用如下用语来表
达：Certainly not．／of course not．／No，not at a11．／Not at all．“好，可以。”
②如果不同意表示介意时，常用“Sorry．／I’m sorry，but…”及陈述某种理由来表示拒绝或反对。
适时点津
Would you mind doing sth．?这一句型中的逻辑主语只能是谈话的对方you，如果想要对方允许自己做某事，可以用“Would you mind my doing．．?”句型。
活学活用
(2011·内江) －It’s a little cold today．Would you mind the window?
－Of course not．
A．not opening B．not to open C．don’t open D．no opening
解析：根据句意：“今天外面有点冷，你介意不要开窗户吗?”和句型Would you mind not doing sth．?这里要用not doing结构。
答案：A
2．表示建议的句型
(1)Why don’t you+动词原形?用来表示建议，可以转换为Why not+动词原形?
(2)How／What abour+名词／代词／动名词形式?
(3)“Let’s…”以Let’s开头的祈使句，表示建议对方和自己一起做某事。Let’s后接动词原形。
(4)“Shall we…?”以shall we开头的疑问句，用于建议对方和自己一起做某事。回答时如赞成，常用“Yes，let’s.”。
活学活用
(2011·阜康) －We can go to Jinan Railway Station by bus．－Why not there for a change?
A．try walking B．trying to walk C．to try and walk D．to try walking
解析：本题考查“Why not…?”句型，意为“为什么不……呢?”，用来表示建议，后接动词原形。也可以表达为“Why don’t you／we do…?”。
答案：A
【巧辨异同】
1．instead与instead of
(1)instead为副词，意为“代替”，在旬中独立作状语。常置于旬首，用逗号隔开，也可放在句末。
(2)instead of为介词短语，意为“代替；而不是”，后面一般接名词、代词、介词和动名词形式。
适时点津
instead of与rather than的区别：
当它们后面跟动词时，instead of后跟现在分词．doing结构，而rather than后跟动词原形。
活学活用
(2011·安徽)骶at a nice day!We should go sightseeing watching TV in the hotel．
A．because of B．instead of C．together with D．out of
解析：本题考查介词短语辨析。句意：多好的天气啊!我们应该去观光，而不是待在酒店里看电视。
答案：B
2．get，receive与accept
(1)get有“得到，获得”的意思，在表示“获得”某物时，可能是被动接受也有可能是主动争取。
(2)receive指收到了什么东西，不一定接受，receive a letter frorm．．收到……的来信。
(3)accept着重指以愉悦的态度或经过自己的争取而得到或取得某物。
活学活用
(2011·湘西)What’s the best present you have ever ?
A．received B．receives C．receiving
解析：本题考查时态。构成完成时态用“have／has+过去分词”，received是过去分词。
答案：A
3．Spend.pay，cost与take四者都可以表示“花费”，但用法有区别：
(1)spend指“花费”时间、精力、财力等，在某事或某物上，主语是人。常用结构有：
spend．．0n…／spend．．(in)doing sth．
(2)cost主要指“花费”时间、金钱、精力等，不用人作主语，可带双宾语。如：
The book cost me twenty yuan．
(3)pay作“花费”解释时，指为买到某物付钱，主语是人，常与for搭配。
(4)take作“花费”解释时，常用it来作形式主语，常用结构是：
it takes sb．some time to do sth．
活学活用
(2011·福州) －I 5，000 yuan on this iPhone． －Wow，so much!I can’t afford it．
A．spent B．paid C．cost
解析：本题考查动词辨析。sb．+spend．．on sth．／doing sth．“某人在(做)某事上花费……”；sb．+pay for“为……付钱”；sth．+cost…“某物价值……”。句意：一我在这台iPhone上花费了5000元。一哇，这么多啊!我买不起它。
答案：A
4．turn down／up与turn on／off
(1)turn down／up(音量)调低／调高
(2)turn on／off打开／关掉(电器)
活学活用
(2011·丽水)If you the unnecessary lights，you’11 save some energy．
A．get off B．put off C．take off D．turn off
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。解题思路：get off下车；put off推迟，take off脱下(衣鞋等)；turn off关掉(电灯等)。句意：如果你关掉不需要打开的灯，你将能节约能源。
答案：D
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·广州) －I feel a bit hungry now．－Why not for dinner with us?
A．go B．did you go C．to go D．do you go
解析：本题考查情景对话和固定搭配。提建议的句式：Why not do sth．?Why not后接动词原形。
答案：A
真题2 (2011·丽水)Personally I don’t quite agree that people dangerous animals as pets．
A．depend B．afford C．keep D．follow
解析：本题考查动词词义辨析.keep sth．as a pet意为“饲养……作为宠物”。
答案：C
真题3 (2011·黄冈) － What are you doing，Uncle Wang? －I am sorting out old books and I’ll to kids in West China．
A．give them up B．give them away
C．give them off D．give them in
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。句意：我要把书赠送给中国西部的孩子们。9ive up意为“放弃”；giveaway意为“赠送，分发”；9ive off意为“发出，放出”；give in意为“让步，屈服”。
答案：B
真题4 (2011·梅州) － Would you mind opening the window? － ．It’s very hot and wet in the room．
A．Of course B．Not at all
C．That’s all right D．You’re welcome
解析：根据句意，对方显然并不介意开窗，因为房间里很热、很潮湿。故选8，表示“一点也不介意”。
答案：B
名师预测
阅读短文，然后用下面所给的单词或短语填空，使全文在逻辑上正确。(提示：选项中有一个是多余的)
go back，mad，need，mind，hurry up，polite
We asked some people what annoyed．them．Here’s what they said：
I don’t like waiting in line when a shop assistant has a long telephone conversation．When that happens，I usually say，“Would you(1) helping me?”And I don’t like it when shop assistants follow me around．Then I say．“Could you please not follow me around?1’ll ask you if I(2) some help．” Usually the shop assistants say they are sorry，but sometimes they get(3) ．If that happens，I won’t(4) to that store again．
I get annoyed when someone talks to me while 1’m readin9．This happens to me all the time in the school library．When it happens，I usually talk to the person because I want to be(5) ．But because l’m polite．people don’t know I’m annoyed．So they do the same thing again．Perhaps in the future'I should try not to be so annoyed．
同步训练l4八年级(下)Units 7—8
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．I like to dance sing an English song．
A rather than B．instead of C．over D．instead
( )2．—What should I get my grandma for her birthday?—Why you a scarf?
A．not；buy B．don’t；buy C．don’t；to buy D．not；to buy
( )3．Tomorrow is Sunday．How abou t to visit your grandmother?
A．go B．going C．to go D．gone
( )4．People don’t need to spend money buying gifts．
A．too many B．much too C．too much D．many too
( )5．This room is small hold these people．
A．so；to B．too；that C．too；to D．such；that
( )6．(2011·清远)I want to watch the basketball match．Would you please the TV?
A．turn on B．turn off C．turn down D．turn up
( )7．(2011·黄冈) —What are you doing，Uncle Wang?—I am sorting out old books and I’ll
to kids in West China．
A．give them up B．give them away C．give them off D．give them in
( )8．(2011·百色)It’s raining heavily outside．Why don’t you your raincoat?
A．put on B．to put on C．take off D．to take off
( )9．(2011·铜仁) —It’s a fine day today．How about ?一Sounds great!
A．go hiking B．go to hike C．going hiking D．to go to hike
( )10．(2011·成都) —The T-shirt looks nice on you!How much does it ？ —I just ten dollars for it．
A．take；afforded B．cost；paid C．cost；spent
二、语篇填空
根据短文内容和首字母提示，填写所缺单阋，使短
文意思完整。每空限填一词。
Think about two people you know．How would you describe their personalities(性格)?Are they the(1)s ?Of course not!Everyone is different．Even twins have different personalities．
Some people are very outgoing and friendly．They
like to be with other people all the(2)t ．Maybe they like to be the center of attention．And somepeople are quiet--maybe a little(3)s ．They can be friendly，too．But they like to be alone or with just a(4)f friends．
Some people worry a lot．They may worry about many things，such as their jobs，their families and anything that may happen in the future．(5)H ，some people don’t worry about anything．They(6)n mind what is going on next．These people are very relaxed．
Some people are hard-working．They always do their(7)b ．But some people are(8)l ．They don’t care about doing things right or getting things done on time．Hard-working people always get more changes than those lazy(9)o in life．
Arid don’t(10)f this：Everyone is different．That means you are special．
兰、用所给的单词或短语填空
pets，wallet，photo album，take care of，enough，calendar，flowers，watch，personal，expensive
1．I don’t want to get her a camera．That’s too
2．I have a new ．It can tell me the time．
3．She is putting her money into the ．
4．—What’s the date today? —Let me have a look at the ．
5．Don’t ask her question．Or she won’t answer it．
6．Could you my little dog while I’m away?
7．She gives me some on my birthday．
8．Most of children like to keep ．They are good companies．
9．I want to put these photos in the ．
10．I don’t like cats．They are not friendly ．
四、句子翻译
1．他太害羞，不敢在公共场合做演讲。(too…to…，speech)
2．把音乐关小点，您介意吗?(turn down)
3．如果这个星期天不下雨，他们将去长城。(if)
4．大部分时间我们都在一起，因此我们从不觉得寂寞。 (feel lonely)
5．嘲笑处于困境中的人是不礼貌的。(1augh at)
五、补全对话(2011·成都)
根据对话内容，从方框中选出适当的选项补全对话。
A：Lily，what should I get for Ms．Ning for the coming Teachers’Day?
B：Your English teacher?How about a notebook?
A：(1)
B：Mmm．How about a watch?
A：I don’t think so．A watch is too expensive．
B：I see．(2)
A：No，I don’t know what book she likes best．
B：Well，(3)
A：No!A scarf is too personal．
B：OK，I know．How about flowers?
A：(4) Yes，she’ll like that!
A．Some flowers?
B．would she like a scarf?
C．How about her favorite book?
D．Er…don’t you think that’s too cheap?
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·黄冈)
Ever since I was little，my favourite season was winter．I loved to play in the snow and enjoy the hot chocolate．
1 ，winter never gave me the special gift of
snow on my birthday．I would ask my grandmother 2 it didn’t snow on my birthday．She would laugh and tell me I asked too many questions． 3 one day，she promised(许诺)that she would make it snow on my next birthday．
That year， 4 my birthday，my grandmother died．I was sad but angry because she had promised to make it snow．The day of my sixth birthday，I woke up and ran to the window， 5 to see just one snowflake．But there was no snow．I felt mad at my grandmother．She had broken a promise．
By my sixteenth birthday，I 6 all hope of getring my snow，even though I still wished for 7 ．During my party，I stayed with my friends and family and was truly happy．I 8 the best time ever!Then I saw the white snow 9 down all around．I was so excited that I ran around screaming(尖叫)and laughing．My friends all laughed 10 me，but I didn’t Care．
When I 11 home，my grandpa said he had a gift for me．I was l2 because he had given me a gift．It was a small white box，which looked old．I opened it．There was a crystal snowflake(水晶雪球)with a card that 13 。“Happy Birthday．”
How could this be?My grandpa said it was my grandmother’s final l4 on my“sweet sixteenth”．I cried．
I was l5 that my smiling grandmother angel was and had been watching over me．
( )1．A．Certainly B．Unfortunately C．Importantly D．Luckily
( )2．A．when B．how C．whether D．why
( )3．A．But B．Or C Then D．So
( )4．A．on B．after C．before D．in
( )5．A．hoped B．hoping C．to hope D．hope
( )6．A．was losing B．lost C．would lose D．had lost
( )7．A．it B．her C．him D．me
( )8．A．had B．was C．played D．feared
( )9．A．fell B．to fall C．fallen D．falling
( )10．A．with B．at C．from D．off
( )11．A．arrived at B．remained C．got D．entered
( )12．A．excited B．confused C．pleased D．frustrated
( )13．A．wrote B．said C．explained D．appeared
( )14．A．order B．mistake C．wish D．decision
( )15．A．certain B．angry C．sad D．anxious
二、阅读理解(2011·山东)
Teenagers can’t afford to buy expensive gifts．So what do you do if you want to give gifts to the important people in your life'?In fact，you don’t have to spend a lot of money on holiday gifts．There are many cheap ways to do that．tlere are some make-it-yourself gift ideas to try：
To your mom and dad：
You can decorate a photo frame，sing a song or write a letter to your mom and dad．You could also draw a picture for them if you like that better．
To your teacher：
Sometimes students put their pocket money together and buy the teacher a holiday gift．Some kids also give individual gifts．You can send a nice card with the words of thanks inside．You might even write down the favorite thing you’ve learned in the teacher’s class this year．It will make the teacher feel happy．
To the kids who need a friend：
The holidays are a good time to think about people who are lonely．Maybe there is someone in your class who doesn’t seem to have many friends．Try to do something for this person．It could be giving a Christmas card or just chatting with him or her．It’s a small thing，but it could mean a lot to someone who feels a littie shy or sad at school．
( )1．Teenagers don’t have to their parents as a gift，according to the passage．
A．write a letter to B．sing a song to
C．buy an expensive photo frame for D．draw a picture for
( )2．If you want to send your teacher a card，what will you write in it?
A．The name of the students you don’t like．
B．The importance of making gifts by yourself．’
C．Something you’ve learned in the teacher’s class．
D．Ways to improve your grades．
( )3．The underlined word“individual”means“ ”in Chinese．
A．稀少的 B．贵重的 C．单独的 D．集体的
( )4．Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage?
A．A small gift during the holidays may mean a lot to someone who feels lonely．
B．Sometimes students put their pocket money together and buy the teacher a gift．
C．Chatting with a classmate who had few friends is also a good holiday gift．
D．You should spend more money buying gifts for your teachers．
( )5．What’s the best title for the passage?
A．Making Holiday Gifts Yourself
B．How to Save Money During Holidays
C．Making Friends by Giving Gifts
D．How to Choose Gifts for Different People
三、任务型阅读
阅读下面短文，完成信息卡。
Skin-diving is a new sport today．This sport takes you into a wonderful new world．It is like a visit to the moon．When you are under water，it is easy for you to climb big rocks，because you are no longer heavy．
Here，under water，everything is blue and green．During the day，there is plenty of light．When fish swim nearby，you can catch them with your hands．
When you have tanks of air on your back，you can stay in deep water for a long time．But you must be careful when you dive in deep water．
To catch fish is one of the most interesting parts of this sport．Besides，there are more uses for skin-diving．You can clean ships without taking them out of water．You can get many things from the deep sea．
Now you see that skin-diving is both useful and interesting．
Infhrnmtion Card
A new sport today
(1)
(2)
There is plenty of light
Everything is(3)
Under the water
You can stay in deep water for a long time with
(4)
One of the most interesting parts of this sport
(5)
四、词汇运用(2011·福州)
根据句意，用方框内所给单词的适当形式填空。
sleep，win，tomato，play，nine
1．I often hear them the piano in the room．
2．Teachers’Day is in the month of the year．
3．Tom fell in the class yesterday because he was very tired．
4．—Excuse me，what’s the price of these ? —Six yuan a kilo．
5．I think Sally will be the of the English cornpetition in our school．
五、书面表达(2011。·桂林)
今年是桂林市创建全国文明城市关键的一年。“桂林是我家，创城靠大家”!作为中学生，我们应积极参与。请根据以下提示，写一篇80词左右的短文(开头已给出，不计入总词数)。
要点：1．尊敬老师，对人礼貌。
2．帮助他人，友善待人。
3．遵守交规，过马路走斑马线，不闯红灯。
4．保护环境，不乱扔垃圾，不踩草地等。
5．补充两句个人观点。
参考词汇：respect(尊敬)；be polite to；obey(遵守)；traffic rules；zebra crossing(斑马线)
要求：1．内容包括所提供的信息及要点，可适当发挥，但不要逐条翻译。
2．不得透露学校、姓名等任何个人信息。
Guilin is now making its effort to become a national civilized city．As students，what should we do?
答案
【名师预测】
1．mind 2．need 3．mad 4．go back 5．polite
【同步训练14】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 ABBCC 6—10 ABACB
二、1．same 2．time 3．shy 4．few 5．However 6．never 7．best 8．lazy 9．ones l0．forget
三、1．expensive 2．watch 3．wallet 4．Calendar 5．personal 6．take care of 7．flowers 8．pets 9．photo album l0．enough
四、1．He is too shy to give a speech in public． 2．Would you mind turning down the music? 3．They will go to the Great Wall if it doesn’t rain this Sunday．4．We are together most of the time，so we never feel lonely． 5．It’s not polite to laugh at those people in trouble．
五、1--4 DCBA
[能力提升]
一、1—5 BDACB 6—10 DAADB 11—15 CBBCA
二、1—5 CCCDA
三、1．Skin-diving 2．During the day 3．blue and green 4．Tanks of air on your back 5．To catch fish
四、1．play 2．ninth 3．asleep 4．tomatoes 5．winner
五、0ne possible version：
Guilin is now making its effort to become a national civilized city．As students，what should we do?
We must respect our teachers and be polite to others．We should also help those who are in need and be friendly to the people around us．Besides，we must obey the traffic rules．When crossing the streets，we should walk on the zebra crossing．And we mustn’t go across the street when the traffic lights are red．What’s more，we should protect our environment．For example，we mustn’t step on the grass and climb trees．Litter mustn’t be thrown everywhere．
Guilin is our hometown．Let’s try our best to make it a civilized city．
第15讲八年级(下)Units 9—10
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．discover(v．)发现；发觉→find(饥近义词)发现；找到→cover(u．反义词)覆盖；遮盖
2．wonderful(adj．)极好的→wonder(n．)奇迹
3．holiday(n．) →vacation(n．同义词)假期
4．fear(v．)害怕；担心→fearless(adj．)无畏的
5．Indian(adj．)印度的；印度人的→India(n．)印度
6．wake(础．)醒来；唤醒→awake(adj．)醒着的→asleep(adj．反义词)睡着的
7．natural(adj．)自然的→nature(n．)自然界
8．fox(n．) →foxes(n．)狐狸
9．cross(v．)穿过；横过；越过→across(adv．)横穿→crossing(n．)十字路口
10．slow(adj．)慢的；缓慢的→quick(adj．反义词)快的；迅速的→slowly(adv．)慢地；缓慢地→quickly(ndu反义词)快速地；迅速地
11．1east(adj．最高级)最少的→less(adj．比较级)更少的→little(adj．原级)少的
【重点短语】
1．an amusement park娱乐公园 2．a theme park主题公园
3．around／all over the world遍及全世界 4．on board在船上
5．end up以……结束 6．take different routes走不同的路线
7．an exchange student交换生 8．flight attendant空中乘务员
9．tour guide导游10．such as比如 11．think about考虑
12．have problems doing sth． 做某事有困难 13．wake up醒来；叫醒
14．all year round全年 15．be close to／be far from靠近／远离
16．have been to曾经去过某地(已回) 17．have gone t0已经去了某地(未回)
18．100k through浏览 19．cross a street过街；过马路
20．have a wonderful time玩得开心 21．be friendly to对……友好
22．have a hard／difficult time doing sth． 做某事有困难
23．come alon9出现。 24．help sb．with sth． 帮助某人做某事
25．get along=get on相处 26．at least至少
【重点句型】
1．－Have you ever been to an amusement park?你曾去过娱乐公园吗?
－No，I have never been to an amusement park．没有，我从来没去过。
2．－I have been to the ZOO a lot of；times．我已经去过动物园许多次了。
－Me，too．我也是。
3．－I’ve never been to a water park．我从未去过水上公园。
－Me，neither．我也没去过。
4．－It’s a nice day，isn’t it?天气不错，不是吗?
－Yes，it is．／It sure is．是的，不错。／确实不错。
5．－You love violin music，don’t you?你喜爱小提琴音乐，不是吗? 一Yes，I do．是的。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．population n．人口
(1)population是个集合名词，意思为“人口，人数”，常用来指人口的总称。被看作一个整体时，一般不加s，在句中作主语时，谓语动词多用单数形式。如：
The population of China is about 1，300，000，000． 中国人口大约是l3亿。
(2)如果指一个整体中有多少人数是干什么的时候，谓语动词要用复数形式，这时强调的是一部分人。如：Half of the population in that country are farmers．那个国家的一半人口是农民。
(3)表示“……的人口”时，既可用“the populationof+地名”，也可用“the population in+地点”，作主语中心词时谓语动词用单数形式。如：The population in Shenyang is about 8 million．沈阳人口大约是800万。
(4)表示某国(某城市)有多少人口时，用have／has a population of．．．结构。如：New Zealand has a population of 3，800，000．新西兰拥有380万人口。
适时点津
对人口数量提问用what或how large。用large或Big表示人口多，用small表示人口少。如：What’s the population of the world?世界人口是多少?
活学活用
－Is the population of the town? －Over 20，000．And a third of the population workers of the car factory．
A．What；are B．How many；are C．What；is D．How many；is
解析：对人口数量提问用what，如果指一个整体中有多少人数是干什么的时候，谓语动词要用复数形式。
答案：A
2．at least至少。最少
little的比较级是less，最高级是least。
适时点津
at most意为“至多，最多”。
活学活用
(2011·南通)To improve his English，he spends one hour a day listening to English programmes．
A．at last B．at least C．at once D．at all
解析：本题考查介词短语辨析。at last“最后”，atleast“至少”，at once“立刻，马上”，at all通常与not连用，not…at all表示“一点也不”。句意：为了提高英语，他一天至少花一个小时听英语节目。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．现在完成时
(1)现在完成时的概念：现在完成时表示过去发生并且已经完成的动作对现在造成影响或后果，以及过去某一时间开始并一直持续到现在的动作或状态。现在完成时由助动词have(has)+动词的过去分词构成。
(2)现在完成时的用法：
①已完成用法。表示一个过去发生并结束的动作对现在产生的结果和影响。这一类情况可以细致分为下述两种情况。
(a)表示开始于过去的动作刚刚结束。常和just，now，already，yet，not…yet等连用。如： Li Ming has just turned off the light．李明刚刚把灯关上。(说明现在灯关上了。)
(b)表示过去动作的结果，现在仍残留着。一般不用时间状语。如：I have lost my pen．我把笔丢了。(说明过去某时丢的，现在我还没找到这枝笔。)
②未完成用法。表示过去已经开始，持续到现在，而且还能继续下去的动作或状态。往往和表示一段时间的状语连用。如today，this week／month，lately，recently，these days，in the past few days，during the last two weeks，since。since yesterday，since 2 days ago，since 1991，for a long time，for a month，so far，up to now，till(until)now等。
He has lived here for 30 years．他住在这儿三十年了。(现在还住在这儿)
③经验性用法。表示从过去到现在之间曾经经历过的事情。一般译为汉语“过”，常和often。never,ever,onee，twice，three times，before，since等连用。如：
I have been to the Summer Palace twice．我曾经去过颐和园两次。(过去的经历，但现在依然记得。)
(3)现在完成时的时间状语：
①现在完成时属于现在时范围，故不能和过去的时间状语连用。如：yesterday，last Sunday，in l990，three years ago等。但是，在强调动作产生的后果和影响时，可以和一些表示不确定的时间状语连用。
(a)用副词already和yet。already一般用于肯定句中，yet一般用于否定句和疑问句中。如：
We have already finished our homework。我们已完成作业了。
(b)用ever和never。多用于否定或疑问句中，表示“曾经”或“从未”等。如：
Have you ever been to the Great Wall?你曾经去过长城吗?
(c)用表示到说话为止的过去时间状语，如just，before，up to now，the past few years等。如：I have seen her before，but I can not re member where．我以前见过她，但记不起在哪里见过。
(d)用包括“现在”在内的时间状语，如：now，today，this morning／month／year／term等。如：How many times have you been there this year?今年你去过那里多少次?
②短暂性动词不能和表示一段时间的时间状语连用。如：come，go，arrive，reach，see，hear。close，leave，begin，start，lose，buy，fall，join，die，get up等。但如果要保留表示一段时间的时间状语，必须将动词改为延续性动词。现归纳总结一下由非延续性动词到延续性动词的转换，如：
fall asleep／ill→be asleep／ill get to know→know finish(end) →be over
begin／start→be on open→be open buy→have get up→be up
die→be dead go out→be out come→be in close→be closed
arrive→be here join→be in／be a+名词 leave／move+be away／be out of
borrow→keep go to sehool→be a student
cateh(a cold) →have(a cold) on→wear或be on
begin to study→studycome back→be back put
He has been a soldier for three years。他参军三年了。
His father has been dead for two years。他父亲去世两年了。
The film has been on for ten minutes。电影已开始十分钟了。
We have studied English for three years．我们(开始)学英语已三年了。
现在完成时和一般过去时的区别：现在完成时和一般过去时都表示在过去完成的动作。但现在完成时强调的是这一动作与现在的关系，如对现在产生的结果或影响等。而一般过去时只表示动作在过去某一时刻发生，不表示和现在的关系。如：
I have lost my new book．我把新书丢了。(现在还未找到。)
I lost my new book yesterday．我昨天把新书丢了。(昨天丢的，现在找到与否没说明。)
活学活用
(2011·泸州)Mr．Fan this watch in 2005．He it for 6 years．
A．bought；has had B．bought；has
C．has bought；has had D．has bought；had
解析：本题考查动词时态。根据时间状语和句意可知，第一句用一般过去时，“范先生在2005年买了这块表。”而第二句用现在完成时，“他拥有它已经有6年了。”因为动词buy属于短暂性动词，不能与表示一段时间的时间状语for 6 years连用，需转换为连续性动词have，以表示“拥有”某样东西有多久了。
答案：A
2．反意疑问句
(1)反意疑问句的含义：当对所陈述的某种情况不确定而反问对方时，常用反意疑问句来表达。
(2)反意疑问句的构成：陈述旬+简略疑问句一前部分肯定陈述句+后部分否定疑问句；前部分否定陈述句+后部分肯定疑问句。
(3)使用反意疑问句时的注意事项：
①前后两部分要在人称上保持一致。
②前后两部分在时态上要保持一致(或动词要保持一致)。
③回答的一致性(特别注意中文翻译)。注意yes与n0后面的回答部分要一致。
(4)使用反意疑问句时的特殊情况：
①在祈使句后进行附加疑问句时，用will you表示请求。
②在let’s后面，常用shall we表示征询意见。
③在let US…后面进行附加疑问时，用will you，这一点属于祈使句范围。
④在英语口语中，I am后面的附加疑问句部分常用aren’t l。
⑤由nothin9作主语的句子，附加问句中人称代词用it。
⑥由nobody作主语的句子，附加问句中用they代替nobody。
⑦如果陈述句部分主语是everyone，someone，anyone，no one等不定代词，其附加疑问句部分的主语可以用he，也可以用they。
⑧There be…后面的附加疑问句部分仍用there。
⑨如果陈述句部分含有否定副词never，few，little等时，则其附加疑问句部分用肯定形式。
⑩反意疑问句要求用yes或n0来回答，当陈述句部分为否定形式时，回答要特别注意两种语言表达习惯的不同，注意根据实际情况前后保持一致。
适时点津
反意疑问句的结构可简单地记忆“前肯后否，前否后肯”。
活学活用
(2011·广州)I hear the tall girl wearing glasses is your new classmate．She’s from America， ?
A．has she B．isn’t she C．hasn’t she D．does she
解析：本题考查反意疑问句。前面陈述句是肯定句，其谓语动词是be动词is。
答案：B
【巧辨异同】
1．have been(to)与have gone(to)
(1)have been(to)表示“去过某地(现在已经回来了)”，侧重指经历，可用于各人称，可与once，never，several times等连用。如：
They have been to Beijing twice。他们去过北京两次。(已经回来)
(2)have gone(to)表示“去某地了(说话时某人不在当地)”，说话时此人在那里，或可能在路上，因此常用于第三人称，但不能与0nce，never，several times等连用。如：
He has gone to Beijing．他去北京了。(还没回来)
活学活用
－ you ever Dali? －Never．But I am going there this vacation．
A．Do；go to B．Have；been to C．Have；gone to D．Will；go to
解析：本题从回答Never可知，前一人是在问对方的有关经历，“一你曾经去过大理吗?一从来没有过。但这个假期我要去那里。”很显然，对方已经回来，应该用have been t0。
答案：B
2．both，either与neither
both表示“两者都”；either表示“两者中的任何一个”；neither表示“两者中任何一个都不”。
(1)作形容词时，neither，either修饰名词的单数形式，both则修饰名词的复数形式。
(2)作代词时，neither，either通常被视为单数，both用作复数。作代词时，both还可以作同位语，neither，either则不可以。
(3)neither…nor…意为“既不……也不……”；either…or…意为“或是……或是……”；both…and…意为“双方都……；既……又……”，三者均为并列连词。即连接两个相同的句子成分。
适时点津
当neither…nor…，either…or…连接句子的两个主语时，其后谓语动词通常和最邻近的主语在人称及数上保持一致。both…and…连接句子的两个主语时，其后的谓语动词通常使用复数形式。
活学活用
－How do you usually come to school，by bus or by bike? － ．l walk
A．Either B．Neither C．Both D．Any
解析：本题考查代词。句意：一你通常怎么上学的，坐公共汽车~还是骑自行车?一两个都不是。我是步行(上学)的。
答案：B
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·大连)The cartoon ，Snoopy，is very popular in China．
A．writer B．actor C．character D．designer
解析：本题考查名词辨析。Snoopy是一卡通人物。
答案：C
真题2(2011·东营)Zhu Zhiwen’s never been to Hong Kong， ?
A．is he B．isn’t he C．has he D．hasn’t he
解析：本题考查反意疑问句的用法。反意疑问句前面用肯定句，后面用否定句；前面用否定句，后面用肯定句。句意为“朱之文从没去过香港”，句子中有never，has been to，故选C。
答案：C
真题3 (2011·阜康) －Is Bohai Bridge open to the public yet? －Yes．It for almost one and a half months．
A．has opened B．has being opened
C．has been open D．was open
解析：本题考查动词时态。现在完成时可以用来表达一种状态的持续存在。open作为动词时，是短暂性动词，只有当open作形容词时与be动词连用，才能表示状态的延续。句意：一渤海大桥开通了吗?一是的，它已经开通有将近一个半月了。
答案：C
真题4 (2011·福州) － Mary Alice has joined the music club because they have no time．－It’s a pity!
A．Both；and B．Either；or C．Neither：nor
解析：本题考查词组辨析。both…and…“两者都……”连接两个并列主语时，谓语动词用复数；either．．．or…“两者中的一个”和neither…nor…“既不……也不……”在连接主语时，谓语动词根据靠近的主语名词确定单复数形式。句意：一玛丽和爱丽丝都没有加入音乐俱乐部，因为她们没有时间。一真遗憾!
答案：C
名师预测
(2011·济宁)阅读下面短文，用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空，必要时可加助动词或情态动词。
A
Do you still remember old Henry?Last Sunday，he(1) (go)for a walk with Wang Wang，his cute dog．It was a nice day．Old Henry sat down and watched Wang Wang(2)
(play)with a friendly black cat．Then it was time to go home．Old Henry looked for his d09．But Wang Wang(3) (be)not there!Now old Henry is very sad．He(4) (miss)his dog and doesn’t want to do anything．
B
My pen pal Peter came to Beijing 3 months ago．These days he(5) (1earn)Chinese in a language school．He likes travelling．And he(6) already (visit)many great places of interest in our country．Next month，he(7) (fly)to Harbin for the summer vacation．I am sure he will have a good time．
同步训练l5八年级(下)Units 9—10
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．(2011·成都)—Would you like some juice or coffee?— ．I really don’t mind．
A．Either B．Neither C．Both
( )2．(2011·贵阳) —Where’s your brother，Jane?—He’s not in Guiyang these days．He
Beijing．
A．has gone to B．has been to C．had been to
( )3．(2011·兰州)You’ve just finished your listening exam．Please get yourself ready for the
next part, ?
A．shall we B．will you C．do you D．are you
( )4．(2011·西宁) —Why not go to see the dolphin show with us?—Because I it before．
A．see B．have seen C．saw D．had seen
( )5．(2011·呼和浩特) —Oh，you are here．I’m looking for you all the morning． ?
—To the library．
A．Where have you gone B．Where will you go
C．Where are you going D．Where have you been
( )6．(2011·昆明) —Have you ever visited Germany? — ．But I expect to go there agaim
A．Perhaps B．No，I haven’t C．I don’t know D．Yes，I have
( )7．(2011·达州) —Tom didn’t go to school this morning，did he? — ．Though he had a bad cold．
A Yes，he didn’t B．Yes，he did C．No，he didn’t D．No，he did
( )8．(2011·恩施)disappointed he is! Let’s help him， ?
A．How；will you B．What；shall we
C．How；shall we D．How；don’t you
( )9．(2011·盐城)Mr．White came to our school in 2008s and since then he us English
A．teaches B．taught C．has taught D．will teach
( )10．(2011·昆明)Lanmon here for al most ten years，and he has many Chinese friends．
A．has been B．left C．has come D．came
二、语篇填空(2011·烟台)
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容及首字母提示补全文中所缺的单词。
“Sorry”is a word that people in Britain often say in thdr daily life．
One day while I was(1)w on the street，a young man ran by hurriedly，brushing(轻擦)against my handbag．He continued his way，but turned(2)b and said“sorry”to me．Even in a rush，he didn’t(3)f to say“sorry”．One day，after I bought some bananas，the shopkeeper was passing me the change．but I wasn’t ready for it and a coin dropped onto the ground．“Sorry，Madam，”he said(4)w bending to pick it up．I was(5)s why he said“sorry”to me．Another time，I stepped on a man’s(6)f at the entrance to a cinema．At the same time，we(7)b said“sorry”．
Slowly，I got to know that when something unpleasant happens in daily life。the British don’t(8)c much about who is wrong．If someone is in trouble，a“sorry”is always(9)n ．Perhaps that is(10)w I seldom see people quarrel on the buses or streets in Britain．
三、用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空
1．Hainan Island is a (wonder)place to spend suminer．
2．Be (care)not to be late for the train．
3． (India)food is not as popular as Chinese food in the USA，
4．Thank you very much for (invite)me to your party．
5．I never (see)such an exciting movie．
四、选词填空(2011·河南)
阅读短文，从方框中选择适当的词并用其正确形式填空，使短文通顺、意思完整。每空限填一词，每词限用一次。方框中有两个词是多余的。
receive，minute，when，helpful，early，if，I，from，waste，three，year，but
Michael Leung，a famous TV host(主持人)in Hong Kong，wrote a letter to his son．It is not only(1) to children，but also good for all ages．The following are chosen(2) his letter．
1．Life is short．While you are(3) it today，you’11 realize you are at the end of it tomorrow．So the earlier you start to value your life，the(4) you can enjoy it．
2．You might not be successful(5) you don’t study hard，although a lot of successful people haven’t(6) higher education．
3．I don’t expect you to support(供养)me for the rest of(7) life，so l’m not going to do the same for you．You will be living on your own when you grow up．
4．You call require yourself to be nice to others，(8) you shouldn’t expect the same from others． 。
5．I’ve been buying the lottery(彩票)for almost twenty(9) ，but l’m still poor．I have never got the(10) place even once．So you have to work hard to be successful．There is no free lunch in the world．
五、补全对话
根据汉语提示完成对话。(2011·安顺)
A：Mr．Wilson，(1) ?(你来安顺多久了?)
B：Three days．
A：(2) ?(你游览过哪些风景区?)
B：Huangguoshu Waterfall and Dragon Palace．
A：(3) ?(你觉得我们这座城市怎么样?)
B：It’s beautiful and quiet．It has changed a lot during
the past two years．
A：Oh?(4) ．(好像你很了解我们这座城市。)
Have you ever been here before?
B：Yes．I came here to give a report on food safety two years ago．
A：Then this time you are here for…?
B：Just for a holiday．
A：I’m very glad you like our city．(5) ．(希望你玩得高兴。)
B：Thank you．
[能力提升]
一、完形填空
Australia is the largest island in the world．It is 1 smaller than China．It is in the south of the earth．Australia is big，but its population is 2 ．The population of Australia is nearly as large as that of Shanghai．Enough laws have been 3 to fight against pollution．The cities in Australia have got little air or water pollution．The sky is blue and the water is 4 ．You can clearly see fish swimming in the rivers．Plants 5 very well．
Last month we visited Perth，the biggest city 6 Western Australia．and went to a wild flowers’exhibition(展览)．There we saw 7 large number of wild flowers we had never seen 8 ．We had a wonderful time．Perth is 9 for its beautiful wild flowers．In spring every year Perth has the wild flowers’exhibition． 10 visiting Perth，we 11 a day in the countryside．We sat down and had a rest near a path at the foot of a hill．It was quiet and we enjoyed ourselves．Suddenly we heard bells ringing at the top of the hill．What we saw made us l2 all our things and run back to the car as quickly as we could．There were about three hundred sheep l3 towards us down the path．
Australia is well·-known for its sheep and kangaroos．After a short drive from l4 town，you will find yourself in the 15 of white sheep．Sheep，sheep，everywhere are sheep．
( )1．A．1ittle B．a little C．a few
( )2．A．small B．big C．1arge
( )3．A．1et B．found C．made
( )4．A．clean B．dirty C．cool
( )5．A．turn B．grow C．become
( )6．A．in B．on C．to
( )7．A．an B．a C．the
( )8．A．before B．ago C．since
( )9．A．good B．famous C．great
( )10．A．Front B．Behind C After
( )11．A．took B．paid C．spent
( )12．A．pick up B．look up C．put up
( )13．A．going B．coming C．reaching
( )14．A．some B．all C．any
( )15．A．left B．middle C．right
二、阅读理解(2011·宁波)
Helping your children to read and write at home will improve their skills and confidence．It will also make them get ready for learning in the classroom environment．
are needed by every child in every subject in every year of their life in or outside sch001．Students who improve their reading and writing skills will increase their vocabulary and their ability(能力)to use the English language correctly．As parents，you can play an important role in improving your children’s literacy(读写能力)．You can make a difference by listening，asking questions，giving information，and reading with your children outside school hours．
Here are 8 tips on how to help your children to read and write：
☆having everyday conversations with your children
☆trying to ask more“wh-”questions instead of easy“yes”or“no”questions
☆encouraging your children to talk about events you don’t know
☆reading to your children each night
☆listening to your children read
☆teaching your children how to use dictionaries
☆talking about your children’s writings
☆practicing filling in forms，writing letters，sending cards or emails
You can also encourage your children to join the Reading Challenge Club and discuss the books they are reading together．In the club，children must read l 5 books from the Challenge book list and 5 more books chosen by themselves．There are over l，000 books on the list．The reading must be done in one year．What’s more，it is a wonderful way to help your children to write．For example，you can encourage them to write diaries or book reviews．Remember to make positive comments as much as possible．
( )1．This passage is mainly written for ．
A．children B．teachers C．parents D．doctors
( )2． is the best for the missing part in Paragraph 2．
A．“IAstening and speaking skills”
B．“Reading and writing skills’’
C．“Listening and writing skills”
D．“Reading and listening skills’’
( )3． is NOT mentioned in the 8 tips above．
A．“Listening to the radio every day’’
B．“Listening to your children read”
C．“Reading to your children each night'’
D．“Talking about your children’s writings”
( )4．In the Reading Challenge Club，children have to read in one year．
A．5 books B．10 books C．15 books D．20 books
( )5．Parents can help children to write by encouraging them to ·
A．draw pictures or take photos B．listen to pop music
C．write diaries or book reviews D．play computer games
三、任务型阅读(2011·福州)
阅读短文，把A～D四个句子填入短文的空缺处，使短文内容完整、正确，然后完成第5小题。
The word“cartoon”came from Italian．It first referred to the picture before an actual(真实的)drawing on the wall．(1) Since the l840s，it has also come to mean any drawing that is humorous，satirical(讽刺的)or showing an opinion．It usually appears in a newspaper and magazine，with or without a short test．
(2) People of all ages，especially young children enjoy all kinds of cartoons in newspapers and magazines，or television and at the movies．Cartoons not only show their life，but help form it．(3) They have supplied ideas to plays，movies and television series and so on．Names or words from cartoon series have also come into modern languages．
Many cartoonists(漫画家)draw with special pens．(4) Surely，computers are especially effective for the making of animated cartoons．This helps us to enioy more lively cartoons．
A．They have set the style for clothing，food，manner and many other things．
B．In the mid-19th century，it came into English．
C．Some use the computer．
D．Today cartoons are a part of the daily lives of most oeoole．
( )5．From the passage，we know that ．
A．few young children like cartoons
B．the word“cartoon”came from English
C．all cartoonists use pencils to draw cartoons nowadays
D．people like cartoons because they show and help form the life
四、句子翻译
1．他宁愿住在乡下，也不愿意在城市里谋生。(would rather．．．than…)
2．我想将来当一名像她一样的老师。(want to be)
3．她要求我们每天至少花一小时学习英语。(spend)
4．我们爱我们的英语老师，从三年前开始，我们已经成为朋友。(since)
5．我输了，但至少我可以说自己尝试过了。(at least)
五、书面表达(2011·十堰)
针对社会上人们对90后年轻人的某些评论，英语课上同学们与老师就此展开了讨论。作为一名90后的中学生，请参考下面的提示词写一篇英语发言稿，展示真实的你。
要求：1．语句通顺，表达准确，内容连贯，可适当发挥。
2．文中不能出现真实校名、姓名等相关信息。
3．词数：不少于80词。发言稿的开头和结尾已给出，不计人总词数。
参考词汇：selfish(自私的)；Internet；believe in oneself；high ideals(崇高理想)；in style；creative
As we know，most of US are the only child in our families now．
We are growing up．We are sure to do better．
答案
【名师预测】
1．went 2．play／playin9 3．was 4．misses 5．is learning 6．has；visited 7．will fly／is flying
【同步训练15】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 AABBD 6—10 DBCCA
二、1．walking 2．back 3．forget／fail 4．While 5．surprised 6．foot／feet 7．both 8．care 9．necessary l0．why
三、1．wonderful 2．careful 3．Indian 4．Inviting 5．have，seen
四、1．helpful 2．from 3．wasting 4．earlier 5．if 6．received 7．my 8．but 9．years l0．third
五、1．how long have you been in Anshun 2．What places of interest have you visited 3．What do you think of our city／How do you like our city 4．It seems that you have known our city／it very well 5．I hope you will have a good time／have fun／enjoy yourself
[能力提升]
一、1—5 BACAB 6—10 ABABC 11—15 CABCB
二、1—5 CBADC
三、1—5 BDACD
四、1．He’d rather live in the countryside than make a living in the city． 2．1 want to be a teacher like her in the future． 3．She asked us to spend at least one hour a day learning English．4．We love our English teacher．We have been friends since three years ago． 5．I lose，but at least I can say I tried．
五、One possible version：
As we know，most of us are the only child in our families now．Our parents love us very much and they try their best to do everything for us，which
make us become selfish．Usually we are so concentrate on the Internet that we have less time to communicate with others．
There is no doubt that we have our own advantages as well．
We teenagers have high ideals．We always believe in ourselves and never say“die”．Meanwhile we are in style．New ideas can be easily accepted by us．
You can find out that creative thoughts are full of our life．We also know how to respect your parents and teachers．
We are growing up．We are sure to do better．
第16讲九年级Units l—2
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．pronounce(v．)发……音；正确吐音→pronunciation (n．)发音；发音法
2．different(adj．)不同的→difference(n．)不同→differently(adv．)不同地→same(adj．反义词)相同的
3．quick(adj．)快的→quickly(adv．)快地→fast (n．同义词) →slow(adj．反义词)慢的
4．easy(adj．)容易的→easiIy(adv．)容易地
5．development(n．) →develop(饥)发展
6．important(adj．)重要的→unimportant(adj．反义词)不重要的→importance(n．)重要性
7．die(v．)死→death(n．)死亡→dead(adj．)死的,无生命的→dying(现在分词)
8．him(pron．) →himself(反身代词)他自己
9．hard(adj．)坚硬的→soft(adj．反义词)柔软的
10．sleep(v．)睡觉→sleepy(adj．)困倦的→asleep(adj．)睡着的
【重点短语】
1．not at all根本不 2．end up结束；告终 3．make mistakes犯错
4．first of all首先；起初 5．begin with以……开始 6．1ater on以后；随后
7．1augh at嘲笑 8．take notes做笔记 9．make up组成；编造
10．deal with处理；应付 11．be angry with生……的气 12．go by(指时间)过去；消逝
1 3．complain about／of sth． 抱怨某事
14．regard…as… 把……视为……；认为…… 是…… 15．face the challenge面对挑战
16．break off突然中止；中断 17．1ook．．．up in a dictionary查字典
18．try one’s best to do sth． 尽某人最大(努力)做某事 19．worry about为……担忧
20．compare…to／with… 把……与……做比较 21．used to过去常常
22．be afraid／terrified of害怕／恐惧…… 23．on the swim team在游泳队里
24．with the light on开着灯；灯亮着
25．spend．．(in)doing／on sth． 花费……做某事／在某事上
26．in the last few years在过去的几年时间里 27．afford to do sth． 负担得起做某事
28．as…as sb．can／as…as possible尽可能地 29．in the end／at last最后；最终
30．to one，s surprise令某人惊奇的是…… 31．even though／if即使；尽管
32．take pride in对……感到自豪 33．give up放弃
【重点句型】
1．How do you study for a test?为了考试，你是怎么学习的?
2．I study by asking the teacher for help．我通过向老师求助学习。
3．I don’t know how to use commas．我不知道怎样使用逗号。
4．What about reading aloud to practice pronunciation?大声朗读练习发音怎么样?
5．The best way to learn English is to listen to tapes, I think．我认为学习英语最好的方式是听录音磁带。
6．Making flashcards is a great way to learn English．制作抽认卡是学习英语的好方法。
7．It isn’t easy for me to understand the spoken English．对我来说，理解英语口语不容易。
8．why don’t you take English notes?你为什么不记英语笔记?
9．I used to be short when l was young．我小时候个子很矮。
10．I didn，t use to like tests．我过去不喜欢考试。
11．－Did you use to play the piano?你过去弹钢琴吗? －No，I didn’t．不，我不弹。
1 2．It seems that Yu Mei has changed a lot．Yu Mei看起来变化很大。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．differently adv．不同地，有区别地
(1)differently是副词，用于修饰动词或形容。词。如：Different people might understand the samething differently．不同的人可能会不同地去理解同一件事。
(2)differently的形容词形式是different，意为“不同的”；be different from，“与……不同”。如：The weather in the north is different from that in the south in our country．我们国家北方与南方的天气不同。
(3)differently的名词形式是difference，如：There are mgny differences between the two pictures．这两幅图画中有许多不同处。
活学活用
Look at the twins，Can you tell the (different)between them?
解析：根据句意，问是否能说出这对双胞胎的差异点，且差异不只有一点，所以用复数形式。因而填differences。
答案：differences
2．unless prep．如果不。除非
多用于否定句。引导条件状语从句，常与if not互换。
适时点津
当主句是一般将来时时，unless引导的条件状语从句要用一般现在时表示将来时间。如：
You will fail in English unless you work hard你将不能通过英语(测验)，除非你努力学习。
活学活用
(2010·杭州) we deal with our problems．we can easily become unhappy．
A．Unless B．Until C．Though D．Whether
解析：本题考查连词。根据句意“我们很容易会变得不开心，除非我们处理好问题。”并结合四个选项的含义，可知A项为正确答案。unless—if… not；until直到；though虽然； whether是否。
答案：A
3．succeed n成功
(1)succeed in doing sth．意为“成功地做某事”。如：
He succeeded in working out the math problem．他成功地解出了这道数学题。
(2)succeed的名词为success，如： Failure is the mother of success．失败是成功之母。
(3)succeed的形容词为successful，如：
Bill Gates is fl successful businessman．比尔· 盖茨是一个成功的商人。
活学活用
(2011·义鸟)It’S my dream to be a (成功的)businessman like my father．
解析：本题考查形容词修饰名词，故应填successful。
答案：successful
4．used to过去常常，以前常常
(1)used to do sth．意为“过去常常做某事”，如：I used to be short．我过去很矮的。
(2)be used to do sth．=be used for doing sth．意为“被用来做某事”，如：
Telephones are used to talk with someone far away．==Telephones are used for talking with
someone far away．电话被用来与远处的人谈话。
(3)be／get used to sth．／doing sth．意为“习惯于(做)某事”，如：We Chinese are／get used to shaking hands when we meet someone for the first time．我们中国人初次见面时习惯于握手。
适时点津
used to do的否定形式可以借助于助动词did，表达为didn’t use to do，也可以直接在used后面加not，可缩略为usedn’t to do。其疑问句形式同理。可表达为Did you use to…?或Used you to…?如：
I didn’t use to play the piano．= I usedn’t to play the piano．我过去不弹钢琴的。
Did you use to be afraid of the dark? = Used you to be afraid of the dark?你过去怕黑吗?
活学活用
(2010·盐城)My sister has been in America for half a year．She the life here．
A． is used to B．used to C．is used D．used
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。A项is used to，当其后加名词或动名词时，意为“习惯于(做)某事”；B项used to意为“过去常常”，后面常跟动词原形；C项is used后可加to do sth．或for doing sth．表示“被用来做某事”；D项used是use的过去式。根据句意“我姐姐已经在美国半年了，她习惯于这儿的生活了。”以及空格后所跟的是名词the life，可知此处应选A。
答案：A
5．pride n．自尊；得意；骄傲
(1)take pride in意为“为……感到自豪”，如：My parents took pride in me because of my suecessful speech．我父母因我的成功演讲而自豪。
(2)proud adj．自豪的，得意的 be proud of=take pride in
活学活用
(2010·厦门)－Mum，I got the best grade in the English test today．－Well done，son．I’m very
of you．
A．proud B．tired C．afraid
解析：本题考查短语辨析。be proud of意为“以……为自豪”；be tired of意为“厌烦……”；be afraid of意为“害怕……”。由句意可知“妈妈因儿子的英语成绩而自豪”。
答案：A
【重点句型】
1．I learn by asking the teacher for help．我通过向老师求助学习。
(1)by表示“用……方式或手段”，后接doing。如：
I learn by studying with a group．我通过和小组合作方式学习。
The old man made a living by planting flowers．这个老人靠种花来谋生。
(2)by表示“凭借某种交通工具”，后接交通工具名词，且此类交通工具名词前不加任何冠词。如：We go to the island by boat．我们乘小船去小岛。
(3)by指时间，表示“不迟于；到……时为止”。如：By the time I got outside。the school bus had already left．当我到外面时，校车已经离开了。
(4)by还可表示“在附近”。如：There is an old man fishing by the lake．有个老人在河边钓鱼。
(5)与by相关的词组：by mistake“错误地”，by accident“偶然地”，by the end of“到……为止”。如：Sorry．I took your umbrella by mistake．对不起，我错拿了你的雨伞。
适时点津
by是介词，后面只能跟名词或动名词。
活学活用
We learn English by (make)vocabulary lists．
解析：本题考查介词by后跟动词的动名词形式的用法。by doing表示“通过某种方式或手段”。make的﹣ing形式要去e加ing。
答案：making
2．I don’t know how to use connmas．我不懂怎样使用逗号。
(1)how to use是“疑问词+动词不定式”的复合结构在句中作及物动词的宾语。如：
Everyone needs to learn how to get on well with others．每个人都需要学会如何与人相处好。
(2)其他连接代词what，which或连接副词when，where,why加上动词不定式to do也可构成同样的复合结构，一般作动词know，ask，findout，tell，wonder，learn等的宾语。如：He asked me what to say．他问我该说什么。
I want to know when to set off．我想知道什么时候出发。
活学活用
(2010·宁波) －Can I help you，dear?－Yeah，I don’t know a banana milk shake．Maybe you can teach US．
A．what to do B．when to make C．how to make D．why to do
解析：本题考查“疑问词+动词不定式”的用法。由句意“我不知道如何制作香蕉奶昔”可知疑问词应用how，表示“方式”。what表示“什么”；when表示“时间”；why表示“原因”。
答案：C
3．Why don’t you learn English by memorizing theEnglish words?你为什么不通过背英语单词来学英语呢?
(1)Why don，t you do…?是表示“提建议”的问旬，可缩略为Why not do…?如：
Why not get your mother a scarf for her birthday?为什么不送妈妈一条围巾作为生日礼物呢?
(2)可用另一表示“提建议”的问句What／How about(doing)…?来同义表达。如：
What／How about getting your mother a scarf for her birthday?送妈妈一条围巾作为生日礼物怎么样?
活学活用
Why not是Why don’t you的缩略形式，所以其后跟动词原形如如：
Why don’t you take your umbrella because of the bad weather?=Why not take your umbrella because of the bad weather?因为这糟糕的天气，你为什么不带上伞呢?What／How about中的about是介词，后可加名词或动名词。What／How about drinking a glass of milk?=What／How about a glass Of milk?喝杯牛奶怎么样?
活学活用
－I am very tired these days because of studying for physics。－Why not music?It can make you relaxed．
A．listen to B．to listen to C．listening to D．listened to
解析：本题考查提建议问句“why not do stK?”。
答案：A
4．It isn’t easy for me to understand what the teachersays in class．听懂老师课堂上说的内容对我来说不容易。
It is adj．to do sth．句型中，it是形式主语，to do sth．是真正的主语，表示“做某事是怎么样的”。如：
It's very important to have a healthy lifestyle．拥有一个健康的生活方式是很重要的。
活学活用
(2010·高州)Tony thinks it is easy English．
A．study B．learns C．to learn D．studies
解析：本题考查It’s adj．to do sth．的句型。句意：托尼认为学英语很容易。
答案：C
【巧辨异同】
1．aloud与loudly
(1)aloud adv．意为“大声地(使别人能听得到)”，如：
Reading aloud is a good way of learning English．朗读是学习英语的好方法。
(2)loudly adv．意为“吵吵闹闹地，有噪声地”，如：
I heard someone knocked loudly at the door．我听到有人在使劲地敲门。
活学活用
They are talking (loud)in the next room．
解析：根据句意“说话声很大”，可知这个说话声很吵闹，并且修饰动词的要用副词，故填loudly。
答案：loudly
2．voice，noise与sound
(1)voice意为“声音，鸟鸣声”，一般指人声或鸟声。如：She has a sweet voice．她声音很甜美。
(2)noise意为“噪音，吵闹声”，一般指不悦耳的声音。如：Don’t make SO much noise．别弄出那么大的噪音。
(3)sound意为“声音，响声”，一般指自然界中的声音。如：Sound travels slower than light．声音的传播比光慢。
适时点津
Don’t make so !I can’t hear the music．
A．aloud noise B．much noise C．loud sound D．much voice
解析：根据句意“不要吵闹，我听不到音乐了”，可知应用noise。其次，aloud是副词，修饰动词，所以排除A。
答案：B
3．exciting与excited
(1)exciting意为“令人兴奋的”，一般用于修饰事物。如：The soccer game is excitin9．那场足球赛很令人激动。
(2)excited意为“兴奋的，激动的”，一般用于修饰人。如：We were very excited at the news．听到那个消息我们很激动。
活学活用
动词的现在分词和过去分词形式都具有形容词的特性，但现在分词作形容词用；一般用于修饰事物，过去分词作形容词用，一般用于修饰人。如：I am interested in the interesting book．我对这本有趣的书感兴趣。
活学活用
The old man isn’t really in fishing and he’s only interested in in a boat doing nothing at all．
A．interesting；sitting B．interesting；sit
C．interested；sitting D．interested：sit
解析：根据句意“老人对钓鱼不感兴趣”，可知第一空是修饰“人”的，要用过去分词作形容词用，故第一空填interested；第二空前有介词in，介词后要加名词、代词或动名词。
答案：C
4．speak，talk，say与tell
(1)speak意为“说，讲话”，作及物动词用时，后面的宾语一般是某种语言。如：He can’t speak French．他不会说法语。
(2)say意为“说”，指用语言表达思想，着重于所说的内容。表示说某种语言时用speak+语言，若用say时，则应表达为say sth．in+语言。常用结构：say to oneself自言自语。如：
Can you say it in English?你能用英语来说它吗?
(3)talk意为“说话，谈话”，指有说话能力，侧重“与人交谈时的连贯说话”。常用结构：talk to／with sb．“与某人谈话”，talk about sth．／sb．“谈论某事或某人”。如：
He was talking to／with his friend when I called him．当我打电话给他时，他正在和他的朋友谈话。 What are you talking about?你们正在谈论什么?
(4)tell意为“告诉，讲诉”，指用语言告诉某人某事，有连续说的含义，后面一定要有被告诉的 对象作宾语。常用结构：tell sb．sth．=tellsth．to sb．“告诉某人某事”；tell sb．to do sth．“告诉某人去做某事”。如：
Tell me your name．I can help you．=Tell yourname to me．I can help you．把你的名字告诉我，我可以帮你。
My teacher tells me to finish my homework first and play second every day．我老师告诉我每天都要先完成作业再玩。
常用短语有：tell stories“讲故事”；tell a lie“撒谎”；tell the truth“说实话”。如：
Grandma used to tell stories to me when I was young．我小的时候，奶奶经常给我讲故事。
Don’t believe him．He’s telling a lie．别相信他，他在撒谎。
To tell you the truth。I don’t quite agree withyou．老实说，我不太同意你的意见。
活学活用
1．(2010·上海)Before going to the History Museum，our teacher told us the public rules．
A．obey B．to obey C．obeying D．obeyed
解析：本题考查动词不定式的用法。tell sb． (not)to do sth．，“告诉某人(不要)做某事”。
句意：在去历史博物馆之前，老师告诉我们要遵守公共规则。
答案：B
2．(2010‘莆田)Can he it in English?
A．speak B．speaks C．say D．talk
解析：本题考查say+说话内容，句中it即指代所说的话，say it in English表示“用英语来说它”。
答案：C
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·宁波)When you don，I know a word，you can in the dictionary．
A．look it up B．set it up C．give it up D．pick it up
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。look up“查阅(字典)”；set up“建立，创立”；give up“放弃”；pickup“拾起，捡起”。句意：当你不知道一个单词时，你可以查字典。
答案：A
真题2 (2011·丽水)Please remember thefollowing things when you are in the museum． ，don’t touch the things．Second，don’t make much noise．
A．First of all B．By the way C．In fact D．So far
解析：本题考查关联词。由最后一句的second可知，前面所指的don’t touch the things应该是第一点要记住的事，即“首先”要记住的事。
答案：A
真题3 （2011·义乌)Jame is her PE test．We need to help with her trainin9．
A．surprised at B．proud of C．pleased with D．worried about
解析：本题考查系表结构短语辨析。be surprised at意为“对……感到惊奇”；be proud of意为“为……感到自豪”；be pleased with意为“对……喜欢”；be worried about意为“担忧，为……焦虑”。根据句意“我们有必要帮他训练”，可知“Jane很担忧她的体育考试”。
答案：D
真题4 (2010·新疆)Computers aresopopular in our country that every student knows
e-mails．
A．how can he send B．how does he send
C．how to send D．how did he send
解析：本题考查“疑问词+动词不定式”的用法。根据句子结构可知，此处应该使用宾语从句或者疑问词+动词不定式结构。宾语从句应为陈述语序，而A，B，D均为疑问语序。
答案：C
真题5 (2010·黄冈)－ Good news．We will have a holiday．－I’ve heard of it．But it’s coming in
A．three days；three days’time B．three days’：three days’
C．three-day；three days D．three days；three-day time
解析：本题考查名词及连字符号连接的词带有形容词特性。第_空表示“三天的假期”，此处可用名词所有格形式即three days’或复合形容词three-day，故排除A，D项。第二空表示“三天后”，用three days。
答案：C
真题6 (2010·牡丹江)My grandfather us stories when l was young．
A．was used to tell B．is used to telling
C．used to tell D．used to telling
解析：本题考查动词短语。be used to tell意为“被用来讲……”；be used to telling意为“习惯于讲……；used to tell意为“过去常常讲……”；used to telling是一个错误的结构。根据句意，故选C。
答案：C
真题7 (2010·龙岩)I have seen that movie．But I am afraid it interesting ．
A．isn't；all B．isn’t；at all C．not；at all D．not；all
解析：本题考查固定短语not…at all，“根本不，
一点儿也不”。句意为“我已看过这部电影，但恐怕这部电影一点儿也不有趣”。not要加在be动词、情态动词或助动词之后。
答案：B
真题8 (2010·德城)We can’t do well in examination we study hard in school time．
A．if B．and C．since D．unless
解析：本题考查连词辨析。if意为“如果”；and是并列连词，表示“并，又，和”；since意为“自从……到现在为止”；Unless意为“除非，如果不”。句意：如果我们在校期间不努力学习，我们就不能在考试中取得好成绩。
答案：D 。
名师预测
( )1．－Did you finish the book? －Yes，I did Thanks your dictionary，I had a better understanding of it．
A．reading；for B-reading；to C to read；for D．to read；to
( )2．－How is it from here Ningbo to Xi’an? －It’s about two flight．
A．long；hour’s B．far；hour’s
C．long；hours’ D．far；hours’
( )3．－why did you come back so late today? －Because it heavily when the meeting was over．We had to wait until it came to a stop．
A．was raining B．is raining C．rained D．rains
( )4．－Would you like to give US a talk sometimenext week? －Sure． But what subject should I ?
A．talk B．talk about C．talk with D．talk to
( )5．－People never use Mr，Mrs or Miss before their first names，do they?
－ ，they only use them before their family names．
A．Yes，they don’t B．Yes，they do C．No，they don’t D．No，they do
同步训练l6九年级Units l--2
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．Mike often got into trouble with others at school。but his teacher didn’t trying to help him．
A worry about B．afford to C．give up D．pay attention to
( )2．I failed in the English test last term，so I’m going to it this year．
A．practice B．grow C．improve D．increase
( )3．Some students think that studying grammar is not helpful ．
A at all B．all C．very D．not at all
( )4．—I think teenagers shouldn’t be allowed to smoke．—I agree you．
A．with B．on C．about D．for
( )5．Where live before you came here?
A did you used to B．did you use to
C．use he to D．he used to
( )6．It that he has been ill for a long time．
A seems B．looks C．looks as if D．seems as if
( )7．He is afraid of strangers．
A．see B．seeing C．saw D．seen
( )8．Don’t about things so much．It will make you stressed out．
A．afraid B．terrify C terrified D．worry
( )9．Usually we get about something and end up in Chinese．
A．exciting；speaking B．exciting；speak
C．excited；speaking D．excited speak
( )10． middle school students allowed to use mobile phone at school?
A．Do B．Did C．Are D．Can
( )11．I don’t’think teenagers should be allowed to drive，because they are ．
A．not enough serious B．not serious enough
C．too serious D．to serious
( )12．We still eouldn’t decide with our difficulties in learning English．
A．how to do B．how to deal
C．what to deal D．what to solve
( )13．—How did you learn English? —I learnt English by English songs．
A．listen B．listen to C．listening D．listening to
( )14．—What reading aloud to practice pronunciation?—That’s a good idea．
A．of B．about C．around D．for
( )15．—I always go to sleep the light on． —It’s not a good habit．
A．in B．with C．to D．and
( )16．Yuan Longping，one of the greatest scientists in China， as“father of hybrid rice”．
A．is regarded B．has regarded C．is regarding D．regards
( )17．It’s hard a job．
A．to look for B．to find C．to find out D．to look at
( )18．Lucy thinks that English movies isn’t a good way．
A．watch B．watched C．watching D．watches
( )19．—I read very slowly．I can’t spell some English words， ．—You must practice as often as possible．
A．also B．either C．but D．too
( )20．I frustrated when l wasn’t sure of the correct answer．
A．may be B．used to C．used to be D．use to be
二、单词拼写
Li Lei即将升入高中，在高中的第一节英语课上他将要用英文作自我介绍。以下是他准备的发言稿，请你完成文中的单词拼写。每空限填一词。
Hello，everyone!Now let me say something about(1) (我自己)．I’m LiLei．I was born on(2) (五月)20th，1994．I come from Red Star Village which is in the(3)
(西部)of the city．’It’s beautiful with lots of green trees and colorful(4) (花)．
Many boys like playing ball games，but I like(5) (跑步)．I have ever(6) (得到，赢得)first prize in the l，500-meter race in the city’s sports meetin9．My parents are very(7) (自豪的)of me．But I’m not good at spoken English．I will(8) (练习)it．I’m sure nothing is difficult if I put my(9) (心)into it．
I am(10) (幸运的)to have the chance to study in this school．I hear the lessons won’t be as easy as before．I will try my best．I like making friends and helping others．I’m sure we’ll get well with each other．
That’s all．Thank you for listening!
三、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．Nancy is patient and she doesn’t give up (easy)．
2．You are no (long)a little kid．
3．We won’t have the picnic if it (rain)next week．
4．He has lots of friends but still feels (alone)．
5．Do you know how to (pronunciation)these long words?
6．She had trouble (use)grammar．
7．I love animals。so I spend every Sunday (work)in an animal hospital．
8．Playing computer games is delightful，but (spend)too much time on it may do harm．
9．My sister said she was in the comics．(interest)
10．—The train station was here in the past．but now we see a beautiful open park instead．
—Yes，things (change)a lot over the years !
11．They don’t know why you talked to them so (angry)．
12．Have you (feed)the dog and cleaned your room?
1 3．People in the west often think that the number thirteen is (1uck)．
14．They (chat)online when Amy came up the stairs．
15．So much homework makes us (stress) out．We have to stay up late to finish it．
四、用方框中所给单词的适当形式填空
shy，be，tall，no use，seem , how,do,run,exercise
It(1) that Jenny has changed a lot．She used to be short when she(2) a little girl．But now she is(3) ．She used to be very(4) ，but now she is outgoin9．And she likes to sing and dance．She(5) to do sports when she was a little girl．She used to play with her dolls．But now she likes gym very much．She(6) sports every day，such as doing morning(7) and(8) (9) she has ch：ged!
[能力提升]
一、完形填空
I have a friend and she used to smoke cigarettes．
She l smoking at the age of 11．She mixed with the wrong crowd and she thought they were 2 because they smoked．In order to be cool and to be friends with them，she had to smoke，too．
Soon after she 3 me in Chicago，we became 4 ．One day on our way home，she started smoking．I asked her 5 and she told me how she first started．I told her she should spend more time on her studies，not just to be cool but to make her parents 6 ，to make herself cleverer，to make herself feel better and。most of all，to get a good 7 ．
I stayed with her every second， 8 away her cigarettes every time she went for one．Soon she stopped smoking．
One day I happened to see her smoking agaim I told her she needed to choose between a friend and 9 ．We didn’t talk for two days．Then she finally called and said she 10 never smoke agaim
Now it’s only been a few months，but she is doing better and doesn’t smoke．
( )1．A．began B．stopped C．1iked D．kept
( )2．A．strong B．cool C．friendly D．kind-hearted
( )3．A．followed B．remembered C．returned D．moved near
( )4．A．classmates B．workmates C．roommates D．friends
( )5．A．when B．why C．where D．how long
( )6．A．worried B．happier C．better D．healthier
( )7．A．education B．friend C．job D．prize
( )8．A．blowing B．throwing C．giving D．putting
( )9．A．her job B．her parents C．her friends D．cigarettes
( )10．A．will B．would C．has D．had
二、阅读理解
When l2-year-old Helen received a lot of money on her birthday，she knew exactly what she wanted to buy：a pair of LuluLemon trousers that her mom wouldn’t buy because they were too expensive．
“We went to the store together，”Helen’s mom，Kate remembers，“but she gave up．When it was her own money，she felt they were too expensive，after all．’’
That story well explains why kids should have some money of their own not for lunch or movies．But for the things that they dream of．Because they don’t really understand what it means to pay$100 for a pair of trousers untilit’s their$100．
“Kids get excited about receiving money because it gives them the chance to decide what to buy。”says Lana，a manager of the Yonge and Eglinton CIBC in Toronto．“Kids are more interested in money，which means there is a need for parents to teach them．’’
If kids are given some money a week or a month it will do them good，because they will learn how to use money．But Lana has other suggestions：
Help them plan．“If there’s a big-ticket item your child wants，”says Lana，“help him plan how long it will take him to save enough money for that，and how much he should save each week．’’
Help them earn．Tell kids the ways they can make their money，for instance，they can help do the housework． ·
( )1．What did Helen get on her birthday?
A．Flowers． B．Trousers． C．Books． D．Money．
( )2．Helen didn’t buy the trousers because they were
A．not nice B．a little short C．expensive D．too big
( )3．The underlined words“a big-ticket item” might mean ．
A．something that costs much B．something new
C．something that costs little D．something heavy
( )4．What might be the best title for the passage?
A．How to Make More Money B．Learn How to Manage Money
C．Money Is Very Important D．Keep Kids Away from Money
三、任务型阅读(2011·义乌)
请你阅读下面一篇短文，完成信息记录表。
A different way of learning is widely used in our English study．
Before class，we make study plans first．Then we look up the new words，listen to the recording and read the text．When we meet problems we can’t solve by ourselves，we always write them down in our notebooks．
In class，we sit in groups to discuss the problems freely．The teacher always offers help when we need．After discussion，it’s time for us to give a report to the class．We also make conversations in pairs and practice a lot．It’s really good for our listening and speaking．
After class，we have less homework now so we can go to the library to read English books，magazines and newspapers．We can also surf the Internet for useful information．
In flword，we enjoy the new way we’re studying．
Information Card
Main idea
◆(1) is widely used in our English study．
Before class
◆look up the(2) ，read the text
◆write down the difficult problems in the notebooks
Change
In class
◆discuss the problems(3)
◆make conversations in pairs and practice a lot
After class
◆read English books，magazines and newspapers
◆surf the Internet for(4) information
Conclusion(结论)
◆In aword，(5)
四、句子翻译
1．我过去常为数学学科担忧。
I worry my math．
2．她妈妈无法支付Tina上学的费用。
Her mother couldn’t ．pay for Tinfl’s education．
3．有些孩子喜欢开着灯睡觉。
Some children prefer to sleep the light
4．托尼害怕说英语，因为同学们可能会嘲笑他。
Tonv is English because his classmates might
him
5．首先，对我来说，很难明白老师在课堂上所讲的知识。
，it wasn’t easy me to understand the teacher when she talked in class．
6．令我惊讶的是，他就是我要找的那个人。
，he was the man thatIwanted to find．
7．我们对吉姆在数学竞赛中取得的好成绩感到自豪。
We Jim’s good grades in the math competition．
8．妈妈说我们两个之间有必要好好谈谈了。
Mother said it was for us each other．
9．例如，她说学习新单词最好的方法是阅读英语杂志。
，she said the best way new words was by English magazines．
10．如果不是水尽粮绝，我们将不会停止宿营。
We won’t stop camping we food and water．
11．即使有许多人不同意，他也会坚持自己的想法。
many people don’t agree with him，he will still
his own idea．
12．一旦这件事失去控制，更多的人就会遭殃。
Once it was out of control，more people will
五、书面表达(2011·绍兴)
最近，你校就学生英语阅读情况做了一次调查，结果不令人满意(见下表)。请你根据表格内容用英语写一篇短文，并提出一些建议。
英语阅读情况
建议
阅读兴趣不浓
……
(至少三条)
作业多，阅读时间少
阅读方法不当
合适的阅读材料不多
注意：1．文章必须包括表格中的全部内容，可适当增加细节。
2．建议可面向学生或教师提出，但至少写三条。
3．文章开头已给出，不计入总词数，只需接着写。
4．词数：80～100个。
参考词汇：合适的suitable；材料material
Recently，our school has done a survey of students’English reading situation，but the results are not pleasing．
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 BDABC
【同步训练16】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 CCAAB 6—10 ABDCC 11—15 BBDBB
16—20 ABCBC
二、1．myself 2．May 3．west 4．flowers 5．running 6．won 7．proud 8．practice 9．Heart 10．1ucky
三、1．easily 2．longer 3．rains 4．lonely 5．pronounce 6．using 7．working 8．spending 9．interested，interesting 10．have changed 11．angrily 12．fed 13．unlucky 14．were chatting 15．stressed
四、1．seems 2．was 3．tall 4．Shy 5．didn’t use 6．does 7．exercises 8．running 9．How
[能力提升]
一、1—5 ABACB 6—10 BCBDB
二、1--4 DCAB
三、1．a different／new good way of learning 2．new words 3．freely／actively／in groups 4．useful／good／more／better／a lot of／lots of 5．we enjoy the new way we’re studying／we are happy to see the new way
四、1．used to，about 2．afford to 3．with，on 4．afraid to speak，laugh at 5．First of all，for 6．To my surprise 7．are proud of／take pride in 8．necessary，to talk with 9．For example／instance，to learn，reading 10．unless，run out of 11．Even though／if，hold on to 12．get into trouble
五、One possible version：
Recently，our school has done a survey of students’English reading situation，but the results are not pleasing．On the one hand，students aren’t very interested in reading．And they can find little time to read because they have too much homework．
On the other hand，they can’t read in right ways．Besides，there are not enough suitable materials for them to read．
In my opinion，we are supposed to spend more time in reading．We need to practice reading every day．As for teachers，I hope，they can give us less homework．What’s more，they had better teach us how to read and provide more suitable materials
for us．
第17讲九年级Units 3—4
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．reply(v．)回答；答复→answer(v．同义词)回答
2．achieve(n．)完成；实现→achievement(v．)达到；完成
3．patience(n．)耐心→patient(adj．)耐心的
4．clever(adj．)聪明的→foolish／stupid／silly(adj．反义词)愚蠢的
5．on(adj．)开着的→0ff(adj．反义词)关着的 6．decision(n．) →decide(v．)决定
7．worry(v．)担忧→worried(adj．)担忧的→anxious (adj．同义词)忧虑的；焦急的
8．shelf(n．) →shelves(pl．)架子 9．finally(adv．)最终地→final(adj．)最终的
10．she(pron．) →herself(反身代词) 11．it(pron．) →itself(反身代词)
【重点短语】
1．stay up熬夜2．clean up清除；收拾干净
3．have part-time jobs做兼职工作 4．be allowed to do sth． 允许做某事
5．1earn from each other互相学习 6．at present目前；现在
7．at least至少8．get in the way of妨碍 9．have…off放假；休息
10．what if如果……怎么办 11．in public当众；公开的
12．medical research医学研究 13．get nervous(变得)紧张
1 4．without permission未经允许 15．not…in the slightest一点也不；完全不
16．a circle of good friends好朋友圈子 17．get alon9／on with… 与……相处
18．plenty of很多；大量 19．1et…down使……失望；沮丧
20．come up with提出；想出 21．rather than而不是
【重点句型】
1．I’m allowed to study at a friend’s house．我被允许在朋友家里学习。
2．I think teenagers should be allowed to wear their own clothes．我认为青少年应该被允许穿他们自己的衣服。
3．I don’t think teenagers should be allowed to get their ears pierced．我认为青少年不应该被允许穿耳洞。
4．If I were you，I’d wear a shirt and tie．如果我是你，我就会穿衬衫打领带。
5．If I had a million dollars。1 would give it to charity．如果我有一百万美元，我会捐给慈善机构。
6．What would you do if you won a million dollars? 如果你赢了一百万美元，你会做什么?
7．What if everyone else brings a present?如果其他每个人都带礼物，我该怎么办?
8．－What are you like?你性格怎么样? －I think l’m outgoing．我认为我很外向。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．sleepy adj．困倦的。不活跃的
(1)feel sleepy意为“想睡觉”，如：
Lee stayed up last night，so he feels sleepy inclass today．李昨晚熬夜了，所以他今天上课想睡觉。
(2)sleep为动词，意为“睡觉，睡眠”；go to sleep意为“睡觉”。如：
I used to be afraid of the dark。So I often went to sleep with the light on．我过去害怕黑暗，所以我经常开着灯睡觉。
(3)asleep为形容词，意为“睡着的”；fall asleep意为“人睡”。如：
After walking for so long，she fell asleep at once．走了这么长时间的路后，她马上就睡着了。
适时点津
sleepy与asleep两个形容词中sleepy既可修饰名词作定语，也可放在系动词后作表语，但asleep只能作表语。如：
The sleepy driver knocked on the tree beside thestreet．这个困倦的司机撞到路边的树上。
活学活用
(2010·永春)Many students will be if the class is boring．
A．sleep B．sleepy C．sleeping D．slept
解析：本题考查词形辨析。sleep是动词原形，不可放在be动词后面；sleepy是形容词，可放在be动词后，构成系表结构，意思是“困倦的，疲倦的”；sleeping是现在分词，与be动词组成现在进行时态结构，表示“正在睡觉”；slept是过去分词，与be动词构成被动语态，表示“被睡着，被入睡”。根据句意：“如果课很无聊的话，许多学生将会很困乏。”故选B。
答案：B
2．rest adj．剩余的
(1)the rest of…意为“余下的，剩余的”，如：
The rest of our family went to the movies．我们家其余的人都去看电影了。
(2)rest为名词，意为“休息”；have／take a rest意为 “休息”。如：
You should have a good rest．你应该好好休息。
适时点津
rest还可作动词用，相当于have／take a rest。如：
I want to rest at home and read novels this weekend．这个周末我想呆在家里休息，读读小说。
活学活用
1．(2011·温州)I am tired after the long walk．I want to have a ．
A．talk B．look C．party D．rest
解析：本题考查have动词短语辨析。have a talk 意为“谈话，谈论”；have a look意为“看一看”；have a party意为“开展聚会，开派对”；have a rest意为“休息”。句意：走了这一段长路后，我想休息一下。
答案：D
2．She lived the of her life in Sydney．
A．all B．rest C．both D．many
解析：本题考查词义辨析。all，表示“全部”时，可表达为all the…，其同义词whole，则要表达为the whole…；rest，表示“剩余的”，the rest of her life意为“她的余生”；both意为“两者都”，不合句意；many不可修饰不可数名词life。
答案：B
3．offer n提供
(1)offer sb．sth．=offer sth．to sb．意为“提供某物给某人”，如：
He offered me a cup of coffee．=He offered acup of coffee to me．他给我拿了一杯咖啡。
(2)offer to do sth．意为“提供，主动做某事”，如：
He offered to help me with my math．他主动帮我学数学。
(3)offer的同义词provide表示“提供某物给某人”的意思时，有如下结构：
provide sb．with sth．=provide sth．for sb．The part-time job provides me with enough pocket money．=The part—time job provides enough pocket money for me．这份兼职工作提供给了我足够的零花钱。
活学活用
(2010·黄冈) －Do you know Tsering Danzhou，a Tibetan ten-year-old boy in Yushu?
－Yes．He the people his great help as a translater after the earthquake．
A．provided B．supported C．offered D．afforded
解析：本题考查同义词辨析。A项应用于provide sb．with sth．结构；C项应用于0ffer sb．sth．结构；根据句子结构可选C。B选项意为“支持”，D选项意为“买得起，经受得起”，均与句意不符。
答案：C
【重点句型】
1．I think teenagers should be allowed to study in groups．我认为青少年应该被允许小组学习。
(1)be allowed to do sth．意为“被允许做某事”，是被动语态。如：
We are allowed to have part-time jobs when we study in college．在大学期间我们被允许有兼职工作。
(2)其主动语态结构是allow sb．to do sth．意为“允许某人做某事”。如：
Our school allows US to listen to music after class．我们学校允许我们下课听音乐。
(3)think所带出的宾语从句若要表示否定含义时，其否定形式要表现在think之前。如：
I don’t think teenagers should be allowed to goout with friends at night．我认为青少年晚上不应被允许和朋友外出。
活学活用
(2010·义乌)It to drive after drinking Wlne．
A．is allowed B．is not allowed C．is made D．is welcomed
解析：本题考查动词allow的被动语态be allowed。句意：酒后不许驾车。
答案：B
2．Sixteen-year-olds should be allowed to get their earspierced．十六岁的青少年应该被允许打耳洞。
get sth．done意为“使……被做，让(别人)做某事”，也可表达为have sth．done。如：
My hair is too long，I’ll get／have it cut．我的头发太长了，我要去理发。
My computer doesn’t work．I’ll have it repaired． 我的电脑坏了，我要让人把它修理一下。
适时点津
如若表示“让某人(自己)做某事”，则可用let／make sb．do sth．。let／make是使役动词，后加动词原形。如：The policeman let／make the driver stop his car by the road．这个警察让这位司机把车子停在路边。
活学活用
My watch doesn’t work．I must have it ．
A．repaired B．repairs C．repair D．repairing
解析：本题考查动词短语have／get sth．done，“使／让……被……”。
答案：A
3．That would be a good way to keep teachers and students happy．那会是一个使老师和学生都高兴的好方法。
(t)keep sb．／sth．+形容词／介词短语，意为“使某人或某物保持某种状态”。如：
We should keep our classroom clean and neat．我们应该保持教室整洁。
(2)keep也可直接加形容词。如：
Please keep quiet．The baby is sleeping．请保持安静。这个婴儿在睡觉。
(3)keep doin9意为“持续做某事，不停地做某事”。如：
The machine kept running．机器不停地运转。
适时点津
keep+形容词／介宾短语时，keep作系动词用，与形容词／介宾短语构成系表结构。同样可作系动词的还有感官动词look，sound，smell，taste，feel，及be，stay等。。如：
The talent show looks successful．这个才艺表演
看起来很成功。The flowers smell sweet and nice．这些花朵闻起来很香甜。
We are in the same school．我们在同一所学校。
活学活用
Keep and you will improve your English．
A．practice B．will practice C．practiced D．practicing
解析：本题考查动词短语keep doing sth．，“持续做某事”。句意：坚持练习，你终将会提高英语的。
答案：D
4．What would you do if you had a million dollars?如果你有一百万美元。你会怎么做?“主语+would／could／might+动词原形+…，if+主语+did／be(一般用were)+…”的结构是表示与现在事实相反的虚拟语气的句型。虚拟语气用来表示说话人的主观愿望或假想，而不表示客观存在的事实，所说的是一个条件，不一定是事实，或与事实相反。如：
If I were you，I would take a small present．如果我是你的话，我会带一个小礼物。
If it rained，I would stay at home．如果下雨，我会呆在家。
活学活用
If I you， buy it．
A．were；would B．were；can C．was；will D．am；will
解析：本题考查与现在事实相反的虚拟条件句。 “我”不可能是“你”，应用虚拟语气，故排除D。虚拟条件句应用一般过去时(be用were)，又排除C。与现在事实相反的虚拟语气的主句应用“could／would／should／might+动词原形”，故排除B。
答案：A
5．You would also rather stay at home and read a good book than go to a pany．你会宁愿待在家里读读书，也不愿去参加聚会。
(1)would rather do…than do．．．意为“宁愿……，也不愿…。如：
I would rather sing than dance．我宁愿唱歌也不愿跳舞。
(2)…rather than．．．意为“而不是；宁愿……，(而不愿)……”。rather than前后的单词形式应保持一致。
I am going to Bering for vacation rather thanShanghai．我将去北京度假，而不去上海。
I prefer to swim rather than play table tennis．我宁愿游泳而不愿打乒乓球。
If I have enough money，1 will spend travelling everywhere rather than buying some beautiful clothes．如果我有足够的钱，我将会去旅游，而不是买一些漂亮衣服。
活学活用
rather than与其同义词组instead of后面所跟单词的结构不同。rather than前后单词形式保持一致；而instead of后面只跟名词或动名词。如：When I have only a little cold。I would drink hot water and lie down and rest rather than go to thedoctor and take some medicine．When I have only a little cold。I would drink hot water and lie down and rest instead of going to the doctor and taking some medicine． 当我只有一点感冒症状时，我会喝点热水，躺下休息一下，而不是去看医生，吃药。
活学活用
1．－What about playing football this afternoon，Sam?－I would rather at home than football．It’s too hot outside．
A．stay；playing B．stay；play C．to stay；to play D．to stay；playing
解析：本题考查would rather do．．．than do…的结构。在这个短语结构中would rather与 than后面都要加动词原形。
答案：B
2．He likes running rather than ．
A ．walk B．to walk C．walking D．walks
解析：本题考查rather than短语的用法。rather than前后单词结构要保持一致。因前面是running，所以后面也要用doing形式。
答案：C
【巧辨异同】
1．be good at。be good for，be good to与be good with
(1)be good at意为“擅长于”，其反义短语为be bad at，表示“在……方面做得不好”。如：
Li Lei is good at drawing．李雷擅长画画。
(2)be good for意为“对……有好处”，其反义短语为be bad for，表示“对……有害”。如：
Doing eye exercises is good for your eyes．做眼保健操对你的眼睛有好处。
Reading in bed is bad for your eyes．躺在床上看书对你的眼睛有害。
(3)be good to意为“对某人好”，相当于be friendly to。如：
Miss Li is good to all of us．李老师对我们所有的人都很友好。
(4)be good with意为“与……相处好”，相当于get on／along well with。如：
Jim is good with children，so he wants to be a volunteer in Children’s Hospital．吉姆与孩子们相处得很好，因此他想在儿童医院做志愿者。
活学活用
Smoking will your health．
A．be good for B．good at C．be bad for D．bad at
解析：根据句意“吸烟有害你的健康”，可知此空应用“对……有害处”的短语be bad for，will后加动词原形be。
答案：C
2．another与more
(1)another意为“另一个，另一件”，用于泛指任意一个人或物体。若有数词，通常加在数词之前。如：
They worked another ten minutes to finish thework．他们又工作了10分钟来完成这项工作。
(2)more指在原来的基础上再增加一些。通常加在数词之后。如：
There isn’t enough meat，we need some more．肉不够，我需要再多一些。
活学活用
(2009·无锡)The teacher asked students to answer the question ．
A．two more B．more two C．two another D．more some
解析：本题考查more和another的单词辨析。有数词时，通常more需放在数词之后，而another则放在数词之前。句意：老师再叫了两个学生来回答这个问题。
答案：A
真题剖析
真题1 (2010·常州)Mr Wang is very Strict his son．And he is very strict everything he does．
A．with；with B．with：in C．in；in D．in；with
解析：本题考查固定短语“对某人要求严格”和“对某事要求严格”的不同介词搭配。根据句意“王先生对他的儿子很严格，并对他所做的任何事也都严格要求。”可知第一空填with，第二空填in。
答案：B
真题2 (2010·鹰潭) －We have a lot of rules at my house．－So ．
A．we are B．we do C．are we D．do we
解析：本题考查倒装句结构。根据句意“－我们家里有许多家规。－我们也是。”来判断应用“so+be动词／助动词／情态动词+主语”的倒装形式来表示“……也……”。因为原句为We have．．．中没有be动词／情态动词，所以应用助动词do。
答案：D
真题3 (2010·潍坊)If I you，I the job．
A．am；will take B．was；would take
C．were；would take D．am；take
解析：本题考查与现在事实相反的虚拟语气。句意为“如果我是你，我就会做这份工作”。事实上“我”不可能是“你”，所以可以判断是与现在事实相反的虚拟语气。其句型结构为“主i吾-+would／could／might+动词原形…，if+主语+did+…”，其中be动词的过去式要用were，故选C。
答案：C
真题4 (2010·株洲)You should eat fruits and vegetables．
A．a little B．a lots of C．plenty of D．a plenty of
解析：本题考查固定短语“许多的，大量的” 。 a little表示“一点点”；B项是错误的表达，应为a lot of或者lots of；plenty of意为“许多的，大量的”；D项也是错误的表达，多了一个“a”。由句意“我们应多吃水果蔬菜。”可知应选C。
答案：C
真题5 (2010·吉安)1 take a bus to school than a taxi，for it’s cheaper．
A．would rather；riding B．prefer to；ride
C．would rather；ride D．prefer；riding
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。根据句意，既可用Would rather do…than do．．．表达为“我宁愿乘公交车去学校，也不愿乘出租车。因为乘公交车更便宜。”也可用prefer doing to doing表达为“比起乘出租车，我更喜欢乘公交车，因为乘公交车更便宜。”就固定短语的结构来看，A、B、D选项都不正确。
答案：C
真题6 (2010·开新) it rains tomorrow?Will you still go there?
A．What B．What if C．How D．How if
解析：本题考查疑问词辨析。what意为“什么”；what if意为“如果……，会怎么样?”；how意为“怎样，如何”；how if不存在。根据句意“如果明天下雨那怎么办?你还会去那儿吗?”故选B。
答案：B
名师预测
根据句意及所给中文提示，写出句中所缺单词。
1．My neighbours are very (友好的)to us．
2．Do you (同意)with what I say?
3．We had a very cold (冬季)last year．
4．Are you (有空的)this evening?
5．I can’t (买得起，承受得起)to go to the 2010 World Cup．
同步训练l7九年级Units 3—4
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．—Do you think eighteen-year-olds ?—I don’t think so．
A．should allow smoke B should be allowed smoke
C．should be smoking D．should be allowed to smoke
( )2．—He went to see the man who was in hospital yesterday．—
A．So did we B．So we did C．We did so D．Did so we
( )3．—What rules do you have in your home?—I mustn’t go out school nights．
A．to B．with C．of D．on
( )4．—What do you think of your vacation? — present our vacations are too short．
A．At B．On C．From D．For
( )5．My sister would rather at home reading books than on National Day．
A．to stay；to travel B．stay；travel
C．stay；traveling D．stayed；traveled
( )6．—What are you like? —
A．I like funny and energetic things
B．I’m funny and energetic
C．I look like my funny and energetic father
D．I feel energetic
( )7．They aren’t to deal with such an accident．
A．serious enough B．enough serious
C．enough old D．enough wild
( )8．—I think teenagers should be allowed to go out with their friends in the evening．
— ．It’s not safe enough．
A．I agree B．I think so C I don’t know D．I disagree
( )9．What you do if you made much money?
A．will B．shall C．do D．would
( )10．If I were you，I’d sleep after a long walk．
A．take B．taking C．takes D．to take
( )11．He won’t you ．He will always help you．
A let；down B．let；out C．give；down D．give；out
( )12．Last year he had an opportunity abroad，but he gave it up．
A．study B．to study C．of study D．for studying
( )1 3．We believe scientists will a way to solve the problem of air pollution．
A．set off B．put off C．come up with D．catch up with
( )14．—How many people will come to Bering next year?
—It’s hard to say． people，I think．
A．Millions of B．Million of C．Three millions D．Three millions of
( )15．Alice asked me another bag for her．
A．get B．got C．to get D．getting
( )16．(2010·四平) —Is your father a teacher?—Well。he ．
A．used to B．like to C．used to be D．would be
( )17．(2010·衡水) —Did you go to Jack’s birthday party? —No ．
A am not invited B．wasn’t invited C．haven’t invited D．invited
( )18．We to the Summer Palace if my Parents free tomorrow．
A will go；be B．go；are C will go；will be D．will go；are
二、词汇运用(2011·呼和浩特)
根据短文内容和首字母提示，在空白处填人单词。每空限填一词。
Sally was a student in a small town．It was going to be her mother’s birthday．She wanted to buy her a present that would be nice and useful but not e (1)．
She went s (2)after a quick and simple lunch．After she looked for about forty minutes，she found a shop that was selling cheap umbrellas，ana she d (3)to take a black one．She thought，“Morn can carry it when she is wearing clothes of a (4)color．”So she bought a lovely black umbrella and took it to school with her until her class finished．On her way home on the train she felt h (5)．So she went to the buffet car(餐车)．She left the umbrella on her s (6)．But when she returned，it had gone!Sally began to cry．The other passengers felt very sorry for her and asked what the matter was．She told them the black umbrella she bought for her mother had gone，and she had to get off at the next station．After the three passengers h (7)this，they asked her for her mother’s a (8)so that they could send the umbrella to her if someone took it by mistake(弄错)and brought it b (9)．
And now a week passed．Sally got a letter from her mother．It said，“Thank you very much for your lovely g (10)，but why do you send me three black umbrellas?”
三、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．I，m going to introduce (me)to you all．
2．If I were you，I，d take walks before (go)to bed．
3．Don’t go into the office without your teacher’s (permit)．
4．What you (do)if you were me?
5．The doctors in the hospitals are not allowed (accept)rewards．
6．Will you stop(make)such terrible noise?
7．They talk instead of (do)their homework．
8．Work hard and you will be a (succeed)person．
9．Show me your (driver)license．
10．How (sleep)you are I．
11．I don’t know the (important)of the job．
1 2．Later he left home to work in (difference cities．
13．He was invited to make a (speak)at the meeting．
14．In the room there used to be many (shelf) for books．
1 5．Reading is (help)to improve your writing skills．
四、用方框中所给单词或短词的适当形式填空
stay up，drive，at present，instead of，be strict with，have a day off，
be good for，learn a lot from，be terrified of，make mistakes
1．They are too tired．They are allowed to ．
2．He should be allowed ．Because he got his driver’s license．
3．Students shouldn’t till l2：00．It’s bad for their health．
4．She can her teachers at school．
5．I have heard of the reports about the UFOs which are flowing over Beijing ．
6．Reading aloud learning English．
7．Linda doesn’t have any time．We have to ask Tina her．
8．Please hurry up，or we’ll be late．Our teacher us．
9．Susan is very careless．She in the English exam yesterday．
10．The little girl big dogs．
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2010·梅州)
In Britain you are allowed to drive a car when you are seventeen years old，but you have to get a special two-year driving license before you can start．Whe“you are learning，someone with a full license always has to be in the car with you l you are not allowed to drive the car on the road 2 ．You don’t have to go to a driving school—a friend can 3 you．The person with you isn’t allowed to take money for the lesson 4 he’s got a teacher’s license． 5 you are allowed to have a full license，you have to take a driving test．You can take a test in your own car， 6 it has to be fit for the road．In the test you have to drive round 7 about half an hour and then answer a few questions． 8 you don’t pass the test，you are allowed to take it again a few weeks 9 if you want to．When you’ve passed your test。You don’t have to take it again，and you are allowed to go on driving 10 you like．
( )1．A．because B．unless C．but D．before
( )2．A．10nely B．alone C．again D．twice
( )3．A．tell B drive C．teach D．pass
( )4．A．if B．besides C．unless D．when
( )5．A．Before B．After C．Unless D．When
( )6．A．and B．but C．unless D．until
( )7．A．together B．in C．at D．for
( )8．A．When B．After C．Before D．If
( )9．A．ago B．before C．after D．1ater
( )10．A．as B．if C．as long as D．if only
二、阅读理解
According to a new survey，student safety has become a big problem．Nearly 50％of students say they are worried about robbery(抢劫)on the way to and from school．Now in many big cities in China，some schools have taught an unusual lesson：self-protection．Students like this lesson because there are no exams or boring classes．And they can learn how to save lives and know how to stop danger before it really happens．
Chen Haoyu，a teacher at Beijing No．25 Middle School，gives young students advice on how to deal with danger．
If you ale robbed
Keep calm．If you cannot cry for help or run away，give the robber your money．Try to remember what the robber looks like and tell the police later．
If you ale in a traffic accident
If a car hurts you，you should remember the car number．If it is a bicycle，try to call your parents before you let the rider go．This is because you don’t know how seriously you are hurt．
If it is raining hard and there is lightning(闪电)
Don’t stay in high places and stay away from trees．
When there is a fire
Get away as fast as you can．Put wet things on your body and try to find an exit．Do not take the lift．
If someone is drowning(溺水)
If you can’t swim，don’t get into the water．Cry out for help．
Remember that danger is never as far away as you think．Take care of yourse]f at all times!
( )1．Why do students like the self-protection lesson?
①Because there are no tests．
②Because the lesson is borin9．
③Because they can learn how to save lives．
④Because they know how to stop danger before it happens．
A．①② B．②③ C．①②④ D．①③④
( )2．What will you do if a bicycle hurts you?
A．I will remember the bicycle number．
B．I won’t let the rider go until I call my parents．
C．I will let the rider go before I call my parents．
D．I will let the rider go because I know how seriously I am hurt．
( )3．If your house is on fire，you must ．
A．put dry things on your body
B．run quickly and take the lift
C．run away and find an exit as quickly as you can
D．take everything you have and then run away
( )4．There are ways of self-protection mentioned in the passage．
A．3 B．4 C．5 D．6
( )5．The best title for this passage is ．
A．How to Keep Calm B．Self-protection
C．An Unusual Lesson D．Danger
三、任务型阅读(2010·义乌)
中学生上网一直是备受关注的热点话题。某班就这一话题组织了一次主题班会。以下是几位同学的观点，请仔细阅读下面内容。
Li Hua：Surfing the Internet is very exciting．We can do lots of things，such as playing games，listening to music，chatting with our friends and so on．I really enjoy it．
Wang Gang：I like surfing the Internet，too．Because I can learn a lot from it．I can get the latest news all over the world．I also can find the information I need so that I can spend less time on my homework．
Zhang Jie：It’s hard to say．I agree that the Internet is helpful to our study．But it’s not right to spend too much time on the games．And some information on the Internet is bad for our mind．What’s more，surfing too much does harm to our eyes．In a word，we should use the Internet in a right way．
Names
Opinions
Li Hua
●play games
● listen to music
●chat with(1)
WangGang
●get the latest news
●get useful(2)
●do homework(3)
Zhang Jie
●be helpful to our study
●don’t spend too much time on the games
●be bad for our mind and(4)
●use the Internet(5)
四、根据中文提示完成句子
1．我们将等着她向我们作自我介绍。
We will her to herself us．
2．每个人每晚都需要至少8小时的睡眠。
Everyone needs to have eight sleep a night．
3．自信的人不怕在公共场合讲话。
Confident people aren’t to speak
4．他好像什么都知道。
that he everything．
5．李明学习很努力，因为他不想辜负父母对他的期望。
Li Ming hard because he doesn’t want to his parents ．
6．应该允许16岁的青少年驾车。
should be to drive．
7．社会形势丝毫也影响不了你。
Social situations don’t bother you
五、书面表达
假设你是Mary，请你给家长或老师写一封信，针对初三的学习生活，结合自己的理想，谈一下自己在饮食、健康、学习等方面的打算，再谈一下自己应该被允许和不被允许做的事情，并阐述理由。80词左右，开头已给出，不计入总词数。
Dear Parents／Teachers，
How time flies!I only have half a year left to study at this school．Then I’ll be a high school student，so it’s very important for me to plan the time well．Now let me tell you what l want to do next．
答案
【名师预测】
1．friendly 2．agree 3．winter 4．free 5．afford
【同步训练17】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 DADAB 6—10 BADDB 11—15 ABCAC 16—18 CBD
二、1．expensive 2．shopping 3．decided 4．any 5．hungry 6．seat 7．heard 8．address 9．back 10．gifts
三、l．myself 2．going 3．permission 4．would，do 5．to accept 6．making 7．doing 8．successful 9．driver’s10．sleepy 11．importance 12．different 13．speech 14．shelves 15．helpful
四、1．have a day off 2．to drive 3．stay up 4．learn a lot from 5．at present 6．is good for 7．instead of 8．is strict with 9．made mistakes l0．is terrified of
[能力提升]
一、1—5 ABCCA 6—10 BDDDC
二、1—5 DBCCB
三、1．our friends 2．information 3．quickly 4．eyes 5．in a right way
四、1．wait for，introduce，to 2．at least，hours’3．afraid，in public 4．It seems，knows 5．studies，let，down 6．Sixteen-year-olds，allowed 7．in the slightest
五、One possible version：
Dear Parents／Teachers，
How time flies! I only have half a year left to study at this school．Then I’ll be a high school student，so it’s very important for me to plan the time well．Now let me tell you what I want to do next．
Firstly，I think I should be healthy enough．To do this，I will have good eating habits．I’ll eat more healthy food and less junk food．And I’ll do sports every day．As for my study，you needn’t be too worried about it．I will spend more time on it．But I need time to relax myself，I think I should be allowed to listen to music，because it’s helpful for me to relax．Also, I should be allowed to play basketball with my friends on weekends．You know，it’s good for my health．And I think I should also be allowed to play computer games．And I shouldn’t be allowed to go out or watch TV on school nights．They could be bad for my study．
I’m sure I can succeed．I won’t let you down．
Yours，
Mary
第18讲 九年级Units 5—6
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．wind(n．)风→windy(adj．)有风的
2．noise(n．)声音；噪音→noisy(adj．)吵闹的
3．taste(n．&v．)味道；品尝→tasty(adj．)美味的
4．fisherman(n．)渔民；渔夫→fishermen(pl．)
5．suggest(v．)显示；间接表明；暗示→suggestion(n．)建议
6．energetic(adj．)有活力的；精力充沛的→energy(n．)活力
7．downstairs(adv．)在楼下→upstairs(反义词)在楼上
8．main(adj．)主要的→mainly(adv．)主要地
9．knowledge(n．)知识→knowledgeable(adj．)知识渊博的
10．deep(adj．)深的→deeply(adv．)深深地
11．direct(adj．)直接的；直率的→director(n．)主管
【重点短语】
1．belong to属于 2．classical music古典音乐 3．make up构成；组成
4．because of因为；由于 5．escape from逃离 6．be careful of当心；小心
7．use up用完；耗尽 8．dance to伴舞 9．sing along with伴随……歌唱
10．prefer…to… 比……更喜欢 11．remind．．．of… 提醒；使记起
12．be important to sb． 对某人来说很重要 13．on display展览；陈列
14．come and go来来往往 15．be sure to do sth． 一定要／务必做某事
16．to be honest老实说 17．stay away from… 远离……
【重点句型】
1．It must be Carla’s．She loves volleyball．=It must belong to Carla．She loves volleyball．它必定是Carla的，她喜欢排球。
2．The homework can’t be Carol’s．She wasn’t at school today．这个家庭作业不可能是Carol的。她今天没在学校。
3．The soccer ball might／could be John’s or Tony’s．这个足球可能是约翰或托尼的。
4．What kind of music do you like?你喜欢哪种音乐?
5．I like music that I can sing along with．我喜欢可以跟着唱的音乐。
6．I love singers that／who write their own music．我喜欢自己能创作歌曲的歌手。
7．Whatever you do，don’t miss this exhibition．无论你做什么，不要错过这场展览。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．noise n．噪音
(1)noise既可作可数名词，也可作不可数名词。make noise(s)意为“制造噪音”。如：
The factory in the countryside makes lots of noise(s)．乡下的这家工厂制造了许多噪音。
(2)noisy为形容词，意为“嘈杂的，吵闹的”，如：
It was 80 noisy in class that the students couldn’t hear what the teacher said．课堂上如此吵闹，以致于学生们都听不到老师说的话。
活学活用
(2011·杭州)Please don’t make a n because the baby is sleeping now．
解析：根据句意可知，婴儿正在睡觉，所以请不要发出噪音。又因前有不定冠词a，故应填入单数形式noise。
答案：noise
2．prefer n更喜欢
(1)prefer sth．to sth．意为“比起……，更喜欢……”，如：
He prefers coffee to juice．比起果汁，他更喜欢咖啡。
(2)prefer doing to doing意为“宁愿做……，而不愿做……”，如：
She prefers reading books in the library tohanging out with her friends．她宁愿待在图书馆里看书，而不愿和朋友们闲逛。
(3)prefer to do sth．意为“宁愿做某事”，如：
She prefers to be alone at home．她宁愿独自待在家里。
适时点津
prefer的过去分词要双写r，再加ed，即preferred。
活学活用
Some students prefer chatting with their friends on the Internet to (do)their homework at weekends．
解析：短语prefer doing to doing表示“与做……相比，更喜欢做……”。其中的to是介词，因而后加动名词doing。
答案：doing
3．remind u提醒。使记起
(1)remind sb．of sth．意为“提醒某人记起某事”，如：
The old song reminds me of my happy old days．这首老歌勾起了我对快乐旧时光的回忆。
(2)remind sb．to do sth．意为“提醒某人做某事”，如：
Mother reminded me to finish my homework first，play soccer second．妈妈提醒我先做作
业，后踢足球。
活学活用
－ Why are you so sad? －Because the musit me of my lost pet．
A．let B．reminded C．made D．helped
解析：本题考查动词辨析。句意为：－你为什么如此悲伤? －因为这首音乐使我想起了我丢失的宠物。let与make都是使役动词，后加动词原形，构成短语let／make sb．d0；help则可构成短语help sb．(to)do或help sb．with sth．；remind可构成remind sb．of sth．的短语，意为“提醒某人记起某事”。
答案：B
4．lisa up用完。耗尽
(1)use up是“动词+副词”构成的短语，若后接人称代词，则人称代词须放在中间。如：
There is no water in the glass．We used it uplast week．玻璃杯里没水了，我们上周就用完了。
Never let yesterday use up too much of today．别让昨天的事占用你今天过多的时间。
活学活用
The boy has used all his money to buy old bikes．
A．up B．out of C．out D．of
解析：本题考查动词搭配的介词或副词。句意：这个男孩买旧自行车用完了所有的钱。
答案：A
【重点句型】
1．It must belong to Carla．它一定是Carla的。
(1)情态动词must表示肯定推测，意为“一定，肯定”。情态动词can’t表示否定推测，意为“不可能是”。情态动词might／could／may表示可能性推测，意为“可能”。如：
Our teacher must be in the office．我们的老师一定在办公室里。
The hair band can’t belong to Grace，because she has short hair．这根发带不可能是格雷丝的，因为她是短头发。
Both John and Bill like playing soccer，so thesoccer might／could／may belong to John or Bill．约翰和比尔都喜欢踢足球，所以这个足球可能属于约翰或比尔。
(2)belong是动词，意为“属于”，belong to sb．=be sb’s。如：
The basketball belongs to David．=The basketball is David’s．这个篮球是大卫的。
活学活用
1．(2011·湖州) －Who’s singing in the next room?Is it Lucy? －It be her．She has gone to New York．
A．can’t B．must C．shouldn’t D．can
解析：本题考查情态动词的用法。can’t用于否定句中表示否定推测，由“She has gone to New York”可知选A。
·答案：A
2．(2010·保定) －Who does this watch ? －It’s Linda’S．
A．be B．belong to C．belong D．have
解析：本题考查表示所有关系的动词短语。所有关系可以有两种表达：belong to sb．和be sb’s。因问句用疑问词who来提问，故表达为“Who does this watch belong to?”。改为同义句，则其疑问词应用whose，即“Whose is this watch?”。显然本题应是第一种结构。
答案：B
2．There must be something visiting the homes in ourneighborhood．一定是有什么东西来拜访我们小区了。There be sb．／sth．doing sth．sp．意为“某地有某人或某物正在做某事”，doing sth．表示伴随状态。 must在句中表示肯定推测，there must be sb．／ sth．doing sth．sp．意为“某地肯定有某人或某物正在做某事”。如：
There is a girl sitting under the tree．有个女孩子正坐在树下。
There must be someone playing the piano in the next room．一定是有人在隔壁房间弹钢琴。
活学活用
－What’s that in the tree，can you see? － There must some birds in it．
A．are；sitting B．be；sit C．have；sitting D．be；sitting
解析：本题考查There be sb．／sth．doing sth．的结构。must是情态动词，因而后跟动词原形be。
答案：D
3．I love music that I can sing along with．我喜欢可以跟着唱的音乐。句中that I can sing along with是定语从句。在复合句中修饰名词或代词的句子在句中充当定语，所以叫作定语从句。定语从句所修饰的名词或代词叫先行词。引导定语从句的词，叫关系词。分为关系代词who，whom，that，which，whose和关系副词where，when，why，how。如：
I like music that I can dance to．我喜欢可以随之起舞的音乐。
Do you know the woman who is in a red coat?你认识那个穿红外套的女士吗?
适时点津
当定语从句所修饰的先行词是人时，关系词用who，that；当所修饰的先行词是物或事时，关系词用which，that。可见，当先行词是人或物时，都可用that作关系词。如：
Many people prefer the songs。that／which have great lyrics．许多人们更喜欢有好歌词的歌曲。
Pete likes to make friends with those who／that can listen to others quietly．彼得喜欢与那些能够静静地听他人讲话的人交朋友。
活学活用
(2011·杭州)Who is the man is reading a book over there?
A．that B．whose C．which D．what
解析：本题考查定语从句的关系词。当先行词是人时，可用that或who作关系词。
答案：A
【巧辨异同】
1．because与because of
(1)because意为“因为”，引导原因状语从句。如：
The kids had to stay at home because theweather was bad．孩子们得呆在家里因为天气不好。
(2)because of意为“因为”，后接名词、代词或动名词。如：
They put off the sports meeting because of the heavy rain．因为大雨他们把运动会延期了。
活学活用
－Why is she worried? －She’s worried her test．
A．because B．with C．because of D．to
解析：问句问why，答句则必回答原因，故应用原因状语从句because或because of+名词(短语)／代词／动名词。因her test是名词短语，故选C。
答案：C
2．see sb．do sth．与see sb．doing sth．
(1)see sb．do sth．意为“看见某人做某事”，强调某人做某事的整个过程。如：
I saw a cat fall off the tree．我看到一只猫从树上掉下来了。
(2)see sb．doing sth．意为“看见某人正在做某事”，强调某事正在进行。如：
I saw him reading a book when I got home．当我到家时我看见他正在看书。
适时点津
有同样用法的还有其他动词watch，hear等。如：
I often hear my neighbor Zhao Mei read in the morning．我经常听到我的邻居赵梅大清早在晨读。
Listen!Can you hear anyone singing in the next room?听!你听到有人在隔壁唱歌吗?
活学活用
(2010·成都) －Where’s your brother now。Bob?－I saw him in the street a moment ago and I told him
A．playing；don’t do so B．playing；not to do so
C．play；to do so D．play；not to do so
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。see sb．doing sth．表示“看到某人正在做某事”，see sb．do sth．表示“看到某人做某事的全过程”，句意“我刚才看到他在街上玩”，是看到他玩的片断，故第一空填playing；“告诉某人(不要)做某事”tell sb．(not)to do sth为固定结构。
答案：B
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·湖州) －what kind of movias do you like?－I like the movies are about Chinese history．
A．who B．whom C．whose D．that
解析：本题考查定语从句关系代词的用法。当定语从句中被修饰的先行词是人时，关系代词用Who或that；当定语从句中被修饰的先行词是物时，关系代词可用which或that。本题先行词是movies。
答案：D
真题2 (2011·绍兴) －Good morning．I’ve got an appointment with Ms King in her office．
－Morning．You be Mr Jones．This way，please．
A．will B．must C．can D．might
解析：本题考查情态动词的用法。will表示动词的一般将来时态，“将会是”；must表示肯定猜测，“一定是”；can表示“能够，可以”；might表示一种可能性的推测。根据情景对话判断，空格所在句的句意为：你肯定是Jones先生吧。请走这边。
答案：B
真题3 (2010·潍坊) －Is Jessica giving us a speech this evening?－No，it be her．She to Japan．
A．mustn’t；has gone B． mustn’t；has been
C．can’t；has gone D．can’t；has been
解析：本题考查情态动词。根据题意，第一空应用can’t表示“不可能”，第二空用has gone表示“已经去了，未回来”。mustn’t表示“禁止”；has been表示“曾经去过，已回来”。
答案：C
真题4 (2010·广东)Paul’s uncle is the man taught US math last year．
A．where B．which C．who D．when
解析：本题考查定语从句的关系代词。本句先行词为man，先行词是人时，关系代词可用who或that。
答案：C
真题5 (2010·盘锦) －Where is Tom? －He hasn’t come to school today．I think he
be ill．
A．would B．can C．can’t D．might
解析：本题考查情态动词的用法。根据句意“他今天没来学校，我想他可能是病了。”可知应用表示可能性推测的情态动词。
答案：D
真题6 (2010·延边)He prefers to
A．skate；swim B．skating；swimming C．skating；swim
解析：本题考查prefer doing to doin9的动词短语。
答案：B
真题7 (2010·焦作)we prefer to rather than ．
A．singing；dancing B．singing；dance C．sing；dance
解析：本题考查动词短语prefer to do及rather than的用法。因题中有prefer to do的结构，所以第一空要用动词原形sing；又因rather than前后单词形式要保持一致，所以第二空也要用动词原形dance。
答案：C
名师预测
( )1．－May I go out and play this afternoon? －No．you ．Work comes first!
A．needn’t B．mustn’t C．won’t D．don’t
( )2．－Would you like some tea，please? －Yes.I prefer tea sugar．
A．to B．for C．with D．than
( )3．－Would you please． make the child any more?－Well，I just wanted him not to play with the chalk’
A．don’t；cry B．not；to cry C．don’t；to cry D．not；cry
( )4．－Math isn’t as as Chinese．－I agree with you．I think Chinese is
than any other subject．
A．easy；easier B．easier；easier
C．easy；easiest D．hard；the most difficult
( )5．－Mum。will you take me to the park tomorrow? －If it rainy．
A．won’t B．doesn’t C．isn’t D．won’t be
同步训练l8九年级Units 5—6
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．(2010·信阳)Mother often tells me to be honest child．
A．a B．an C．/
( )2．(2010·沧州)I hate people talk much but do little．
A．who B．that C．which
( )3．Lily likes music that she can dance ． But Lucy prefers music that she can sing along ．
A．to；with B．with；to C．to；to D．with；with
( )4．Your stories me of my childhood．
A．consider B．1et C．remind D．advise
( )5．(2010·河源) —There is somebody at the door．Who it be?Is it the postman? —No，it be hirm It’s just seven 0’clock．It’s too early．
A．may；can’t B．will；won’t
C．may；mustn’t D．must；may not
( )6．My friend has used all his water．
A．on B．up C．out D．down
( )7．There are lots of things I need to prepare before the trip．
A．who B．that C．whom D．whose
( )8．Be sure late for school．
A．to be not B．not to be C．not being D．not be
( )9．The monkeys escaped the ZOO yesterday evening．
A．on B．of C．from D．out
( )10．—Could you hear something? —Yes’there is a girt there．
A．sing B．to sing C．singing D．sang
( )11． you do，do it well．
A．However B．How C．Whatever D．What
( )12．Though they are twins，they are not always each other．
A．agree with B．in agreement
C．agreement with D．in agreement with
( )13．Linda is very sad her grandma’sdeath．
A．because of B．thanks C．because D．since
( )14．The coat is expensive．
A．much too B．too much C．many too D．too many
( )15．The photos were taken by our headmaster．
A．on the display B．is shown C．on show D．showing
( )16．Friends are those make you smile，always open their hearts to you and encourage you to succeed．
A．which B．what C．whom D．who
二、词汇运用
I was(1) (高兴)yesterday because my
aunt(2) (送)me a lovely pet dog．I didn’t know how to take care of a dog．So I felt a little(3) (担心)．Then my aunt taught what I should do every day．And I know what to do now．I need to(4) (喂食)him three times a day，I should also take him for fl(5) (步行，散步)every afternoon．It’s also important to clean his(6) (床)everyday．Nowhe has a bedin a(7) (篮子)，and when he sees strangers，he always barks(吠)．And I feel(8) (安全)than before at night．I hope to make(9) (朋友)with him as soon as possible。then l won’t feel(10) (孤单)any more．
三、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．It started to rain during the trip． (luck)，I brought my umbrella．
2．Mary stayed out too late last night．That made her mother very (angrily)．
3．Her (hobby)are dancing，collecting stamps and playing the piano．
4．Today，more and more people begin to realize the (important)of saving water．
5．Look!The cat is washing (it)．
6．This story is (main)about a farmer and his horse．
7．How (energy)Betty is !
8．Did you(success)in working out the chemieal problem?
9． you (hear)the news yet?
10．He fell (sleep)before he took off his clothes．
11．The singer has become a great (music)．
12．Some students prefer chatting with their friends on the Internet to (do)their homework at weekends．
13．When some (sing)forget their words，they always ask the listeners to sing for them．
14．It’s too (noise)，and I can’t hear you clearly．
1 5．I think it is difficult (read)a book．
四、用方框中所给单词的适当形式填空
answer，with，late，surprised，instead，break，quick，find
Breakfast was ready and Mrs Green came intoTim’s bedroom．“Get up(1) ，dear，”said the woman．“It’s a quarter to eight．We’ll go shopping in half an hour．”There was no(2) ．Her son wasn’t in bed．Then she looked into the room carefully．She couldn’t(3) his football．She thought that her son went to play(4) his friends．
Ten minutes(5) ，Tim came in．He was out of breath．
“What happened to you．dear?’’Mrs Green asked in(6) ．
The boy didn’t answer．(7) ，he asked，“Morn，is it true that an apple a day keeps the doctor away?’’“Yes．that’s true。”answered Mrs Green．
“Then give me an apple，but be quick!The doctor’s window is(8) and he’s looking for
me now!”
五、按要求改写句子
1．I like coffee with nothing in it．(改为同义句)
I like coffee nothing in it．
2．I think she is studying．(就划线部分提问)
she is doing?
3．This French book must be Mary’s．(改为否定句)
This French book Mary’s．
4．Albert found the key．I lost the key yesterday．(合并句子)
Albert found the key yesterday．
5．She is the tallest girl in her class．She can play the violin．(合并句子)
She girl in her class play the violin
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·绍兴)
It all started at the beginning of the ninth grade．Carmen found she eouldn’t see things l all the time．She became very worried，but she hoped 2 would know that．When her mother asked her to see the eye doctor。she didn’t 3 ．But her mother’s mind was made up．
Three days later，Carmen got new glasses and instructions 4 her doctor．“All of the kids will think I’m silly．”Carmen said．Her mother 5 and shook her head．“You look just as beautiful as before，”she said．But Carmen didn’t believe her．The next day，Carmen kept the 6 in her pocket (口袋)as she walked into the schoolyard．She stood alone away from her friends，feeling 7 ．
Suddenly，she heard her friend Theresa shout．
Carmen ran over to the other girls．“What’s the 8 ?”she asked．
“My ring is gone!”Theresa cried．“My sister sent it to me from California．It’s very 9 and I can’t lose it．"
Carmen and her friends began to 10 the ring inthe grassy area of the playground．
Carmen realized that she could do better 11 she could see better．She took the glasses out and put them on．Everything looked so 12 !So clear!She looked down at the ground and a bright light caught her 13 ．It was the rine． ’
“Here it is。”she shouted．She handed it to Theresa．
“Thanks，Carmen。”she said．“I l4 thought we’d find it．”She paused(停顿)．“Hey，I didn’t know you wore glasses．They look great!”
Carmen had l5 that she was wearing the new glasses．“Thanks，”she replied．
“Maybe wearing glasses won’t be so bad after all．’’Carmen thought．
( )1．A．clearly B．carefully C．freely D．quickly
( )2．A．everybody B．anybody C．somebody D．nobody
( )3．A．explain B．care C．agree D．understand
( )4．A．by B．from C．like D．to
( )5．A．relaxed B．cheered C．smiled D．jumped
( )6．A．ring B．keys C．book D．glasses
( )7．A．tired B．unhappy C．afraid D．serious
( )8．A．matter B．reason C．question D．secret
( )9．A．special B．common C cheap D．heavy
( )10．A．ask for B．wait for C．look for D．pay for
( )11．A．though B．if C．because D．as
( )12．A．natural B．new C．dirty D．different
( )13．A．ears B．feet C．eyes D．hands
( )14．A．still B．ever C．never D．often
( )15．A．heard B．forgotten C found D．imagined
二、阅读理解(2010·秦皇岛)
Some things can carry messages，for example，a sign at the bus stop helps you to know which bus to take．Signs on the door tell you where to go in or out．Have you ever noticed that there are a lot of signs around you and that you receive messages from them all the time?
People can communicate in many other ways．An artist can use his drawing to tell about beautiful mountains，about the blue sea and many other things．Books are written to tell you about all the wonderful things in the world and also about people and their ideas．
Books，magazines，TVs，radios and films all help us to communica{e with others．They all help us to know what is going on in the world and what other people are thinking about．
1．What can help you if you want to know which bus to take?
2．What do the signs on the door do?
3．People can communicate in many other ways，can’t they?
4．What can help us to communicate with others?
5．What do they help us to do?
三、任务型阅读(2011·丽水)
假设你和父母去纽约度假。阅读A，B，C三则房屋出租广告，完成阅读任务。
A
Large House
Four bedrooms，two bathrooms，large dining room，
large kitchen．
In the country．
Perfect for a family．
$650 a week．
Get keys from J．Beal office，
9：00am—5：00pm．
B
Small House
One bedroom，kitchen，living-room／dining room，bathroom．
Near the city centre．
$800 a week．
Write to rent@accommodation．net for more inforrnation．
C
Apartment
$400 a week for two bedrooms，small kitchen，living-room／dining room，bathroom．
Perfect for a small family．
Near transDortation．
Call(212)203—8399
(一)根据上述广告内容，填写信息表。
Ads
A
B
C
Price／week
$650
$800
(1)$
Location(位置)
In the country
(2)
Near transportation
Bedrooms
(3)
One
Two
(二)从A，B，C三则广告中选出最适合你们的房子，并写出一条理由。
We will choose(4) because(5)
四、根据中文提示完成句子
1．你必须小心那些小偷。
You must those thieves．
2．这条裤子一定是Mary的，因为我今天早上看见她穿了。
The trousers ,because I saw her
them in the morning．
3．因为下雨，她很晚回家。
She came home late the rain．
4．我想保持身体健康，但说实话，我只喜欢吃尝起来味道很好的食物。
I’d like to ．but ，I only eat food that tastes goo&
5．并且我认为大多数人都同意水果和蔬菜是有益于健康的。
And I think most people that fruit and vegetables health．
五、书面表达(2010·台州)
Mr Chen就英语杂志栏目的设置，在校园网上征求学生意见。请你根据下面表格内容的提示，用英语写一篇短文回复，要求如下：
1．介绍表中所提供的同学建议，可适当发挥，但不要逐字翻译。
2．为杂志提供一个不同的栏目名称，并谈谈你的理由或做法。
3．词数80～100。短文的开头已给出(不计入总词数)。
栏目名称
理由或做法
同学的建议
School News
帮助师生了解校园内发生的事
Knowledge Window
开阔眼界，学到更多知识
Free Talk
让学生谈论自己的学习和生活
你的建议
……
……
参考词汇：栏目column；开阔open up
As for the column names of our school English magazine，we have thought of three：School News，Knowledge Window，and Free Talk．
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 BCDAC
【同步训练18】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 BAACA 6—10 BBBCC 11—16 CDAACD
二、1．happy 2．sent 3．worried 4．feed 5．walk 6．bed 7．basket 8．safer 9．Friends 10．lonely
三、1．Luckily 2．angry 3．hobbies 4．importance 5．itself 6．mainly 7．energetic 8．succeed 9．Have，heard 10．asleep 11．Musician 12．doing 13．singers l4．noisy 15．to read
四、1．quickly 2．answer 3．find 4．with 5．later 6．surprise 7．Instead 8．broken
五、1．that／which has 2．What do you think 3．can’t be 4．that／which I lost 5．that is the tallest．Can
[能力提升]
一、1—5 ADCBC 6—10 DBAAC 11—15 BDCCB
二、1．A sign at the bus stop can help you if you want to know which bus to take． 2．Signs on the door tell you where to go in or out。 3．Yes，they can．4．Books，magazines，TVs，radios and films all can help us to communicate with others． 5．They all help us to know what is going on in the world and what other people are thinking about．
三、1．400 2．Near the city centre 3．Four／4 4．C／the apartment／the third one 5．it’s perfect for a small family like ours．
四、1．be careful of 2．must be Mary’s，wear 3．because of 4．keep healthy，to be honest 5．are in agreement，are good for
五、0ne possible version：
As for the column names of our school English magazine，we have thought of three：School News，Knowledge Window，and Free Talk．School News can help the teachers and students learn what is happening in our school．By reading the column Knowledge Window，we will open up our eyes and learn more knowledge．In the column Free Talk，we students can not only talk about our study and life but also express our views freely．
In my opinion，Tips for English Learning that gives the students advice on how to learn English could be a popular column．As you know，it’s not easy for the Chinese students to learn English well．I’m sure the column will be very helpful．
第19讲九年级Units 7—8
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．tiring(adj．)引起疲劳的；累人的一tired(adj．) 疲劳的，累的
2．including(prep．)包含，包括一inelude(v．)
3．translate(v．)翻译一translator(n．)翻译员
4．1ight(adj．)轻的一light(adj．)明亮的一light (n．)灯光一light(v．)点燃
5．hunger(n．)饥饿一hungry(adj．)饥饿的
6．coach(v．)训练；指导一coach(n．)教练
7．pleasure(n．)愉快；高兴一pleased(adj．)令人快乐的
【重点短语】
1．would like／love to do sth． 想要做某事 2．trek through穿越
3．take it easy放轻松 4．hope to do sth． 希望做某事
5．some day／one day(总)有一天 6．somewhere relaxing令人放松的地方
7．consider doing sth． 考虑做某事 8．in general大体上；总体上
9．be supposed to do sth． 被认为是；应该是
10．provide sb．with sth．= provide sth．for sb． 提供某人某物
11．save money省钱 12．be away(from)远离
13．spend(money／time)on sth． 花(钱／时间)在某物上 14．thousands of成千上万
15．take part(in)参加 16．do well in擅长于 1 7．as soon as possible尽快地
18．so that以致于；以便于 19．continue doing sth． 继续做某事
20．according to根据 21．all kinds of各种各样的 22．quite a few相当多的
23．dream of／about梦想 24．be willing to(do)乐意(做)……
25．hold on to sth． 坚持某事 26．clean up the city parks打扫市公园
27．help stop hunger帮助脱离饥饿 28．help homeless people帮助无家可归的人
29．set up a food bank建立食物供给站
30．give out food at the food bank在食物供给站分发食物
3 1．cheer up sick kids使生病的孩子高兴起来
32．help kids with their school work 帮助孩子做功课
33．give away clothes to charity赠送衣服给慈善机构
34．come up with a plan=think up a plan想出计划
35．(not)put off making a plan(不要)推迟制订计划
36．write down all the ideas写下所有意见
37．put up signs贴告示38．hand out advertisements分发广告
39．call up people打电话给人们
40．volunteer one'S time to do sth． 志愿花时间做某事
41．put sth．to good use好好利用某物 42．spen&．．(in)doing sth．花费……做某事
43．not only…but also… 不但……而且……
44．feel good about(doing sth．)对(做某事)感觉良好
45．run out of用完 46．take after—be similar to与……相像
47．fix up修理 48．fill…with… 用……装满……
49．help sb．out帮助某人脱离困境 50．at once立刻；马上
【重点句型】
1．－where would you like to go on vacation?你想去哪里度假呢?
－I’d like／love to trek through the jungle．我想穿越丛林。
2．I hope to see Niagara Falls some day．我希望有一天能看到尼亚加拉大瀑布。
3．Why not consider visiting Paris?为什么不考虑去巴黎?
4．I’d like to help homeless people．我想要帮助无家可归的人们。
5．We could help clean up the city parks．我们可以帮助打扫市公园。
6．I’ll hand out advertisements after school．我将在放学后分发广告。
7．We’re going to set up a food bank to help people．我们将建立食物供给站来帮助人们。
8．Let's cheer up sick kids．让我们使生病的孩子高兴起来吧
9．Not only do I feel good about helping other people，but I get to spend time doing what I love to do．帮助别人不仅使我感觉很好，而且我开始做我喜欢做的事儿了。
10．Being a volunteer is great!作志愿者真伟大!
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．provide n提供。供应。供给
(1)provide sth．for sb．=provide sb．with sth．意为“为某人提供某物”。如：
My parents provide me with some money every week．==My parents provide some money forme every week．我的父母亲每周给我一些钱。
(2)provide+从句意为“规定；约定”。如：
The school provides that no students are allowed to be late for sch001．学校规定学生上学不许迟到。
适时点津
offer也意为“提供”，其用法为：offer sb．sth．=offer sth．to sb．
活学活用
Our teachers us with some help．
A offer B．give C．send D．provide
解析：本题考查provide的用法，以及与其他动词的辨析。这个空需要一个双宾动词，就是动词后跟间接宾语和直接宾语。这里的直接宾语前有个with，与with搭配的就只有provide。
答案：D
2．consider n=think about考虑。认为
(1)consider doing sth．意为“考虑做某事”。如：Can you consider going with us?你能考虑和我们一起去吗?
(2)consider…as…意为“把……看作……”。如：We consider Bering as the heart of our country．我们把北京看作是祖国的心脏。
(3)consider sb．to be意为“认为某人……”。如：I consider him to be my her0．我视他为我的英雄。
适时点津
接动名词作宾语的动词还有：keep，mind，finish，enjoy，practice，imagine等。
活学活用
－Mum。why not having hamburgers instead of dumplings? －Good idea．I’ll get for you．
A．practice B．remember C．forget D．consider
解析：本题考查动词短语consider doing sth．，根据句意“考虑吃饺子不吃汉堡”，故选D。
答案：D
3．come true成为现实。实现
是不及物动词词组，主语为某物。如：My dream has come true．=I have achieved my
dream．我的梦想实现了。
适时点津
achieve与come true都表示“实现”，但achieve是及物动词，它的主语通常是某人。
活学活用
(2009·宁波)He said，“Jack，now you can go to the art college and your will come true．I
will take care of you．’’
A．way B．idea C．dream D．practice
解析：本题考查词义辨析。根据句意可知是实现梦想，故dream符合语境。
答案：C
4．pleasure n．愉快，快乐，高兴(是不可数名词)
(1)It’s a／my pleasure．别客气。(用来回答别人的感谢。)
With pleasure．当然可以。(用来表示乐意帮忙。)
(2)pleased为形容词，意为“感到高兴的，满意的”，形容人的满足感与快乐感。词组：be pleased with“对……感到满意。”如：
I’m pleased with the results．对结果我非常满意。
(3)pleasant(ndj．)愉快的，常用来形容某物或做某事令人愉快。如：
It’s very pleasant to sit down after standing for a long time．站了很长时间后坐下来很舒服。
活学活用
(2010·金华) － you help me with the heavy box? －With pleasure．
A．Must B．Should C．Can D．Need
解析：本题为情景对话，根据回答With pleasure用来表示乐意帮忙。
答案：C
5．fill v．装满，填满
(1)fill…with…意为“用……装满……”，其主语通常是人。如：
He filled the bag with apples．他把袋子装满了苹果。
(2)fill…with…的被动形式是be filled with，相当于be full of，其主语通常是物或人。如：
Her eyes were filled with tears．她眼里噙满了泪水。
The bottle is full of water．这个瓶子装满了水。
适时点津
full是形容词，其反义词为empty'‘空的”。
活学活用
(2009·哈尔滨)So songs were often anger．
A．filled with B．short of C in need of
解析：本题考查动词词组be filled with的用法，主语为某物，根据句意可知应是“充满愤怒”。
答案：A
【重点句型】
1．Where would yuu like to go on vacation，Sam?萨姆，你想到哪儿度假?
(1)would like／love to do sth．意为“想要做某事”，用疑问句表示征求意见，语气较委婉客气。would like有以下几种用法：
①would like+sth．意为“想要某物”。如：I’d like a new computer．我想要一台新电脑。
②would like+to do sth．意为“想要做某事”。如：I’d like to eat dumplings．我想吃饺子。
③would like+sb．to do sth．意为“希望某人做某事”。如：
I’d like you to meet my friends．我希望你见见我的朋友们。
(2)go on vacation意为“去度假”。介词on表示状态、方法等，意为“进行中，在……过程中；处于……状态”。如：There are a lot of new spring suits on sale in the shop．这个商店里有许多新上市的春装出售。
适时点津
would like相当于want，但比want更加委婉，在口语中常说成“’d like”，适用于各人称。
活学活用
(2010·宁波) －Would you like to watch the movie with me tonight?－ 。but I have too much homework to do．
A．I’d love to B．That’s all right
C．It doesn’t matter D．Not at all
解析：本题考查情景交际。答语句意为“我很乐意，但我有很多作业要做”。
答案：A
2．I hope to see Niagara Falls some day．我希望某一天
去看尼亚加拉大瀑布。
(1)hope意为“希望；盼望；期待”，其后接不定式作宾语，即hope to do，或跟that从句，不能用hope sb．to do的形式。如：We hope to see you soon．我们希望不久就能见到你。
(2)some day或someday是指将来的某一天，用于将来时，而one day表示“有一天”，可以指过去，也可以指将来，当one day指将来时，可与some day互换。如：
One day when I was on the street，I met my oldfriend，Lucy．有一天当我在街上时，碰见了我的老朋友露西。
I’ll buy a plane and travel around the world some day／one day．有朝一日我要买一架飞机周游世界。 。
活学活用
I hope to see me one day．
A． him to come B． he can come C．he to come D．him come
解析：本题考查hope的用法，hope可接that从句而不能用hope sb．to do的形式。
答案:B
3．For your next vacation，why not consider visiting Paris?你下一次度假，为什么不考虑去游览巴黎呢?Why not do sth．?=Why don’t you do sth．?意为 “为什么不……?”，表示提建议。表示提建议的句型还有：
(1)Let’s go…“让我们做……吧。”如：Let’s go shopping．我们去购物吧。
(2)Shall We do…?“我们做……好吗?”如：Shall We go to France?我们去法国好吗?
(3)What about(doing)…?／How about(doing)…?“……怎么样呢?”如：
How about visiting Hong Kong?参观香港怎么样?
活学活用
(2010·绍兴)－What can we do for the people in Yushu，Qinghai Province?
－Why not some clothes?
A．throw away B．put away C．give away D．take away
解析：本题考查动词词组辨析，throw away意为“扔掉”，put away意为“收拾，整理”，give away意为“捐赠”，take away意为“拿走，带走”。
答案：C
4．Not only do I feel good about helping other people，but I get to spend time doing what l love to do．帮助别人不仅使我感觉很好。而且我开始做我喜欢做的事儿了。
(1)这是一个倒装句，not only．．．but(also)…意为“不但……而且……”。not only位于句首时，第一个分句要部分倒装，第二个分旬语序正常。如：
Not only can we speak Chinese，but also we carl speak Englisll．我们不仅会说汉语，而且也会说英语。
(2)not only．．．but also…也可以连接两个并列的名词、动词、短语等，连接两个主语时，谓语动词要与邻近的主语在数上保持一致，而且即便位于句首也不用倒装语序。如：
Not only the teacher but also the students are going to the cin'ema．不仅老师要去看电影，而且学生们也要去看。
(3)feel good中的feel是连系动词，good在这里的含义是“愉快的；有益的”。如：
You will feel good in the sun in winter．冬天在太阳下你会感到很舒适。
活学活用
(2010·台州)It made me (感觉)good to see others live better lives because of something I did for them．
解析：本题考查feel的中文含义及用法，make sb．do sth．，故答案为feel。
答案：feel
【巧辨异同】
1．hope与wish
(1)wish有wish sb．to do sth．结构，而hope没有，如：
I wish you to go．(正)我希望你去。 I hope you to go．(误)我希望你去。
(2)两者都可接that从句，但是“hope+that从句”表示希望；“wish+that从句”表示愿望，且从句的谓语动词用虚拟语气。如：
I hope you’11 be better soon．我希望你能很快好起来。
I wish l were ten years younger．我希望自己能年轻l0岁。
(3)wish后可接双宾语。如：We wish you a Happy New Year!我们祝你新年快乐!
活学活用
－I enjoy yourself on vacation．－Thanks，I will．
A．hope you to B．hope you did C．wish you to D．wish you can
解析：本题考查wish sb．to do sth．的用法，而hope没有此用法。
答案：C
2．excited与exciting
excite是动词，意为“使……激动／兴奋”，其形容词有两个：exciting和excited，都可以作定语和表语。其区别是：
(1)excited一般表示人的感受，用于修饰人。如：
We are excited at the good news．听到这个好消息我们很激动。
(2)exciting一般用于说明事物，意为“令人兴奋的；使人激动的”。如：
The news is very exciting．这个消息很令人激动。
适时点津
与exciting／excited的区别相似的还有：interest→interesting／interested
bore→boring／bored , relax→relaxing／relaxed
活学活用
It’s an (excite)place and we all want to go there．
解析：本题考查excite的形容词的用法，形容词修饰place，故答案为exciting。
答案：exciting
3．take after。look like与be similar to
(1)take after是短语动词，意为“与……相像”，相
当于be similar to，常表示在长相、脾气或性格等方面相似。如：
He takes after his father in mathematical ability．像他父亲一样，他很有数学天赋。
(2)look like意为“看起来像……”，多指外貌。如：
He looks like his mother．他长得像他母亲。
(3)be similar to意为“与……相似”。如：
Your views on education are similar to mine．你的教育观点和我的类似。
活学活用
－Tina her mother．They are both tall and like to help others．
A．takes after B．looks like C．looks after D．runs after
解析：本题考查词组辨析。她们在外表和性格上都像，所以应用take after，不能用look like；look after意为“照顾”，run after意为“追跑”。
答案：A
4．put on，put up，put away，put off与put out
(1)put on意为“穿上”，宾语一般为衣服等。
(2)put up意为“举起，张贴，搭建”等，如put up a poster。
(3)put away意为“收拾好，整理好，放好”，如put away the toys。
(4)put off意为“延期，推迟；拖延”，如put off the sports meetin9。。
(5)put out意为“熄灭”，如put out the fire。
活学活用
(2010·淮安)It’s cold outside．Please your coat．
A．put on B．put away C．put up D．put out
解析：本题考查put的词组，put on意为“穿上”，put away意为“收拾好”，put up意为“张贴”，put out意为“熄灭”。句意：外面太冷，穿上你的衣服。
答案：A
真题剖析
真题1 (2010·河北)I，d like you for a picnic with us．
A．go B．to go C．going D．went
解析：本题考查would like sb．to do sth．的用法。
答案：B
真题2 (2010·上海)Richard turned off the computer after he had finished the email．
A．write B．to write C．writing D．wrote
解析：本题考查finish doing的用法。
答案：C
真题3 (2010·达州)Why not an English club to practice English?
A．to join；to speak B．join；speaking
C．join；to speak D．to join；speaking
解析：本题考查Why not do sth．?句型以及practice doing sth．两个知识点。
答案：B
真题4 (2010·江西) －What volunteer work would you like to do? －I’d like to sick people in the hospital．
A．turn up B．stay up C．look up D．cheer up
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。turn up意为“调高”，stay up意为“熬夜”，look up意为“查询”，cheer up意为“使……开心”，根据句意“使病人开心起来”故选D。
答案：D
真题5 (2010·眉山) －what do you think of the lecture of Li Yang’s Crazy English?
－I think it’s ，but someone thinks it’s much too ．
A．Wonderful enough；bored B．enough wonderful；boring
C．wonderful enough；boring D．enough wonderful；bored
解析：enough修饰形容词放其后面；形容词bored一般形容人，而修饰lecture应用borin9。
答案：C
名师预测
( )1． in Singapore is quite expensive．
A．Live B．Lived C．Living D．Lives
( )2．It is great a volunteer in the town．
A．to be B．being C．become D．became
( )3．I still remember the village I lived at five years old．
A．that B．which C．where D．／
( )4．Now more and more people are the dangers of drinking and driving．
A．tired of B．aware of C．fond of D．proud of
( )5．We must act now because time is ．
A．coming out B．giving out C．cutting out D．running out
同步训练l9九年级Units 7—8
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．She often dreams being a famous singer．
A．of B．to C．by D．at
( )2．He volunteers his time the poor．
A．help B．to help C．helping D．helped
( )3．—What a nice MP3 ! Is it yours? —Of course，I 300 yuan on it．
A．cost B．spent C．paid D．took
( )4．I feel because the subject is
A．tired；tired B．tiring；tired C．tired；tiring D．tiring；tiring
( )5．In our English class，many students their hands to answer questions．
A． put off B．put away C．put up D．put down
( )6．The strategies very well．
A．kept out B．go out C．worked out D．worked in
( )7．The teacher the papers and the test began．
A．gave in B．gave up C．gave out D．gave away
( )8．I hope a good job in a foreign company after I graduate school．
A．to find；from B．finding；from
C．to find；at D．finding；at
( )9．— Peter，would you like to go to the cinema with me? —
A．Yes，I would B．No．I wouldn’t
C．Yes，I’d love to D．No．I don’t go
( )10．—Jim!Let’s go to school at once．We’ll be late． — ．we still have 20 minutes left．
A．No problem B．Not hurry C．Take it easy D．That’s all right
二、语篇填空
一群学生在网络论坛讨论各自的梦想，请根据所给中文意思拼写单词，使他们的留言完整、正确、通顺。每空限填一词。
Subject：Dream
Grace
My dream is to travel to Paris．It is one of the(1) (充满活力的)cities in Europe．It has many fantastic(2) (名胜)，(3) (包括)the Eiffel Tower and Notre Dame Cathedral．How l wish I could have my wedding in such a(4) (教堂)!
Dave
As a boy，I want to(5) (航行)across the Pacific，although it is reported that many people have died from it．My parents said they wouldn’t(6) (提供)me with enough money．
Ann
As for me，I would like to have a(7) (宁静的)life．Maybe the countryside is my best(8) (选择)．
Peter
I’d like to trek(9) (穿过)the jungle because I like(10) (累人的)vacations．I want to go trekking in the Amazon jungle in Brazil．
三、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．The big earthquake made nearly l0，000 people (home)．
2．He spends every Sunday morning (wrork)in his uncle’s shop．
3．The box is (fill)with pens．
4．You look tired．Why not (have)a rest?
5．My cousin hopes to continue (study)in Canada after finishing college in China．
6．Don’t waste food．You know there are many (hunger)people in the world．
7．I love places where the people are really (friend)．
8．Huangshan is too (tour)．
9．We can’t put off (make)a plan．
10． (shut)the door after you go out．
四、用方框内所给短语的适当形式填空
clean up，cheer up，give out，put off，set up
1．My father his own company in 2000．
2．We should our classroom now．It’s too dirty．
3．He has lots of work to do，so he has to going to the cinema．
4．When Mr．Wang told us this good news，all of us
5．Could you help me these new books?
五、单句改错
( )1．My old clothes are too small for me and I decide．To give away them to charity
A B C D
( )2．Lily looks after her father．They’re both outgoing and a little clever．
A B C D
( )3．Working for a long time is tired．
A B C D
( )4．There are many fantastic places in Beijing，except the Summer Palace，etc．
A B C D
( )5．Let’s do something to help stop hungry．
A B C D
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·十堰)
The teacher stood before his class and was going to hand out the final exam papers．“I know how l you have all worked to prepare for this test，”he said．“And because I know you can do it well，I am willing to offer a B to anyone who would 2 not to take the test．’’
Many students jumped up to 3 the teacher and left the classroom．The teacher looked at the 4 students and said，“Does anyone else want to get a B?This is your last 5 ．”Two more students decided to go．
Seven students remained．The teacher then handed out the 6 ．There were only three sentences typed on the paper：Congratulations!You have j ust 7 an A in this class．Keep believing in yourself．
I never had a teacher like that．but I think it is a Test 8 any teacher could and should give．Students who are not 9 in what they have learned are B students at best(充其量)．
The same is 10 in reallife．The A students are those who believe in what they are doing because they have 11 both successes and failures．They have learned life’s lessons。either from formal education 12 from events in their lives。and have become 13 people．
Scientists say that by the age of eight，80％of what we believe about ourselves has already been formed．You are a big kid now，and you l4 that you have some limits(限制)．However，there is l5 you can’t do or learn or be．Sir Edmund Hillary，the first person to reach the summit of Mount Everest said，“It’s not the mountain we conquer(克服)but ourselves．’’
( )1．A．1uckily B．terribly C．quietly D．hard
( )2．A．dislike B．help C．prefer D．start
( )3．A．thank B．praise C．fight D．criticize
( )4．A．following B．relaxing C．worrying D．remaining
( )5．A．chance B．trouble C．test D．idea
( )6．A．results B．presents C．papers D．essays
( )7．A．given B．sent C．discovered D．received
( )8．A．where B．that C．what D．when
( )9．A．confident B．necessary C．mysterious D．convenient
( )10．A．unusual B．impossible C．true D．special
( )11．A．broken off B．dreamed of C．1earned from D．cared about
( )12．A．and B．or C．but D．so
( )13．A．ruder B．cuter C．worse D．better
( )14．A．decide B．forget C．realize D．imagine
( )1 5．A．something B．anything C．everything D．nothing
二、阅读理解(2011·南京)
Need to know
In England
Travelling Season
High season
(Jun—Aug)
★Weather at its best．
★Prices at their Highest
(especially for August
school holidays)．
★Roads busy，especially in seaside areas，national
parks and popular cities．
Shoulder
(Easter to end May，mid-Sep to end Oct)
★Crowds reduce．Prices drop．
★Weather often good；sun mixes with sudden rain March to May．
Low Seasob
(Dec--Feb)
★Wet and coldis the nonTl． Snow falls in mountain areas．
★Opening hours reduced October to Easter； some places shut for the winter．
England on Shoestring
If you’re a shoestring traveller，there’s no getting around itEngland isn’t cheap．Public transport，restaurants and hotel rooms all tend(稳向)to be expensive compared to many other European countries．But you can save money by staying in B&Bs instead of hotels，or hostels instead of B&Bs．You can also save considerably，by Drebooking long-distance travel by coach or train—and by avoiding(避开)the times when everyone else is on the move(such as Friday afternoon)．Many attractions are free or offer discounts on quiet days(eg．Mondays)．
Arriving in England
★Heathrow Airport
Train to Paddington Station every l5 minutes
★Gatwick Airport
Train to Victoria Station every 15 minutes
★Ear,tar trains from Paris or Brussels
Arrive at St Paneras International Station is central London
★Buses from Europe
Arrive at London Victioria Coach Station
Websites
★Enjoy England
(www．enjoyengland．corn)Official tourism website．
★National Traveline
(www. traveline． org． uk)Great portal site for all public transport around England．
★Lonely Planet
(10nelyplanet．com)Destination information，hotel bookings，traveller forums and more．
★Seize the Days
(10nelyplanet．com／132days) Weekly updates on UK activities and events．
( )1．Why do some tourists go to England for travelling between June and August?
A．Weather is at its best． B．Wet is the norm．
C．Prices drop a lot． D．There are fewer travellers．
( )2．What does“England on Shoestring”mean in the text?
A．The map of England looks like a pair of shoes．
B．You can visit England without spending much money．
C．It's necessary to wear a pair of shoes with strings in England．
D．All the attractions in England are free fbr a shoestring traveller．
( )3．Which station will you arrive at if you take an Eurostar train from Paris according to the
text?
A．Paddington Station． B．Victoria Station．
C．St．Pancras International Station． D．LonSon Victoria Coach Station．
( )4．Which of the following websites can help you if you want to watch a football match between Manchester United and Liverpool this weekend?
A．www．traveline．org．uk B．lonelyplanet．com
C．www．enjoyengland．com D．10nelyplanet．com／132days
( )5．What do you think this text is?
A．A tour guide． B．A map of England．
C．A flight timetable． D．An introduction of England．
三、任务型阅读(2011·十堰)
阅读短文，根据其内容，完成下列任务。
There is no way that you cannot have any embarrassing moments．You cannot control everything that happens,so you，re going to be in an embarrassing situation one day．So how can you solve this problem?The answer is to control your actions and try not to get upset．
◆Remember that you’ll probably laugh about it in a few days，so try to see the funny side of it right away．
◆If it is something so embarrassing that you feel you will never laugh about it，please remember that the (1) will be over after some time．
◆Ask your friends to give you a break and not to make fun of you．If you’ve done the same for them，they’re more likely to agree to give you a break．
Always remember that you are not alone．Everyone has embarrassing moments．While you are sure that everyone is going to remember this moment forever，the fact is that they’ll probably forget it very soon,Most of us remember the moments in which we feel embarrassed，but very few of us remember other people’s embarrassing moments．
Most people have short memories．So while you may never forget the moment when your skirt was torn(撕裂)in gym class，most of the other people probably forget it at once．Although a short memory may not be a(n) (2) thing when you are trying to remember facts in a history test，it is useful when you are trying to forget life’s most embarrassing moments．
任务一：请根据短文内容，分别写出(1)、(2)两处所缺单词。(每空限填一词)
1．(1) (2)
任务二：请根据短文内容，选择正确的答案。
( )2．It can be inferred(推断)from the passage that when you fall down after making a speech．
A．everyone will remember the moment forever
B．you may never forget the moment
C．other people will feel embarrassed
D．you will not remember the moment
任务三：请把上文中画线的句子翻译成汉语。
3．
任务四：请根据短文内容，回答下列问题。
4．According to the passage，why does the writer say“you are not alone”?
5．What’s the main idea of the passage?It’s mainly about how to when you are embarrassed．
四、句子翻译
1．有梦想很重要，所以，坚持你的梦想；将来有一天，它们可能会成为现实。(hold on to，come true)
2．她不仅聪明，而且心地善良。(not only．．．but also．．．)
3．许多孩子因贫困而上不起学。(too…to…)
4．我有一些有趣的事情要告诉你。(something interesting)
5．我们应该做一些力所能及的事去帮助他们，比如捐书。(as much as possible，give away)
五、书面表达(2011·南京)
假如你是李平，准备参加学校组织的英语征文比赛。请根据下面所提供的信息，介绍今天在你校操场举行的“ONE for ONE”图书义卖活动的情况并谈谈你的
感受。
注意：1．文中不得出现你的真实姓名和学校名称。
2．语言通顺，意思连贯，书写规范。
3．词数80左右，文章的开头已经给出，不计入总词数。
This afternoon a charity sale was held on the playground in our school ．
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 CACBD
【同步训练19】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 ABBCC 6—10CCACC
二、1．liveliest 2．sights 3．including 4．church 5．sail 6．provide 7．peaceful 8．choice 9．Through l0．tiring
三、1．homeless 2．working 3．filled 4．have 5．studying 6．hungry 7．friendly 8．touristy 9．making 10．Shut
四、1．set up 2．clean up，3．put off 4．cheered up 5．give out
五、1．D，them away 2．A，takes after 3．D，tiring 4．D，including 5．D，hunger
[能力提升]
一、1—5 DCADA 6—10 CDBAC 11—15 CBDCD
二、1—5 ABCDA
三、1．(1)pain／trouble／matter／thing／problem／situation／embarrassment (2)good／helpful／useful／great 2．B 3．你无法控制所发生的一切，总有一天你会遇到令你尴尬的情形。4．Because everyone has embarrassing moments． 5．control your actions and try not to get upset／deal with embarrassing situations(moments)
四、1．It’s very important to dream，so hold on to your dreams；one day they may just come true．
2．She is not only clever，but also kind．
3．A lot of children are too poor to go to school．
4．I have something interesting to tell you．
5．We should do as much as possible to help them，for example，giving away books．
五、One possible version：
This afternoon a charity sale was held on the playground in our school．Its purpose was to donate books to children in poor areas．If you bought one book，you gave a new one to a child in need at the same time．All the teachers and students took an active part in this event．Everyone looked quite happy．
As we know，books are bridges to knowledge．If a child in poor areas can receive a better education and get more knowledge，he will have more chances of success．In this way，his life can be greatly improved．
第一章 教材复习
第1讲 七年级(上)Units l一6
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．one(num．) →first(adj．)第一的
2．family(n．) →families(pl．)家庭
3．tomato →tomatoes(pl．)西红柿 potato →poiatoes(pl．)土豆
4．heahh(n．)健康→healthy(adj．)健康→heahhi → ly(adv．)健康地
5．interesting(adj．)有趣的→fun(adj．同义词) →boring(adj．反义词)枯燥的
【重点短语】
1．in English用英语 2．excuse me请原谅，对不起
3．first name名字 4．family／last name姓氏
5．telephone number电话号码 6．ID card身份证
7．call sb．at(telephone number) 以(电话号码) ……打电话给某人
8．lost and found失物招领 9．a set of一副，一套
10．a picture(photo)of my family=my family photo一张我家的全家照
11．under the table在桌子下面 12．on the sofa在沙发上
13．in the backpack在双肩背包里 14．thanks for为……而感谢
15．bring…to… 把某物带来某地 16．take…to… 把某物带到某地
17．play basketball打篮球 18．swimming club游泳俱乐部
19．watch TV看电视 20．play sports做运动
21．play computer games玩电脑游戏 22．sports collectton 运动收藏品
23．lots of许多 24．heahhy food健康食品 25．1ike(doing)sth． 喜欢干某事
26．have breakfast／lunch／supper吃早／中饭／晚饭 27．have…for breakfast早餐吃……
【重点句型】
1．Nice to meet you! 见到你很高兴！
2．－How are you? 你好吗? －I’m fine，thanks． 我很好，谢谢。
3．－Is this／that your pencil? 这／那是你的铅笔吗?
－Yes, it is．It's my pencil．／No，it isn’t．It’s his pencil．
是的，它是我的铅笔。／不，它不是我的铅笔，是他的。
4．－what’s this in English? 这用英语怎么说? －It’s a／an…它是……
5．－What’s your name? 你叫什么名字? －My name is…我叫……
6．How do you spell…? 你怎样拼写……?
7．This／That is… 这／那位(个)是…… These／Those are… 这些／那些是……
8．－Where is／are… 某人(物)在哪里? －It’s／They are… 它／他们在……
9．－Let’s play soccer． 我们踢足球吧。 －That sounds good． 那听起来很好。
10．Please take…to… 请把……带给……
11．Can you bring…to… 你能把……带来给……吗?
12．Here is my room． 这是我的房间。
13．－Do you have a／an．．．? 你有……吗?
－Yes，I do．／No，I don’t． 是的，我有。／不，我没有。
14．－Does he／she have a／an．．．? 他／她有……吗?
－Yes，he／she does．／No，he／she doesn’t． 是的，他／她有。／不，他／她没有。
15．－Do you like…? 你喜欢……吗?
－Yes，I do．／No，I don’t． 是的，我喜欢。／不，我不喜欢。
16．Let’s have ice cream． 我们吃冰淇淋吧。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．Healthy adj．健康的
(1)healthy是形容词，常与keep连用。如：You should look after yourself and keep healthy．
你应该照顾好你自己并保持健康。
(2)healthy的名词为health，意为“健康”。如：Eating more vegetables is good for health．
多吃蔬菜对健康有益。
(3)healthy的反义词为unhealthy，意为“不健康的”，该单词是在healthy前加上否定前缀un构成的，类似的结构还有：happy→unhappy fair→unfair comfortable→uncomfortable Don’t eat too much fast food，it is unhealthv．不要吃太多的快餐，那样不健康。
活学活用
The more regularly we eat，the we are．
A．healthy B．healthier C．healthiest
解析：本题考查形容词的比较级。“the+比较级，the+比较级”意为“越……，就越……”，heahhy的比较级形式为healthier.
答案：B
2．orange n．橘子，橘子汁adj．橙色的
(1)橘子(可数名词) Can you give me an orange?你能给我一个橘子吗?
(2)橘子汁(不可数名词) He wants to buy a bottle of orange．他想买瓶橘子汁。
(3)橙色的(形容词) My bike is orange．我的自行车是橙色的。
活学活用
An is ；it's true．
A．orange；red B．red：orange C．orange；orange D．apple；apple
解析：生活常识题。橘子是橙色的，故选C，其他选项不合乎逻辑。
答案：C
3．family，n．家，家庭，家庭成员family为集体名词，作主语时，根据意义不同，其谓语动词形式不同。强调整体，指“家，家庭”时，谓语动词用单数，强调个人，指“家庭成员”时，谓语动词用复数形式。如：
My family is a big one． 我家是个大家庭。
Look!His family are having breakfast． 看!他全家正在吃早饭。
活学活用
Fred’s family very large and now the family having dinner．
A．are；is B．is；is C．are；are D．is；are
解析：若family强调的是“家里的每个人”，谓语用复数；如果指“一个家庭”，则谓语用单数，由句意知，第一个family指“家庭”，第二个family指‘‘家人”。
答案：D
【重点句型】
Where are you from?你来自哪里?
Where+be+主语+from?表示询问某人来自哪里，这是询问居住地和国籍的句型，其中from是介词，表示“来自于……”。如：
－Where’s your friend from?你的朋友来自哪里?
－He’s from Shanghai．他来自上海。
(2) Where+be+主语?是人们询问地点时经常用到的句型，回答时常用到的句型是It is／They are+介词短语(表示地点的词)。如：
－Where is the library?图书馆在什么地方?
－It is in front of the science labs．它在实验室前面。
适时点津
be from+地点=come from+地点
He is from China．=He comes from China．
活学活用
I had a phone call last night．It was my uncle．
A in B．on C．at D．from
解析：本题意在考查介词的用法。“来自于……”应用from，故选D。
答案：D
【巧辨异同】
take与bring在作“带，拿”之意义时的区别。take表示把人或物从说话者的地方带到别的地方去。如：Please take this book to the library．请把这本书带到图书馆去。bring表示把人或物从别处带到说话者所在的地方来。如：
Can you bring your cousin to school with you tomorrow?
明天你能带你的表弟一起来学校吗?
活学活用
－Hello，Mum．This is Cindy at school．Would you please ask Bill to (take／bring)my glasses forme?
－OK．Please don’t worry．
解析：本题根据句意，是要求把眼镜带给说话者，故填bring。
答案：bring
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·河源)Miss Liu wants to lose weight．She just has cup of milk for
breakfast every day．
A．a；the B．a；不填 C．the；a D．the；不填
解析：milk是不可数名词，表示一杯用a cup of。早餐吃什么用have…for breakfast，固定搭配。
答案：B
真题2(2011·湘潭) －Can you cook by ? －Yes，I can cook well．
A． you B．yours C．yourself
解析：本题考查代词的用法。by yourself表示“单独地，独自地”。根据句意：－你能独自烹饪吗? －是的，我能做得很好。故本题选C。
答案：C
真题3 (2011·广安) －Are there any in the picture? －Yes。there are．
A．fish B． pork C．beef
解析：本题考查名词。选项B与C都是不可数名词，be动词用单数；fish表示鱼的数量时，单数和复数同形。
答案：A
真题4 (2011·安顺)The new kind of car is dear，I don’t have money．
A．too much；much too B．much t00；too much
C．too much：too much D．much t00；much too
解析：本题考查词义辨析。too much后面接不可数名词；much too后面接形容词。根据句意，dear意为“昂贵的”是形容词，money是不可数名词。
答案：B
真题4 (2011·雅安)－ －I’m fine．Thank you．
A．How are you? B．How old are you?
C．How do you do? D．What’s your name?
解析：本题考查交际用语。根据答语：我很好，谢谢。可知提问：How are you?你好吗?
答案：A
真题5 (2011·南充)Can you tell me ?
A．where are you from B．where you are from C．where do you come from
解析：本题考查宾语从句。宾语从句应该用陈述语序，故排除选项A和C。
答案：B
名师预测
( )1．－Look!What’s in the sky? －It looks like a kite．
A．this B．that C．those
( )2．－Is Miss White English teacher．Maria? －No，she teaches geography．
A．your；my B．you；mine C．you；us D．your；us
( )3．－ is the baseball,Dad? －Is it under the bed?
A．What color B．How C．Whose D．Where
( )4．－ Mary five baseballs? －Yes，she does．
A．Does；has B．Does；have C．Do；has D．Do；have
( )5．－ ，Mr Wang．Can you passthe dictionary to me，please? －Certainly．
A．I’m sorry B．Pardon C．Thank you D．Excuse me
同步训练l七年级(上)Units l—6
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．— ，is this your backpack? —No，it isn’t．
A．Sorry． B．Hello． C．Excuse me． D．How are you?
( )2．—What’s your ? —Please call me at 289—9176．
A．ID number B．phone number C．address D．e-reall address
( )3．Jack has uncle and aunt．They are in London
A．a；a B．an；an C a：an D．an；a
( )4．I don’t know where Shanghai is．I a map．
A．need B．bring C．take D．know
( )5．—Let’s play volleyball．—That sounds ．I don’t like it．
A．fun B．relaxing C．boring D．interesting
( )6．— is that man? —He’s my teacher．
A．What B．Who C．How D．Where
( )7．—Is that Jack’s ruler?—I think so． ruler is white．
A．My B．Your C．Her D．His
( )8．I like sports and I need water every day．
A．a lot B．lots of C．many D．any
( )9．—Do you like watching TV? —Yes。I ．But only after I finish my homework．
A．am B．do C．does D．did
( )10．—Sorry，Frank．I’m busy today．I can’t go swimming with you．—
A．No problem B．You’re welcome C．That’s all D．Never mind
二、语篇填空’
根据短文内容和所给汉语提示，写出短文空白处各单词的正确形式，每空限填一词。
I am Becky．I am(1) (大)and my brother is l2．There are(2) (四)people in my family．They are my(3) (父母亲)，my brother and I．
We both like sports．I like(4) (踢)soccer but my brother(5) (不)．He thinks it’s too(6) (难的)．He gets up early and(7) (跑)for about an hour(8)
(每)morning．
I like fruits and vegetables．I often eat(9) (苹果)and broccoli．My brother likes eating meat．His favorite meat is(10) (鸡肉)．
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·北海)
Dean Bluey is a l 4-year-old boy from the USA．He became a hero after he saved(救)the life of a girl in another country．
One day，he l an e-mail to a friend on the Internet．To his surprise，he received a message，saying“Help!Pain!Help!”“The 2 was from Finland(芬兰)，thousands of kilometers away from America．Later Dean said to a reporter．“I didn’t know 3 I should do．It was really difficult to tell if the message was real．”So Dean did nothing at first． 4 the message kept coming．Now it was easy to see that someone was in trouble．He 5 and found that the sender was a student called Tarja． 6 was ill，alone in a university library．What was 7 ，there was no phone around her．Her only way of communicating with the world was by email．Dean telephoned the 8 immediately．And they realized that the situation was quite serious．They called the police in Finland．Then an ambulance(救护车)rushed to the library． 9 ，she was still alive and was sent to the hospital quickly．
‘‘I’m glad she’s OK，”Dean said．“It’s hard to believe，but 10 saved her life．”
( )1．A．brought B．lent C．sent D．bought
( )2．A．speech B．message C．music D．telephone
( )3．A．how B．what C．where D．when
( )4．A．So B．And C．But D．Or
( )5．A．replied B．ran C．walked D．played
( )6．A．He B．She C．It D．I
( )7．A．worse B．better C．harder D．easier
( )8．A．teacher B．friend C．doctor D．police
( )9．A．Badly B．Hardly C．Luckily D．Carefully
( )10．A．fax B．better C．flight D．e-mail
二、阅读理解(2011·河源)
Emma and Hannah are l3-year-old school girls from Minnesota，USA．They are good at making new things and both of them are also good at sales．They are selling charms(小装饰物)made out of bottle caps．
The girls came up with the idea last summer when they saw charms were popular with kids．
They talked with their parents about the idea．Since then they have sold enough charfns to buy a bike for Hannah．
The girls collect bottle caps and then clean them．They find some interesting pictures on the Internet or on paper，and then glue them onto the inside of the caps．There are different kinds of pictures，“Peace signs are popular with girls，and single-letter charms are popular with boys whose names start with those letters。”Emma and Hannah said．
Now，charms can be found everywhere at Dakota Hills Middle School in Eagan．“Students put charms on purses，backpacks，and their lunchboxes，”said Emma．Emma and Hannah also have a shop on the Internet．They hope they can sell their charms to more kids．They’re thinking about selling their charms at the Eagan Market Festival next summer．
Their business is not only for getting money．At their Valentine’s sale，20％of the income(收入)went to charity．
( )1．What are Emma and Hannah?
A．They’re waiters． B．They’re sellers．
C．They’re students． D．They’re charm makers．
( )2．When did the girls begin to sell the charms?
A．About a year ago． B．About two months ago．
C．Nearly fifty days ago． D．Nearly five weeks ago．
( )3．Which of the following may NOT be on the charms?
A．Pictures． B．Signs． C．Letters． D．Numbers．
( )4．What do Emma and Hannah hope to do now?
A．They hope to become rich people． B．They hope to give money to charity．
C．They hope to sell more charms． D．They hope to sell charms in every school．
( )5．Which of th following is TRUE?
A．The two girls love their parents and money B．Boys like charms with signs．
C．They won’t sell charms next summer． D．The charms are popular with students．
三、书面表达
请根据所给信息，以“My Favorite Activity”为题，用6～9句话描述你喜欢的户外活动。
要求：(1)必须回答以下问题：
What is your favorite activity?
Why do you like it?
What other activities do you often do?
(2)思路清晰，表达连贯，符合逻辑。
My Favorite Activity
答案
【名师预测】
1--5 BDDBD
【同步训练1】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 CBBAC 6—10 BDBBD
二、1．old 2．Four 3．Parents 4．Playing 5．doesn’t 6．Difficult 7．Runs 8．every 9．apples 10．chicken
三、l．watch 2．tomatoes 3．take 4．Thanks 5．healthy
[能力提升]
一、1—5 CBBCA 6—10 BADCD
二、1—5 CADCD
三、one possible version：
My Favorite Activity
My favorite activity is playing basketball．I started playing when l was in primary school．I began playing it because all the other boys in my neighborhood enjoyed it．
Now I play basketball twice a week．It is goodfor both my health and my study．It helps keep my weight down．It is also a good way to relax after a day’s school．I really love playing basketball．
第20讲九年级Units 9—10
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．invent(u)发明→inventor(玩)发明家invention(n．)发明物
2．salty(adj．)咸的；含盐的→salt(n．)盐
3．pleasant(adj．)令人愉快的→pleasure(n．)愉快→pleased(adj．)高兴的；满意的
4．embarrassed(adj．)尴尬的→embarrassing(adj．)令人尴尬的→embarrass(饥)使尴尬，使窘迫→embarrassment(挖．)尴尬
5．develop(v．)发展；成长→development(n．)发展
6．popularity(n．)普及；流行→popular(adj．)受欢迎的；流行的
7．break(v．)打破；打碎→broken(adj．)破的
8．farmer(n．)农民→farm(n．)农场
9．annoying(adj．)使恼怒的，使生气的→annoy(v．)使烦恼，使生气→annoyed(adj．)恼怒的，生气的
【重点短语】
1．be used for… 用来做…… 2．be invented by被(某人)发明
3．make the customer happy使顾客开心 4．fall into落人，陷入
5．fall down摔倒6．knock into与……相撞 7．divide…into… 把……分成……
8．annoying invention令人烦恼的发明 9．the most helpful invention最有益的发明
10．a pleasant smell令人愉快的气味 11．the number of……的数量
12．by mistake错误地 13．in the end最后，终于 14．by accident偶然地，意外地
15．in this way这样 16．according to根据，按照
17．not…until…直到……才 18．by the time… 到……之前
19．go off发出响声 20．run off跑掉 21．on time准时
22．wake up醒来23．stay up熬夜 24．so…that… 如此……以致……
25．give sb．a ride让某人搭便车 26．break down出故障；停止运转
27．get dressed穿衣服 28．show up出席；露面
29．happen to sb． 发生在某人身上 30．on April Fool’s Day在愚人节
31．set off激起，引起 32．flee from逃离 33．stop doing sth． 停止做某事
34．get married结婚 35．come by走过；经过 36．as much as one can尽可能多地
37．sell out卖光；售完 38．thousands of成千上万的
39．take a shower洗澡，淋浴 40．get in the shower进淋浴间
41．go into the bathroom进入浴室 42．leave sth．at home把某物忘在家里
43．be late for迟到
【重点句型】
1．－ when was the telephone invented?电话是什么时候发明的?－It was invented in l876．它是在1876年发明的。
2．－Who were they invented by?它们是谁发明的? －They were invented by Julie Thompson．它们是朱莉·汤普森发明的。
3．－What are they used for?它们用于做什么?－They are used for seeing in the dark．它们是用
来在黑暗中照明的。
4．What do you think is the most helpful invention?你认为最有益的发明是什么?
5．It’s good／difficuh to be a basketball player because…成为一名篮球运动员有好处／难处是因为……
6．By the time I got up，my brother had already got into the shower．到我起床的时候，我哥哥已经在洗澡了。
7．When she got to school，she realized she had left her backpack at home．当她到达学校时，她意识到她把背包忘在家中了。
8．I only just made it to my class．我恰好到达教室。
9．Have you ever overslept?你曾睡过头吗?
10．What happened to Dave on April Fool’s Day?在愚人节戴夫发生了什么事?
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
be used for被用来做……
表示用途或目的，for为介词，后加名词或动名词，即be used for sth．／doing sth．=be used to do sth．。如：
They are used for energy of the machines．它们被用来作这些机器的能源。
It is used for cleaning the classroom．=It is used to clean the classroom．它是用来打扫教室的。
适时点津
用use组成的词组还有：
be used to(doing)…习惯于(做)…… be used as…把……用作…… used to do sth．过去常常做某事use…to do…用……做……
活学活用
(2011·广元)English more and more widely(广泛)today．So we must learn it well．
A．uses B．used C．is used
解析：本题考查动词语态。句意：今天英语越来越被广泛地应用。由句意可知要用一般现在时被动语态，其构成：is／am／are+动词过去分词。
答案：C
2．invent n意为“发明”，即制作或发现以前从未存在过的东西。
(1)invention是名词，意为“发明”；inventor是名 词，意为“发明者”。如：
The abacus was invented in the sixth century by the Chinese．算盘是在六世纪时被中国人发明的。
(2)动词discover，意为“发现”，即发现原来早已存在但人们还不知道的东西，如“新大陆，科学规律”等。如：
This was what she set out to discover．这就是 她着手去发现的东西。
活学活用
(2011·山东) －The new treatments by Norman Bethune helped a number of sodiers．
A．invent B．invents C．inventing D．invented
解析：根据句子结构，invented作treatments的后置定语，意为“被发明的”，故选D。
答案：D
3．go off发出响声
My alarm clock goes off at six every morning．我的闹钟每天早晨六点响。
适时点津
由go构成的其他常用短语：
go out熄灭；出去 go away离开；消失 go up上升；增加 go down倒下；下沉
go through通过；达成 go on继续；发生 go over仔细检查 go by(时间)过去
活学活用
－Why were you late for school yesterday? －Because my alarm o’clock
A．went off B．didn’t go off C．ran off D．didn7t run off
解析：词组go off意为“发出响声”，run off意为“跑开”，句意“闹钟没有响，故上学迟到。”故选B。
答案：B
4．Marry v ．嫁：娶
(1)一般用作及物动词，其后必须接宾语。如：Jenny married me yesterday．昨天詹妮和我结婚了。
(2)marry．．．to…意为“把．．．嫁给．．．。如：The old man wants to marry his daughter to a rich man．那位老人想把他女儿嫁给一个有钱人。
(3)marry是瞬间动词，通常不与表示一段时间的状语连用，因此，在询问或表示某人结婚多长时间时，要用“be married”表示状态。如；How long have you been married?你们结婚多久了?
(4)be／get married意为“完婚；结婚”，常表示一种婚姻状态；he／get married to意为“与．．．结婚”，此时该短语可与marry sb．互换。如： When did she get married?她是什么时候结婚的?
He married a famous writer．=He was married to a famous writer．他娶了一位著名作家。
活学活用
(2011·淮安)British Prince William(威廉王子)and Kate for nearly two months．
A．married B．have married C．have been married D．have got married
解析：本题考查动词marry的用法，be married意为“完婚；结婚”，常表示一种婚姻状态，根据持续性时间for nearly two months可知此处选C。
答案：C
【重点句型】
1．who were they invented by?它们由谁发明的?
－They were invented by Julie Thompson．它们是由朱莉·汤普森发明的。
在被动语态中经常出现“be+过去分词+by”结构。介词by后接名词或代词宾语，表示动作的发出者。如：Children are taken good care of by teachers at school．孩子们在学校受到老师们很好的照顾。
适时点津
把被动语态变为主动语态时，介词by后面的名词或代词用作主动语态的主语。
活学活用
(2011·武汉) －Who is the little girl in the picture? －It’s me．The picture lo years ago．
A ．took B．is taken C．has taken D．was taken
解析：本题考查语态，主语the picture与动作take是被动关系，时态是过去时，故选D。
答案：D
2．Although tea wash’t brought to the Western world until l610，this beverage was discovered over three thousand years before that．尽管茶直到1610年才被带到西方国家。但是这种饮料在那之前3000年就已被发现了。not…until／till意为“直到……才”，通常与非延续性动词连用，强调主语所表示的状态或情景从until／till所表示的时间才发生，主句必须是否定句。如：
He didn’t go home until ten o’clock．他直到l0点钟才回家。
I hadn’t realized the thing was so serious until she told me about it．一Until she told me about it，I hadn't realized the thing was so serious．直到她告诉我，我才意识到这件事那么严重。
适时点津
until引导的状语从句可以放在句首，但till引导的状语从句则不能。
活学活用
(2011·广元)I told him the news he came hack yesterday．
A．until B．as soon as C．unless
解析：本题考查词义辨析。until“直到……时，在……以前”，引导时间状语从句；as soon as“一……就……”，引导时间状语从句；unless“除非”，引导条件状语从句。句意：昨天他一回来，我就把这个消息告诉了他。
答案：B
3．By the time I got outside，the bus had already left．当我出来时。公交车已开走了。
by在此表示时间，意为“到……为止；在……之前”，相当于not／no later than(a time)。by thetime意为“到：……之前；到……的时候”，引导时间状语从句，常与过去完成时连用。如：
When he got to the cinema，the film had begun．当他到达电影院时，电影已经开始了。
By the time the police arrived，the thieves had run away．当警察到时，小偷已经跑了。
适时点津
当by后面所跟的是一个将来时间时，应该与一般将来时连用。如：
By 2012 this factory will double its output．到2012 年，这个工厂的产量将增长一倍。
活学活用
the end of last year，he had learned English for three years．
A．By B．At C．In D．to
解析：本题考查by的用法，意为“在……之前”，时态为过去完成时。
答案：A
4．When I got to school，I realized I had left my back- pack at home．当我到达学校时。才发现把背包落在家里了。
(1)本句是一个含有when(一by the time)引导的时间状语从句的复合句。主句中的I had left my backpack at home是动词realized所带的由that引导的宾语从句。由于主句谓语动词是一般过去时态，而宾语从句中的谓语“落下”这个动作是在主句动词“发现”之前就已经完成了的动作，即“过去的过去”，因此，宾语从句用的是过去完成时态。如：
The work had been just finished when．they got here．他们来到时这项工作正好结束。
(2)leave sth．in／at／on sp．意为“把某物忘在某处(地)”。如：
He left his umbrella in the train．他把伞忘在火车上了。
适时点津
不能说forget sth．in／at／on sp．，因为forget仅仅是说忘了，不强调地方。
活学活用
When Tony to the classroom this morning，we our math class．
A．got：finished B．got；had finished
C．had gotten；finished D．had gotten；had finished
解析：本题为when引导的时间状语从句的复合句，主句为过去完成时，“当Tony到班级时，我们已经结束数学课了”。
答案：B
5．Welles was so convincing that hundreds of people believed the story。and panic set off across the whole country．韦尔斯非常有说服力。使成百上千的人相信这件事情。恐慌在全国蔓延了。
(1)so…that…意为“如此……以致于”，引导结果状语从句，so后接形容词或副词原级。常用于下列结构中：
如：
I’ve got so many falls that I’m black and blue all over．我跌了好多跤，浑身青一块紫一块的。It is so interesting a book that I read it again这本书如此有趣以致于我又读了一遍。
(2)set off是固定短语，意为“激起；引起”。如：Martin，S speech set off a wave of anger．马丁的演讲激起了愤怒的浪潮。
适时点津
(1)such．．．that…也表示“如此……以致于……”，但such修饰名词，常用于下列结构中：
活学活用
He is such a little boy that I can’t believe him．他是如此小的一个男孩，以致于我不能相信他。
They are such fine teachers that we all hold them in great respect．他们是非常好的老师，我们对他们都极为尊敬。
(2)set off还可表示“动身；启程”。如：
They set off on a sightseeing tour．他们动身去观光旅行。
活学活用
－Jack，you look tired today．What’s wrong? －I was busy I didn’t go to bed until midnight yesterday．
A．too；to B．not only；but also C．so；that D．not；enough
解析：so…that…意为“如此……以致于……”，引导结果状语从句，第二句句意为“我是如此忙以致半夜才睡”。
答案：C
【巧辨异同】
1．by mistake与by．accident
(1)by mistake意为“错误地”。如：
I took her umbrella by mistake last night，because they are the same style．昨晚我错拿了她的雨伞，因为它们的样式一样。
(2)by accident意为“偶然地；意外地”。如：
The idea came to him by accident．很偶然地他想到了这个主意。
适时点津
mistake既可以作名词，也可以作动词，相关的短语有：make a mistake／make mistakes犯错误，mistake sb．for sb．把某人错认作某人。
活学活用
I’m sorry to take your umbrella yesterday，here’s the umbrella．
A．by accident B．by the way C．by guess D．by mistake
解析：by accident意为“偶然地”，by mistake意为“错误地”，by the way“顺便提一下”，本句意为“很抱歉我昨天错拿了雨伞，这是雨伞”。
答案：D
2．sometime-sometimes-some times与some time
(1)sometime意为“某一时候”。如：
My father will leave for Beijing sometime nextweek．我爸爸下周要去北京。
(2)sometimes意为“有时”。如：
She sometimes helps mom do some housework．她有时会帮妈妈干点家务活。
(3)some times意为“几次(倍)”。如：
Though he’s very young。he’s been to Shanghai some times．虽然他很小，但他去过上海好几次。
(4)some time意为“一些时间”。如：
She worked for that company for some time．她在那公司工作了一段时间。
活学活用
(2011·兰州)He said he would come to see us the next afternoon．
A．sometime B．some time C．sometimes D．some times
解析：句意为：他说他明天下午某个时候来看我们。sometime意为“某时”，符合句意。
答案：A
3．pleasant与pleased
(1)pleasant形容词，意为“合意的；令人愉快的；讨人喜欢的”，指事物给人的感受。如：
We spend a very pleasant evening．我们度过了一个非常愉快的夜晚。
He is a pleasant person．他是一个讨人喜欢的人。
(2)pleased意为“愉快的”，指人对某事物韵感受。如：
I am quite pleased with your success．我对你的成功感到非常高兴。
活学活用
－What a smell!I like the dish．－No wonder you look so with it．
(pleased／pleasant)
解析：pleasant修饰smell，指给人合意的香味；pleased修饰you。
答案：pleasant；pleased
4．on time与in time
(1)on time意为“按时；准时”，相当于at exactly the right time。如：
Classes begin on time every day．我们每天按时上课。
(2)in time意为“及时”，相当予with enough time to be able to do sth．。如：
The police got there in time and saved the young boy．警察及时赶到那里救了那个小男孩。
活学活用
(2011·福州)Students should get to school every day．(准时)
解析：根据句意“学生应该每天准时到校”，on time意为“准时”。
答案：on time
5．get dressed。put on与wear
(1)get dressed=be dressed意为“穿衣服”，后不能跟衣服类的词作宾语，但加介词in可以加衣服类或颜色类的词。dress sb．意为“给某人穿衣服”。如：
They get dressed in sports clothes．他们穿着运动服。
The mother is dressing the baby．这位母亲正在给婴儿穿衣服。
(2)put on+服装，意为“穿上”，强调动作。如：
He put on the new clothes and ran out．他穿上新衣服跑了出去。
(3)wear+n艮装，意为“穿着”，强调状态。如：
My sister often wears the red skirt．我妹妹经常穿红色裙子。
活学活用
(2011·兰州)Mary is used to a T-shirt and jeans．
A．wear B．put on C．wearing D．putting on
解析：is used to(doing)意为习惯于做某事，且句意为经常穿着的状态，故答案选C。
答案：C
真题剖析
真题1 (2010·州) －You study Hard you’re sure to pass the exam．－Thank you for saying so．
A．enough；to B．as；as C．so；that
解析：第一句句意为“你学习得那么努力肯定会通过考试”。so…that…意为“如此……以致于……”，符合句意。
答案：C
真题2 (2010·常州) －What did Jack ask you just now? －He wanted to know how long when I reached the cinema．
A．had the film been on B．the film had started
C．the film had lasted D．had the film Pnded
解析：本题考查时态，从句when I reached the cinema已经过去，电影在到达之前已经开始了，且持续性时间how long，不能用start，而A选项语序错误，故答案选C。
答案：C
真题3 (2010·东阳) － the Internet in your school?－Yes，but the computer in our office has broken down．
A．Is；used B．Is；using C．Does；use D．Has；used
解析：Internet被人使用，故用被动语态be used。
答案：A
真题4 (2010·杭州)There are many peopie downstairs．What do you think ?
A．to happen B．happening C．is happened D．has happened
解析：不及物动词happen没有被动语态，do you think为插入语，用于特殊疑问句中时，常用于疑问词之后，故选D。
答案：D
真题5 (2010·湛江) －ZhaNiang is really a beautiful city。isn’t it? －Yes. travelers like to come here for a visit．
A．thousands of B．thousand of
C．thousand D．three thousands
解析：thousands of意为“成千上万”，若有具体的数字，thousand不能加S，故答案选A。
答案：A
名师预测
( )1．His sister fl doctor last week．
A ．married B．married to C．married with D．got married
( )2．Because of the war many people ．their homes．
A ．ran off B．fled from C．set off D．got off
( )3．－ It seems that you had an thing． －Yes．I forgot my classmate’S name when
I met her in the street．
A．embarrassing B．embarrassed C．interested D．interesting
( )4．After seeing the film nP Founding of the Republic acted by Tang Guoqiang and someother famous actors like Jackie Chan，most of people found meaningful to see such fl historical theme film．
A．it B．this C．that D．so
( )5．－Tomorrow we are going to have fl picnic．I hope it will be fine．－
A．I won’t B．I’d love to C．So do I D．You’d better not
同步训练20九年级Units 9—10
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．What happened you just now，Fred?
A for B．at C．to D．in
( )2．一Do you know who paper in the world?一Cai Lun ．
A．invented；did B．invented；was
C．was invented；did D．was invented；was
( )3．I never like eating lemons because they taste too ．
A．crispy B．sweet C．salty D．sour
( )4．Jack went to bed early last night，but his father till twelve o’clock．
A．got up B．stayed up C．looked up D．put up
( )5．一 number of boys come to swim． Do you know number of them?
一Maybe it’s about thirty．
A．A；the B．A；a C．The；the D．The；a
( )6．It that the Whole story was just a hoax
A．believes B．is believing C．is believed D．is to believe
( )7．This month，the workers in the factory have already made bicycles．
A．two hundreds B．hundred of
C．two hundred of D．hundreds of
( )8．You should not lcave for home you finish the work．
A．after B．when C．until D．as
( )9．My bike was broken，SO my father gave me a
A．drive B．ride C．rode D．driving
( )10．一Don’t forget your homework， John．一
一0K，I’ll do it right now．
A doing B．do C．to do D．did
( )11．一It’s going to rain．Let me fetch an umbrella for you． 一Thank you．You are so
A．lucky B．kind C．relaxed D．interesting
( )12．I still remember my first teacher we haven’t seen each other for a long time．
A．if B．until C．though D．because
( )13．Yesterday morning I got up early be late for the exam．
A．in order to B．in order not to C．So as to not D．So as to
( )14．I don’t know if Jack ．If he ，call me.please．
A．will come；will come B．comes；come
C．comes；will come D．will come；comes
( )15．一Will you please go to see the movie Guanyinshan with me?一No。I won’t．I it already．
A．saw B．have seen C．see D．will see
二、语篇填空
Nowadays，in the 21st(1) (世纪)students are bearing overweight of study，and some of them often feel depressed and upset．To(2) (使振奋)them up，taking a trip at times is a good way．We’d better take them somewhere both(3) (放松的)and(4)
(有教育意义的)．Last summar vacation，my whole family went to the southeast of China for a(5)
(令人愉快的)trip．Before the trip，we looked for a lot of(6) (广告)on line．In order to save money，we lived in a hotel which(7) (提供)rooms with a kitchen．So we could cook our own meals to our own(8) (口味)．There my l5-year-old son enjoyed different scenery from that of the East China．And also he learned a lot。for example，some people were still suffering cold and(9) (饥饿)and tea was(10) (发明)by Shen Nong by accident．
三、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．一What are the keys used for?一They’re used for (lock)doors．
2．They got (marry)on May Day．
3．Our trip was (pleased)last night，so we enjoyed ourselves．
4．I didn’t go to see the film yesterday because I (see)it before．
5．It (say)that there was an accident in Chinatown last night．
6．By the end of last year he (1earn)3，000English words．
7．A good teacher is very (help)for us to learn English．
8．If I (give)two more minutes，I will do it better．
9．For me， (take)a trip by train is the most comfortable．
10．He felt (exhaust)after working a whole day．
四、用方框内所给词的适当形式填空
interesting，leaf，salt，build，ancient
1． on trees fall down in autumn．
2．A new library will in our school next year．
3．She put too much salt in it。so it’s too now．
4．Could you tell me any stories?
5．I think Harry Potter is the book of these five．
五、单句改错
( )1．She was too excited that she couldn’t go to sleep．
A B C D
( )2．They were often made work for twelve hours a day by the boss．
A B C D
( )3．It will taste well with a little salt．
A B C D
( )4．The teacher hopes the students come to school in time．
A B C D
( )5．People can play jokes in April Fool’s Day．
A B C D
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2010·陕西)
One day before my final exam，my dad gave me a gift．It completely changed my life．
On that day I had a l with my friends and it was a difficult time with my studies．I was unhappy．Then I noticed the gift．I 2 it and saw a DVD inside．Its name was“THE SECRET”．However，I was in no mood(心情)to watch it．I sat down to study，but the 3 in my life—the fight，the sleepless nights and my poor health…Everything came to my mind．I wanted an answer but I wondered 4 there was any．Just then，I saw the DVD again．Maybe it would be helpful．I 5 my DVD player．I had no words to describe the feelings I experienced while watching it．The moving(动人的)stories of human beings made me so moved that I wouldn’t 6 any of them．
Thanks to my father’s gift“THE SECRET”。I discovered 7 ．Everybody has difficulties in their lives．The important thing is that you should be 8 enough to face them．Now I have started 9 my studies and my friends．And I’m in good health，too．I often hear people say，“Wow I 10 perfect life you have!”
( )1．A．trip B．party C．talk D．fight
( )2．A．opened B．kept C．moved D．broke
( )3．A．chances B．problems C．suggestions D．mistakes
( )4．A．why B．that C．if D．how
( )5．A．turned on B．looked for C．put away D．paid for
( )6．A．report B．forget C．think D．remember
( )7．A．yourself B．itself C．himself D．myself
( )8．A．mad B．brave C．sad D．weak
( )9．A．being busy with B．worrying about C．getting on well with D．being afraid of
( )10．A．What a B．What C．How a D．How
二、阅读理解(2011·桂林)
Being able to multitask--doing several things at the same timris considered(考虑，认为)a welcome skill by most people．But if we consider the situation of the young people aged from eight to eighteen，we should think again．
What we often see nowadays is that young people juggle a larger number of electronic devices(电子产品) as they study．While working；they also surf on the Internet，send out emails，answer the telephone and listen to music on their iPods．In a sense，they are spending a large amount of time in fruitless efforts(努力)as they multitask．
Multitasking is even changing the relationship between family members．As young people give so much attention to their own worlds，they seem to have no time to spend with the other people around them．They can no longer greet family members when they enter the house，nor can they eat at the family table．
Multitasking also has an effect(影响)on young people’s performance at university and in the workplace．When asked about their opinions of the effects of modern gadgets(器具)on their performance of tasks，many young people gave a positive(肯定的)response(回应)．However，the response from the worlds of education and business was not quite as positive．Educators feel that multitasking by children has a serious effect on later development of study skills．They believe
that many college students now need help to improve their study skills．Similarly，employers(雇主)feel that young people entering the job market need to be taught all over again，as modern gadgets have made it unnecessary(没必要)for them to learn special skills to do their work．
( )1．What does the underlined word“juggle”most probably lnean?
A．Want to buy． B．Use at the same time．
C．Take the place of． D．Search information from．
( )2．In Paragraph 3.the author points out that
A．family members do not greet each other
B．family members do not eat at the family table
C．young people get on well with their families
D．young people hardly communicate with their family members
( )3．What’s the main idea of the last paragraph?
A．Young people must learn skills for future jobs．
B．Young people benefit(获益)a lot from modern gadgets．
C．Multitasking is an important skill to young people．
D．Multitasking influences young people’s development seriously．
( )4．Which of the following is TRUE according to the passage?
A．Young people think multitasking is good for their study and work．
B．Employers consider it unnecessary for young people to be taught all over again．
C．Educators feel that young people don’t need to improve their study skills．
D．People from the world of education believe multitasking has a good effect on
children’s later study skills．
( )5．The author develops(阐述)the passage mainly by ．
A．providing special examples
B．following the natural time order
C．giving out a cause and analyzing(分析) its effects
D．comparing opinions from different worlds
三、任务型阅读(2011·哈尔滨)
阅读短文，根据其内容，完成下列任务。
An English dictionary is the most important thing when you learn English．Successful English learners always use their dictionaries in order to learn new words．In this way，they will know how to use a word after reading its English examples．By doing so，they can think in English．A dictionary plays an important part in both your English speaking and your English writing．Recently，e-dictionaries have become more and more popular．There are many advantages in using them．For example，they are easy to carry and quick to use．Also，there are a large number of words with real-voice pronunciations．Whenever you want to know a new word，take an e-dictionary out of your pocket，and then you’ll find a satisfying answer．
1．任务一：根据英文释义及首字母提示，拼写单词。
(1)n a word that shows how many
(2)P liked by many people
2．任务二：同义旬转换，每空一词。
Successful English learners always use their dictionaries in order to learn new words．
Successful English learners always use their dictionaries they can learn new words．
3．任务三：根据短文内容简答问题。
What is the most important thing when we learn English?
四、句子翻译
1．不幸的是，我到达之前，火车已经开走了。(by the time)
2．车在半路上抛锚了。(break down)
3．我认为电灯泡是最有用的发明之一。(one of the most useful)
4．这项运动得到许多人的喜爱。(be enjoyed)
5．当心!不要撞着那个小孩。(knock into)
五、书面表达(2011·威海)
计算机在我们的工作、生活中的作用越来越大，你知道计算机的发源与发展吗?请就计算机的发明时间(1946年)、大小、用途等方面，谈一下它的发展变化，并说明你对未来计算机的畅想。
注意：1．意思连贯，语句通顺。
2．词数不少于80；短文的开头已给出(不计入总词数)。
Computers are becoming more and more important in our daily life．Do you know the history and the changes of computers?
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 ABAAC
【同步训练20】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 CADBA 6—10CDCBC 11—l5 BCBDB
二、1．century 2．cheer 3．relaxing 4．educational 5．pleasant 6．advertisements 7．provided 8．taste 9．hunger l0．invented
三、1．locking 2．married 3．pleasant 4．had seen 5．is said 6．had learned 7．helpful 8．am given 9．taking 10．exhausted
四、1．Leaves 2．be built 3．salty 4．ancient 5．most interesting
五、1．A，so 2．B，to work 3．B，good 4．D，on time 5．C，on
[能力提升]
一、1—5 DABCA 6—10 BDBCA
二、1—5 BDDAC
三、1．(1)number(2)popular 2．so that 3．An English dictionary．
四、1．Unluckily，by the time I arrived，the train had already left． 2．The car broke down on the half way． 3．I think the light bulb is one of the most useful inventions．4．The sport is enjoyed by many people． 5．Look out! Don’t knock into the child．
五、One possible version：
Computers are becoming more and more important in our daily life．Do you know the history and the changes of computers? Computers were invented in l946．The first computer called ENIAC were so large that people didn’t use it at home．It was used by scientists．Later，with the development of computer research，computers have become smaller and smaller．And they are widely used by people all over the world．Most of people work with computers．They also bring great happiness to people．We can relax ourselves by watching movies or listening to music with the help of computers．We can also learn about the world．The world becomes smaller and
smaller．In the future，I imagine holding a computer which is as small as a mobile phone．That’s really cool!
第21讲九年级Units 11—12
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．relaxed(adj．)放松的→relax(n．)放松；休息→relaxing(adj．)有助于休息的；令人放松的
2．polite(adj．)有礼貌的→politely(adv．)有礼貌地；文明地→impolite(adj．反义词)失礼的；粗鲁的→politeness(n．)礼貌
3．close(adj．)接近的→close(饥)关上→closed (adj．)关着的
4．western(n．谚武)西方的→west(n．)西方
5．crowd(v．)挤满；充满→crowded(adj．)拥挤的→ uncrowded(adj．．反义词)不拥挤的；宽敞的
6．organized(adj．)有组织的→organize(n．)组织·organization(n．)组织；机构
7．custom(n．)风俗；习惯→customer(n．)顾客
8．beside(prep．)在…旁边；在…附近→besides(adv．&prep．)此外，以及；除…之外
9．inexpensive(adj．)不昂贵的-*expensive(adj．反义词)昂贵的
10．wonder(v．)觉得奇怪；想知道一wonderful (adj．)精彩的
【重点短语】
1．buy shampoo买洗发水 2．get some magazines买杂志
3．make a telephone call打电话 4．save／exchange money存／兑换钱
5．buy some writing paper买书写纸
6．take the elevator／escalator to… 乘电梯／扶梯到…… 7．turn left／right向左／右转
8．take a vacation度假 9．dress up as clowns打扮成小丑
10．take dance lessons上舞蹈课 11．1end sb．sth．／lend sth．to sb． 把某物借给某人
12．ask for information or help询问信息或求助 13．make requests请求
14．depend on依靠 15．1ead into a question or request导人问题或要求
16．between．．．and．．． 在……和……之间
17．a good place to eat／hang out吃饭／闲逛的好地方
18．the world’s largest water slides世界上最大的水滑道
19．on the other hand在另一方面 20．in some situations在某些场合
21．in order(not)to为了(不)…… 22．table manners餐桌礼仪
23．(not)talk at the table(不要)在饭桌上说话
24．pick up the bowl to eat端起碗吃饭
25．wipe your，mouth with your napkin用餐巾擦嘴
26．(not)make noise while eating．(不要)在吃东西时发出声音
27．(not)stick the chopsticks into your food(不要)把筷子插入食物里
28．(not)point at anyone with your chopsticks(不要)用筷子指向任何人
29．be supposed to do sth． 应该做某事 30．shake hands握手
31．make mistakes犯错误 32．be relaxed about对……随意
33．drop by顺便拜访 34．make plans to do sth． 制订计划做某事
35．get／be angry生气 36．go out of one’s way to do sth．特地(不怕麻烦)做某事
37．make sb．feel at home使某人感到宾至如归
38．be／get used to(doing)sth． 习惯于(做)某事
39．find it difficult to do sth． 发现做某事困难 40．make appointments约会
41．give compliment赞美，恭维 42．make a toast祝酒；敬酒
43．have online conversations with sb． 和某人网上聊天
44．make faces做鬼脸 45．can’t stop doing sth． 禁不住做某事
46．1earn．．．by oneself自学
47．for the first time第一次 48．the wrong way(用)错误的方式
49．on time准时 50．the land of watches手表王国
51．after all毕竟，终究 52．first of all首先 53．written English书面英语
54．in the traditional way用传统的方式 55．at the proper time在适当的时间
【重点句型】
1．Excuse me．Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?打扰一下，你能告诉我洗手间在哪儿吗?
2．Excuse me．Do you know where I can buy some shampoo?打扰一下，你知道我在哪儿能买到洗发水吗?
3．Could you tell me how to get to the post office?你能告诉我怎样到达邮局吗?
4．Can you tell me where there’s a good place to eat?你能告诉我哪儿有吃饭的好地方吗?
5．Could you please tell me if there are any good museums in Newtown?你能告诉我在新镇有没有好的博物馆?
6．Do you know if there are any public restrooms around here?你知道这儿附近有没有公共厕所吗?
7．－What are you supposed to do when you meet someone for the first time?当你第一次遇到某人时，你应该做什么? －You’re supposed to shake hands．你应该握手。
8．－When were you supposed to arrive?你应该什么时候到达? －1 was supposed to arrive at 7：00．我应该在7点钟到。
9．You should have asked what were supposed to wear．你本应该问一问你该穿什么衣服。
10．You aren。’t supposed to make noise while eating．你不应该在吃东西时发出声音。
11．You shouldn't eat or drink while walking down the street．你不应该在沿街走路时边走边吃喝。
12．It's polite／rude to do………是礼貌的／粗鲁的。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．in order to为了……
(1)in order to常在句中作目的状语，其否定形式
为in order not to。如：In order to catch the early bus，I had to get up before 6 o’clock that morning．为了赶上早班车，那天早上我不得不在6点之前起床。
(2)order(n．)，意为“命令，指令”。
(3)order(n．)，意为“顺序，次序”，in the correct order意为“按照正确的顺序”。
(4)order(v．)，意为“点菜；命令，订购”，order sb．to do sth．命令某人做某事。
适时点津
in order that意为“为了……”，in order to后跟动词原形，而in order that后跟从句，相当于sothat。如：
They flew there in order that they might be in time to attend the opening ceremony．他们坐飞机去那里以便能及时参加开幕典礼。
活学活用
In order be late，I had to rush to the bus stop breakfast．
A．to not；with B．not to；with C．to not；without D．not to；without
解析：本题考查in order(not)to表目的，without breakfast意为“来不及吃早餐”。
答案：D
2．trouble
(1)不可数名词，意为“困难，麻烦；困境；动乱，纠纷；毛病，故障”，词组：be in trouble在困境中；get into trouble陷入困境。
(2)不及物动词，意为“费神；费心”。
(3)及物动词，意为“使烦恼，使忧虑”。如：That student sometimes troubles the teacher
with hard questions．那个学生有时候问难答的问题让老师头痛。
适时点津
做某事有困难：have trouble in doing sth．
活学活用
－I have great in learning math and I’m so worried.Could you help me? －Sure．I’d be glad to．
A．trouble B．interest C．joy D．fun
解析：本题考查名词辨析，have great trouble in doing sth．，意为“做某事有困难”。
答案：A
3．prefer n更喜欢
(1)prefer doing sth．，意为“(两者比较)更喜欢…。如：I prefer going to bed earlier．我更喜欢早点睡觉。
(2)prefer A to B，意为“比较A和B，更喜欢A”。如：I prefer jazz to rock music．我喜欢爵士乐胜过摇滚乐。
(3)prefer doing to doing，意为“更喜欢做……而不愿做……”。如：
Jim prefers staying at home to going out．吉姆喜欢待在家里而不喜欢出去。
(4)Drefer to do rather than do，意为“宁愿(愿意)……而不愿……”。如：
I prefer to stay at home rather than go shopping with you．我宁愿待在家里也不愿意和你一起去买东西。
活学活用
(2010·安徽) －Do you often watch Man and Nature on TV? －Sometimes．It’s an interesting program，but I Sports News．
A．prefer B．want C．enjoy D．miss
解析：本题考查动词辨析，答语后半句指“比起《人与自然》节目更喜欢《体育新闻》”。
答案：A
4．relax．v．&n．放松。轻松
(1)relaxed是形容词，意为“松弛的，缓和的，松懈的”，通常用来修饰人。如：
He’s feeling relaxed now．他现在感觉轻松多了。
(2)relaxing是形容词，意为“轻松的，放松的”，常修饰物。如：
Reading is relaxing．阅读让人放松。
活学活用
Teresa is pretty (轻松的)about time．She thinks it is okay if you arrive late．
解析：词组be relaxed about sth．意为“某人对某事不太在意”。
答案：relaxed
5．point at指向
(1)point用作不及物动词时，常直接接介词表示 “指向”，也可以用point to表达。但二者的用法有区别：point at侧重表示指向距离较近的事物，at是介词，着重于指的对象；point to则侧，重表示指向距离较远的事物，to是介词，着重于指的方向。如：
Mary pointed at the clothes and asked me to try them on．玛丽指着衣服，让我试穿。
The policeman pointed to the north and told me the way to the station．警察指向北方，告诉我到车站的路。
(2)point用作名词时有多种意义，意为“要点；分数；尖；尖端”等。如：
Please look at these points．请看这些要点。
Do you have a pencil with a sharper point?你有削得更尖点儿的铅笔吗?
活学活用
When you are talking with others，don’t point others with your chopsticks．
A．of B．at C with D．for
解析：指着某人，词组为point at sb．。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?请问洗手间在哪里?
(1)Could you please tell me…?是问路或问处所的常用句型，通常应先说Excuse me，以引起对方注意，也表示尊重对方。如：
Excuse me．Could you please tell me where No．101 Middle School is?打扰了。请问第101中学在哪儿?
(2)本句含有where引导的宾语从句。关于宾语从句应注意以下四个问题：引导词；主从句时态要对应；当宾语从句是疑问句时，要用陈述语序；句尾标点要根据主句判断。
适时点津
could比can更婉转些，意思是一样的。
活学活用
(2011·十堰) －Can you tell me ? －His home is quite far away from the office。I
think．
A．when he got up B．where he works
C．why he bought the car D．how he likes his job
解析：根据回答“他家离办公室比较远”，知道问原因。
答案：C
2．There’S always something happening．总会有事发生。
(1)本句是含有there be句型的简单句。happening作something的后置定语。句型“There be+主语(sb．／sth．)+doing sth．”表示“(主语)正在做某事”。如：
There are three students reading in the reading room．阅览室里有三名学生正在看书。
(2)doing sth．是现在分词短语作定语，用来修饰sb．／sth．。大家一定要牢记：单个的现在分词多作前置定语，现在分词短语多作后置定语。如：
She never troubles her studying brother．他从不打扰她正在学习的哥哥。
活学活用
Look，there are some students there．Let’s go and join them．
A．swim B．to swim C．swimming D．swims
解析：本题考查There be…doing句式。
答案：C
3．In your country。what are you supposed to do when you meet someone for the first time?在你们国家。人们第一次见面应该做些什么?
(1)be supposed t0是被动语态结构，译成汉语时，常根据中国人的习惯译为“被认为……；被期望或要求；应该”。如：Everybody is supposed to know the law．人人都应该懂得法律。
(2)for the first time意为“第一次”。如：For the first time l went to that beautiful place，
I fell in love with it．第一次去那个美丽的地方，我就喜欢上那里。
活学活用
(2010·通化)Students are oudly in the reading room．
A．old B．supposed C．not supposed D．allowed
解析：本题考查动词辨析，学生不允许在阅读室大声喧哗，故应为be not supposed to
答案：C
【巧辨异同】
1．information．news与message
(1)information是不可数名词，指通过学习、阅读等方式而获得的“信息；情报”等。“一条信息”应说a piece of information。如：
He wanted to get new information from the Internet．他想从网上获得新信息。
(2)news意为“新闻；消息”，是不可数名词，指公众感兴趣的、近来发生的事情，尤其指通过广播、电视、网络等报道的事件。
(3)message一般指口头传递或书写的“音信”，是可数名词。
活学活用
－The Internet is so onvenient that we can get all we wanted． －That’s right．It is very helpful in our lives now．
A．the information B．an information C．the informations
解析：information为不可数名词，故不能加S。
答案：A
2．instead与instead of
(1)instead作副词，意为“相反，代替，反而，却”，表示没做前面的事而做了后面的事。如：He wanted to be a singer，but he became a doctor instead．他想当歌手，但却成了一名 医生。
(2)instead of意为“而不是；代替”，是一个固定词组，后面跟名词、代词或动名词作宾语。如：Now I can drive to work instead of walking．现在我可以开车去上班而不必步行了。
活学活用
What a nice day!We should go sightseeing watching TV in the hotel．
A ．because of B．instead of C．together with D．out of
解析：根据句意，我们去看风景而不是看电视，instead of后跟名词或动名词。
答案：B
真题剖析
真题1(2011·苏州)If you don’t work enough。I don’t think your dream will come
A．hardly；truly B．hardly；true C．hard；true D．hard；truly
解析：ha一可作副词，意为“努力地”，实现(梦想)“come true”。
答案：C“
真题2 (2011·衢州) －May I borrow these two books，please? －Yes，you can
them for two weeks．
A．borrow B．lend C．buy D．keep
解析：本题考查动词辨析，borrow，lend，buy都为短
暂性动词，for two weeks为持续时间，故应用keep。
答案：D
真题3 (2010·武汉) －why are you still waiting in line? －I’ve missed my ．
A．place B．order C．turn D．time
解析：本题考查名词辨析，miss one’S turn，意为“错过号”。
答案：C
真题4 (2011·福州) －Could you tell me ? －Sure．The day after tomorrow,
A．when will you leave for theU.S.A
B．when M Lee will come
C．when your father returned
解析：本题考查Could you please…加宾语从句。A答案语序错误，C答案时态错误。
答案：B
真题5 (2011·青岛) －I wonder －I’m afraid we’11 be late．
A how we can be on time B what we are going to do
C why we get to school late D．if we will arrive at the meeting on time
解析：本题考查宾语从句的用法。由上句的“I wonder．．．”及答语，可以看出宾语从句的引导词应为if，故答案选D，句意为：一我怀疑我们是否能按时到会。一恐怕我们会迟到。
答案：D
名师预测
( )1．－Do you think yesterday’s math problem was difficult? －Yes．I could work it out．
A．hardly B．easily C．finally D．nearly
( )2．－I want to know 一Why not go to the Blue Lake?That’s a good place．
A．why I can go fishing B．where I can go fishing
C．when I can go fishing D．who I can go fishing with
( )3．－Could you please pass me the book? －
A ．Yes.I could B．No.I eouldn’t
C．Sure.Here you are D．No,that’s no problem
( )4．Please tell me ．I have some gifts for him．
A．how has Robert come B．where Robert is
C．when will Robert leave D．what does Robert like
( )5．－Are you sure you can do well in tomorow’s test，Lucy? － ．l’ve got everything ready．
A．It’s hard to say B．I’m afraid not C．I think so D．I hope not
同步训练21九年级Units 11—12
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．Excuse me．Could you please tell me ?
A where can I get a dictionary B．where I can get a dictionary
C that I can get a dictionary D．that can I get a dictionary
( )2．—find difficult to watch English-language TV
A that B．it C this D．／
( )3．It’s to point at others with your chopsticks．
A．good B．polite C．correct D．rude
( )4．—wondered they would help us with our problems．
A．that B．because C．unless D．if
( )5．—Could you please me your bike? —Sorry，I’ve it to Betty．
A．lend；lent B．lend；borrowed
C．borrow；lent D．borrow；borrowed
( )6．I，m sorry to you，but could you give me a hand?
A．offend B．order C．trouble D．believe
( )7．Could you tell me any public restrooms around here?
A．if there were B．if there is
C．if there are D．if are there
( )8．Don’t shout at her like this． .she’s only a little girl．
A．First of all B．After all C In all D．Above all
( )9．They go out their way to make me lonely at home．
A．for；feel B．of；to feel C．to；feels D．of；feel
( )10．Most girls enjoy in clothing shops．
A．going out B．taking out C．hanging out D．giving out
( )11．As everyone knows。rubbish everywnere．
A．need be thrown B．mustn’t be thrown
C．can’t throw D．may throw
( )1 2．We’ll have dinner at Qianxilong Restaurant．Which is famous its seafood．
A．of B．to C．for D．as
( )13．China will be the third country its astronauts into space after Russia and the us．
A．send B．sends C．sending D．to send
( )14．I’d like to know ．
A．when will he give back the tape
B．whether has he received higher education
C．that he has been busy
D．whether she will join in our English Evening
( )15．—I’m sorry to trouble you，Miss White．—
A．Fine，thank you． B．All right．
C．It’s very kind of you． D．It doesn’t matter．
二、语篇填空
Mr．Black had an unlucky day today．Last night he was learning French by(1) (自学)and went to sleep too late．This morning the alarm clock did not(2) off(发出响声)，so he overslept．He got up quickly，took a quick shower and(3) (冲)to the bus stop without breakfast．By the time he got to the bus station，the bus had(4) (已经)gone awav，so he had to wait for another one．About five(5) (分钟)later，he got on the bus，but it broke(6) (出故障)on the way．When he got to the office in the end，he was so late that his boss shouted at him(7) (生气)．He said(8) (没有什么)and sat at his desk．As he was ready to unlock the drawer，he suddenly realized he had(9) (留下)the key at home．With the boss beside him，he was(10) (想知道)what to do．
三、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．They planned (take)dance lessons for their holiday．
2．Parents will spend many happy hours (walk)through the History Museum．
3．It's even (good)than I thought it would be．
4．Keep your eyes (close)when you are doingeye exercises．
5．Everything was unfamiliar when I first ate in a (west)restaurant．
6．Knowing how to ask for information (polite)is very important．
7．I want to get some (information)about the town．
8．Can you tell me where to buy some (write) paper?
9．The mall is usually (crowd)on weekends．
10．They decided not (go)to the zoo this afternoon
四、单词拼写
请根据下列句子所给汉语注释，写出空缺处各单词的正确形式。每空只写一词。
1．It’s my cousin，s (第三个)birthday next week．
2．August is the (最热的)month in Suzhou， isn’t it?
3．Excellent teachers are usually (感兴趣的) in their students．
4．The Great Wall of China is one of the (奇迹)of the world．
5．I)o you know the difference (在……之间)“beside”and“besides”?
6．We visit the home for the elderly (一次)a month．
7．Have you ever (写)a letter to your parents?
8．Would you like to (分享)your experiences with us?
9．This book is of great (价值)to beginners．
10． (实际上)，we still have a lot more to learn．
五、单句改错
( )1．You arenot supposed eat or drink while walking down the street．
A B C D
( )2．I asked the twins to come to my party，but both came in the end．
A B C D
( )3．Although he was very ill，but the doctor says he is safe now．
A B C D
( )4．Could you please tell me if can I park the ear here?
A B C D
( )5．Watertown is a great place for the family taking a vacation．
A B C D
[能力提升]
一、完形填空
Mr．North is now old and very forgetful．One summer day．he decided to 1 his grandchildren to a sea：side for a holiday．The town was about a three hours’train ride 2 ．In order to make the holiday more 3 for his grandchildren，he kept the name of the town a 4 ．But they arrived at the station，the poor man had forgotten the 5 of the town himself． 6 ,a friend of 7 was at the station at that time．He helped to take care of the 8 while Mr．North went back home to find out 9 he was going．
Mrs．North was 10 to see Mr．North again so soon．But she was pleased when she understood 11 he came back．She wrote the name of the l2 on a Diece of paper and sent her husband off．Then some 13 later，she was greatly surprised to see Mr．North outside l4 ．What was the matter now?Mr．North had forgotten l5 he had left the children．
( )1．A．take B．give C．have D．make
( )2．A．farther B．away C．over D．off
( )3．A．interested B．careful C．interesting D．excited
( )4．A．report B．present C．1esson D．secret
( )5．A．people B．road C．way D．name
( )6．A．Luckily B．Surely C．Finally D．Usually
( )7．A．his B．him C．himself D．wife
( )8．A．tickets B．children C．train D．name
( )9．A．when B．where C．how D．whether
( )10．A．happy B．angry C．surprised D．sorry
( )11．A．as B．because C．why D．how
( )12．A．friend B．town C．station D．children
( )13．A．months B．weeks C．minutes D．days
( )14．A．soon B．more C．again D．too
( )15．A．who B．where C．when D．whether
二、阅读理解
Patience works wonders
One day when I was working as a psychologist at a children’s hospital，a boy named David showed up in the waiting room．
I showed him into my office．“Please sit down．”I said．
David’s grandparents had died and his mother had been killed in a car accident．Now he was l4 and an orphan(孤儿)．
The first two times we met，David didn’t say a word．“Come back next week，if you like，”I said．After that we played chess every week-in silence．
Usually，he arrived early and took the chessboard out．It seemed as if he enjoyed being with me．But why did he never look at me?
“Perhaps he simply needs someone to share his pain with。”I thought．
Some months later．I sat and watched David quietly across the chessboard．Suddenly，he looked up at me．
“It’s your turn，”he said．
After that day，David started talking．He made friends in school and joined a bicycle club．He wrote to me later from his university．
I learned from David how time makes it possible to overcome almost anything．David showed me how one can reach out to another．All it takes is an ear that listens．
阅读短文，判断句子正(T)误(F)。
( )1．The writer was once working at a hospital as a psychologist．
( )2．When they met for the first time，the writer played chess with David．
( )3．David’s parents died in a car accident and he stopped talking for a few months．
( )4．After playing chess silently with the writer for some months，David finally started talking．
( )5．At last，David became positive and went to college．
三、任务型阅读
阅读短文，根据其内容，完成下列任务。
An old soul(灵魂)is the last thing you would expect to find inside Justin Bieber．But if you listen to his music，you will realize that he is more mature(成熟的)than he looks．
The l7-year-old Canadian singer became an overnight success on the Internet．Two years ago，his mother placed a video on YouTube(美国著名视频分享网站)of Bieber singing at a talent show．The video was for his friends，but an agent saw Bieber’s talent and quickly signed him to a record company．
In 2009，Bieber released(发行)his first album，My World．It was the highest-selling album by a new singer that year．He is also the first singer to have seven songs from his first album on the Top-40 Billboard chart(排行榜)．This March，Bieber released his second album，My World 2．0，and has received the same success．
Two years ago，Bieber was just a boy living with his single mother．Now，he has become a super star who makes young girls scream(尖叫)the world over．He even has us President Barack Obama’s two daughters screaming．Under all this pressure(压力)，can Bieber still keep his cool?
It seems he can．
“I think people understand my music because I really show my heart when I sing。”he says．“My message is that you can do anything if you j ust put your mind to it．I was poor when I was young．I didn’t have as much as other people had．I think it made me stronger as a person and it built my character．Now I want to go to college and just become a better person．”
任务一：判断正(T)误(F)。
1．President Obama’s daughters are fans of Bieber． ( )
任务二：回答问题。
2．How many albums has Bieber released so far?
任务三：根据短文内容填空。
3．Bieber is l7 years old now．He comes from ． He lives with ．
任务四：翻译词组和句子。
4．(1)become an overnight success
(2)I think people understand my music because I really show my heart when I sin9．
任务五：仔细阅读文章，将下列句子按故事的发展排序。
a．An agent saw Bieber’s talent and quickly signed him to a record company．
b．Bieber released his first album．
C．Justin Bieber’s mother placed his video on YouTube．
d．Bieber was just a boy living with his single mother．
e．Bieber released his second album．
5．
四、句子翻译
1．请你告诉我怎样到达火车站好吗?(Could you please tell me…?)
2．小咖啡馆是朋友聊天的好地方。(…a good place to…)
3．有很多人在等公交车。(There are…doing…)
4．和家人朋友一起共度时光对我们很重要。(be important to)
5．准时非常重要。(It’s important to．．．)
五、书面表达
阅读以下生活场景，根据要求，以“Should we help our parents do some housework?”为题，写一篇作文，开头已写好。(不计入总词数)
Mum：Li Ming!Can you help me do the washing，please?
Li Ming：Oh，no!I need to do my homework
Dad：But it is Sunday．You have the whole afternoon to do it．
Li Ming：No，Daddy．Doing housework is tiring．I also need to study for my math test tomorrow．
Mum：Li Ming，doing the washing won’t take you a minute．You should share the housework．
Li Ming：Oh，no．I don’t like doing that．It’s boring．
Dad：But study is not the only thing you need to do．You need to learn to do some housework．
内容包括：
1．What are Li Ming’s mum and dad’s opinions?Do you agree?
2．What do you think of Li Ming’s idea?
3．What do you think of doing housework?What kind of chores do you usually do at home?
4．What do you want to say to the students of your age?
要求：1．用词准确，语句通顺，表达清楚。
2．100词左右。
Should we help our parents do some housework?
As Li Ming’s mom says，“Doing the washing won’t take you a minute．You should share the housework．”I think
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 ABCBC
【同步训练21】
一、1—5 BBDDA 6—10 CCBDC 11—15 BCCDD
二、1．himself 2．go 3．rushed 4．already 5．minutes 6．down 7．angrily 8．nothing 9．1eft10．wondering
三、1．to take 2．walking 3．better 4．closed 5．western 6．politely 7．information 8．writing 9．crowded 10．to go
四、1．third 2．hottest 3．interested 4．wonders 5．between 6．once 7．written 8．share 9．value l0．Actually
五、1．B，to eat 2．C，neither 3．B，去掉4．C，I can 5．C，to take
[能力提升]
一、1—5 ABCDD 6—10 AABBC 11—15 CBCCB
二、1—5 TFFTT
三、1．T 2．He has released two albums． 3．Canada，his mother 4．(1)一夜成名 (2)我认为人们能听懂我的音乐，因为当我唱歌时我是真正地用我的心在唱。5．dcabe
四、1．Could you please tell me how I can get to the train station?2．The small cafe is a good place for friends to chat with each other． 3．There are many people waiting for the bus． 4．Spending time with the family and friends is very important to us． 5．It’s important to be on time．
五、One possible version：
Should we help our parents do some housework?
As Li Ming’s mom says．“Doing the washing won’t take you a minute．You should share the housework．”I think we students should help our parents do some housework．
Firstly，after a whole day’s work，our parents must be very tired．If we help them with the housework，they’ll feel quite happy and pleased．On the other hand，doing housework not only trains our abilities，but also helps us make a sense of responsibility．Only through housework can we realize we’re members of our families，then to realize we’re parts of our society．We can devote ourselves to the world．
So，I think it necessary for us to do some housework．
第22讲九年级Units l3—15
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．scientific(adj．)科学的→science(n．)科学→scientist(n. )科学家
2．hard(adj．)坚固的；坚硬的→hard(adv．)努力地→hardly(adv．)几乎不
3．beauty(n. )美丽→beautiful(adj．)美丽的
4．truth(n．)真相；实情；事实→true(adj．)真实的
5．southern(adj．)南方的→south(n．)南方
6．educate(v. )教育→education(n．)教育
7．weigh(v．)有……重；重→weight(n．)重量
8．rainy(adj．)下雨的→rain(n．&v. )雨；下雨
【重点短语】
1．make sb．sad使某人伤心 2．make sb．do sth．使(让)某人做某事
3．make money赚钱 4．1earn from向……学习 5．keep out遮挡；防御
6．keep sb．doing sth． 让某人一直做某事 7．aim at瞄准；针对；致力于
8．have sales降价；廉价出售 9．1ead sb．to do sth． 引导某人做某事
10．tell the truth说实话；说真话 11．work hard at努力学习
12．pretend to do sth． 假装做某事 13．scientific studies科学研究
14．hard seats硬座位 15．heavy traffic拥挤的交通
16．endangered animals濒危动物 17．so that以便；为了
18．at times有时 19．to start with首先
20．for instance／example例如 21．bathing suit游泳衣
22．clean out sth． 清除某物内部使之整洁 23．write original songs写原创歌曲
24．win an award获奖 25．have concerts举行音乐会
26．make a music video制作一份音乐录像 27．be／appear on TV上电视；在电视上露面
28．make a hit CD制作一张大受欢迎的光盘
29．go on a world tour世界巡回演出；全球旅行
30．play a musical instrument演奏乐器
31．on the music scene在音乐领域；在乐坛上 32．1ead singer主唱
33．in the top ten在排行榜前十名 34．get back to sb． 过一会再与某人通话
35．chop wood砍柴；劈木柴 36．1ight the fire点火；生火
37．take care当心；保重 38．in the last twelve months在最后的十二个月里
39．some day有朝一日；将来某一天 40．good luck to sb． 祝某人好运
41．be off离开；走开 42．say goodbye to sb． 向某人告别
43．so far到目前为止 44．thousands of成千上万的
45．in southern China在中国南部 46．thanks to幸亏；由于
47．look forward to(doing)sth． 期盼／盼望(做)某事
48．try to do sth． 尽力做某事 49．be against doing sth． 反对做某事
50．weigh l00 pounds称100磅重 51．be suitable for适合
52．be surprised to do sth． 做某事感到很惊讶
53．care for关怀；照顾54．urge sb．to do sth． 竭力主张某人做某事
55．hear of听说56．in one’s spare time在某人闲暇时间
57．raise money for sb． 为某人筹钱
【重点句型】
1．Rainy days make me sad．雨天使我忧伤。
2．Sad movies make her want to leave．悲伤的电影使她想要离开。
3．Waiting for her made me angry．等候她让我生气。
4．How do you feel about pollution／smoking?你怎样看待污染／吸烟?
5．－Have you packed the camera yet?你已经把照相机装箱子里了吗?
－Yes.I have already put it in my suitcase．／No，I haven，t packed it yet．是的，我已经把它放在小提箱里了。／不，我还没有把它装箱子呢。
6．They’re off to a great start．他们正走向一个好的开始。
7．We’re trying to save the manatees!我们正在努力拯救海牛。
8．－How big are manatees?海牛有多大?
－They’re about lo feet long and they weigh about 1，000 pounds．它们大约十英尺长，称重约1000磅左右。
9．I think／feel／believe／agree that…我认为／感觉／相信／同意……
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．make使役动词
(1)make sb．do sth．，如：
My mother often makes me do housework．我妈常叫我做家务。
(2)make sb．／sth．+adj．，如：Soccer makes me crazy．足球使我疯狂。
(3)make后面还可接名词、介词短语作宾语补足语。如：
We made her our monitor．我们选她当班长。Make yourself at home．请不要客气。
活学活用
(2010·福州) －We all like Miss Wang．－I agree with you．She always makes her English classes ．
A．interested B．interest C．interesting
解析：本题考查make的用法，make classes interesting，使课堂更加有趣。
答案：C
2．taste
连系动词，后接形容词。常用的连系动词还有look，smell，get，become，feel等。如：
You look fine today．你今天看起来气色很好。
The meat smells terrible．这肉坏了。My father got very angry when he found me swimming alone in the lake．当我父亲发现我独自在湖里游泳时气愤极了。
活学活用
We love to go to the country in spring as the flowers smell so ．
A．well B．nice C．wonderfully D．nicely
解析：本题考查连系动词smell用法，后跟形容词。
答案：B
3．keep out
(1)意为“不让……进入；阻挡……”。如：
The trees can keep out the wind．树可以挡风。
(2)意为“不让进入……；使……不进入…。如：
Please keep the dog out of the house．不要让狗进入房子。
适时点津
keep构成的常用词组有：
keep…away from．使……远离……
keep…from doing sth．阻止……做某事
keep on doing sth．继续做某事
keep up with…赶上……
keep sb．in．．．使某人留在……
活学活用
Bill doesn’t like the sunglasses in the ad because they can’t the sun well．
A．take out B．keep out C．clean out D．look out
解析：本题考查动词词组keep out的用法，阻挡阳光，故选8。
答案：B
4．try v．尝试
(1)try to do意为“尽力去做(某事)”，相当于try one’s best to do。用于表示做某事有困难或需要付出巨大努力，但说话人主观上要克服困难，想方设法，尽力去做好它的场 合。如：
I’ll try to come here early tomorrow．明天我将尽量早点来。
(2)try doing意为“试一试；看看某种方法是否对路或奏效”。如：
If the car won’t start，try pushing it．如果这车发动不了，试着推一推它。
(3)动词try还可译为“试；尝试；试用”。如：
－Have you tried this medicine?你试过这种药了吗?
－I’ve tried，but it doesn’t work．我已经试过了，但它不起作用。
适时点津
try to do sth．设法做某事 try on试穿 have a try试一下
try out尝试；试验 try one’s best to do sth．尽力做某事
活学活用
We’re trying the cheetahs．for they’re in danger．
A．help B to save C．save D．helping
解析：“我们正尽力去挽救”，词组为try to do。
答案：B
5．weigh v．
(1)用作及物动词，意为“称……的重量”。如：
Cao Chong thought of a way to weigh the elephant．曹冲想出了一个称大象的办法。
(2)用作及物动词，还可译为“权衡；掂量”。如：
I weighed the benefits of the plan against the risks involved．我认真考虑了这个计划的优点和有关的风险。
(3)用作不及物动词，意为“重”，后接数字。如：
She weighs 60 kilos．她的体重是60千克。
适时点津
weight是weigh的名词形式，意为“重量；体重”，一般用作不可数名词。如：
His weight is 65 kilos．他的体重是65千克。
活学活用
－ are manatees? －They weigh about l，000 pounds．
A．How big B．How heavy C．How long D．How old
解析：本题根据答句weigh问的是重量。
答案：B
6．urge n强烈要求；竭力主张
(1)urge sb．to do sth．意为“强烈要求或极力劝说某人做某事”。如：
The man urged me to buy a new computer．那个人极力向我推销一款新电脑。
(2)urge+that从旬，意为“主张……”，从句的谓语动词用should+动词原形；should可以省略。如：
My friend urged that I(should)travel to Beijing．我朋友主张我去北京旅游。
活学活用
My mother always me to do my homework as quickly as possible．
A．talks B．urges C．lets D．makes
解析：本题考查动词辨析，句意“我妈妈经常要求我尽快做作业”，句式为urge sb．to do sth．。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．I’d rather go to the Blue Lagoon Restaurant because I like to listen to quiet music while l’m eating．我宁愿到蓝湖餐馆，因为我喜欢吃饭的时候听轻柔的音乐。
(1)I’d rather：I Would rather，意为“我更愿……；我宁可……”。would rather后接动词原形；其否定式是在would rather后加否定词not。如：
I would rather stay at home in such bad weather．在这样的坏天气里我宁愿待在家里。
(2)表示“宁愿……而不愿……”可以用下面的结构表示：would rather do sth．than do sth．／would do sth．rather than do sth．／prefer to do sth．rather than do sth．。如：
I would rather have red apples than green ones．我宁愿吃红苹果，而不愿吃青苹果。
I would listen to music rather than go swimming．我宁愿听音乐，而不愿去游泳。
活学活用
I would rather with you than here．
A．go；stay B．going；stay C．go；to stay D．to go；stay
解析：本题考查would rather do A than do B的句型，句意为“我宁愿和你一起而不愿呆在这里”。
答案：A
2．How do you feel about pollution?对于污染你有什么感想?
How do you feel about…? －What do you think of…?用于询问某人对某事的看法或所持的观点等。如：
What do you think of the photos on newspapers?你是怎么看报纸上的照片的?
How do you like the life and study in this school?你感觉在这个学校的生活和学习怎么样?
活学活用
－How do you Teel when you watch the national flag go up? －It makes me very proud．
A．felt B．to feel C．feel D．feeling
解析：本句考查make sb．do sth．的用法，同时也涉及到句型How do you feel…?的理解。
答案：C
3．－Have you watered the plants yet?你给植物浇水 了吗?
－Yes，I have already watered them．是的，我已经浇水了。
(1)时态为现在完成时，表示发生在过去的动作water对现在造成的影响(或结果)。过去完成时的基本结构是have／has+动词的过去分词。
(2)副词already(已经)和yet(还；仍然)，其中already常用于肯定句，yet常用于否定句和一般疑问句。如：
－Have you finished your homework yet?你作业已完成了吗?
－Yes．I’ve already finished it．是的，我已经完成了。
(3)water在此处为动词，意为“浇水；洒水”。如：
water the plants给植物浇水 water the horses饮马
活学活用
(2011·临沂) －Will you please go to see the movie Guanyinshan with me?
－No，1 won’t．I it aIready．
A．saw B．have seen C．see D．will see
解析：本题考查时态，此句表示“已看过”，already放在肯定句中，表示“已经”，故选B。
答案：B
【巧辨异同】
1．the others，the other与another
(1)the others意为“其余的”，表示在一个范围内的其他全部。如：
This dictionary is better than the others．这本字典比别的好。
(2)the other是两个中的“另一个”。如：
I have two pens；one is red，the other is green．我有两枝笔，一枝是红色，另二枝是绿色。
(3)两个中的“另一个”是“the other”，不定数目中 的“另一个”是“another”。如： This coat is too small．Please give me anotherone．这件外套太小，请给我另外一件。
活学活用
(2011·临沂) －I have two cats．One is black，and is white．
A．another B．some C．other D．the other
解析：the other是指两个中的“另一个”，这里特指两只猫中的另一只。
答案：D
2．discover。find与find out
(1)discover与find意思接近，有时可互换；但在表示新的重要的发现，特别是科学上的发现时，只能用discover；find多指偶然、无意识地发现。如：
Columbus discovered America in l492．哥伦布在1492年发现了美洲。
(2)discover指发现原来就存在但一直未被人们所知的事物；find out则指通过观察、探索而发现事实的真相，因此多指发现无形的、隐秘的事情，意为“查明；弄清楚”。如：Have you found out why he was late?你弄清楚他为什么迟到了吗?
活学活用
In l972，it (discover)that they were andangered．
解析：本句表示“被发现”故应用被动语态，又由“In 1972”可知应用过去式。
答案：was discovered
3．be made of与be made from都表示“由……制成”。
(1)be made of后面跟表示材料的名词，从制成品上可以看出原材料。如：
That bridge is made of stone．那座桥是由石头建成的。
(2)be made from后面跟表示材料的名词，从制成品上看不出原材料。如：
Paper is made from wood．
适时点津
与made有关的短语：
(1)be made in(某物)生产于(某地)
(2)be made out of用……制成；由……改制而成(后跟材料或另一物体名称)
(3)be made int0被制成某产品(后跟加工制成的产品)
(4)be made up of由……组成(后跟组成部分)
活学活用
－What will they do to deal with the accident?－Ten doctors and five nurses have a medical team and will start out right now．
A．worked out B．made up C．helped out D．belonged to
解析：本句意为“组成医学救援队”，make up有“组 成”的意思。
答案：B
真题剖析
真题1 (2010·达州)This kind of paper soft．
A．feels B．Tastes C．smells D．sounds
解析：本题考查连系动词的用法，连系动词后跟形容词soft，纸感觉起来很柔软。
答案：A
真题2 (2011·怀化) --May l speak to Lin Tao? --Sorry，he is not in．He to
Changsha．
A．has been B．had gone C．went
解析：本题考查have been to与have gone to辨析，他去了长沙未回来，故用has gone。
答案：B
真题3(2011·青岛) －Look ! There is a horse racing program on TV now．
－Hmm．．．It exciting．
A．seems B．looks like C．feels D．seems like
解析：本题考查连系动词的用法。由exciting“令人兴奋的”可知谓语动词必须为连系动词，而a horse racing program“赛马节目”是要“看起来”才合适的，意为“看起来”。
答案：A
真题4 (2011·绍兴)The old man can hardly see anything， he?
A．doesn’t B．does C．can’t D．can
解析：本题考查hardly的用法，否定词，反意疑问句前否后肯，故答案选D。
答案：D
真题5 (2010·安徽) －How can I well with my lessons，Dad?
－Practice makes perfect．
A．work on B．hold on C．get on D．keep on
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。work on意为“致力于……”，hold on意为“坚持”，get on意为“对付，应付，进展”，keep on意为“保持”，根据句意“如何对付我的学习”，故选C。
答案：C
真题6 (2010·沈阳)－Excuse me， is the post office? －About 500 metres away．
A．how often B．how long C．how far D．how soon
解析：根据答句，问的是距离。
答案：C
名师预测
根据短文内容，用所给单词的适当形式填空，每词限用一次。
mean，tiring，also，for，room
Some colors make US feel calm and peaceful．Blue is one of these colors．Wearing blue clothes or sleeping in a blue(1) is good for the mind and body．Blue can(2) mean sadness．Someone who is feeling sad may say“I’m feeling blue．”Some colors make us feel happy．Orange is such a happy color．It can bring you happiness and cheer you up when you are sad.If you feel(3) or weak，please wear colors that make you feel energetic．Green can give you energy，because it(4) new life．And you can also wear red．That makes it easier(5) you to take action.
同步训练22九年级Units l3—15
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1． to music her very relaxed．
A．Listen；make B．Listening；make
C．Listening；makes D．Listen；makes
( )2．I’m not good at English，so I get when I take an English test．
A．comfortable B．relaxed
C．tense D．pleasant
( )3．My alarm clock didn’t go off． ，I was late for class．
A However B．Therefore C．So D．Then
( )4．I think these sunglasses make me look ．What do you think?
A．mysterious B．relax
C．hungry D．safe
( )5．—Have you finished your work yet? —No，not yet．I think it’ll take ten minutes．
A．another B．other C．others D．more
( )6．I haven’t seen my friend for several weeks．I，m looking forward to his email
soon．
A．get B．gets C．got D．getting
( )7．—How long have you the camera? —For three years．I it in the shop．
A．bought；bought B．had；bought
C．had；had D．bought；had
( )8．—How tall is the tree? —It，s about ．
A．five meter B．five meter tall C．ten feet tall D．ten-feet tall
( )9．My uncle lives in Bering．I will him．
A．drop off B．drop on C．drop by D．drop away
( )10．You’ll be late you don’t get up now．
A．if B．before C．unfil D．after
( )11．—They said sorry to me，but l wouldn’t listen．—It is foolish of you others for
their mistakes．
A．forgive B．not forgive
C．to forgive D．not to forgive
( )12．Don’t the bus until it has stopped．Safety comes first．
A．get along B．get to C．get off D．get up
( )13．Hello!I’m very glad to see you．When here?
A did；arrive B．will；arrive C．have；arrived D．are；arriving
( )14．You will achieve nothing you work hard
A．if B．unless C．when D．that
( )15．一This book educating teenagers．Would you like to buy it?
一Yes．I’ll take it．
A．aims at B．depends on C．gives out D．set up
二、语篇填空
Last year，I went to Glasgow for my six-month English course．It was my first time to be in a new city，so everything was very(1) (新鲜的)．My(2) (内心)was full of energy．After having spent one day in the town center，I(3) (做出)a decision to find out more about the place by(4) (步行)around it，but l wondered if I could deal with any(5) (问题)all by myself．
There was so much to see．I enjoyed lots of fantastic(6) (景点)along the roads．Two hours went by(7) (快地)．Then I found fewer and fewer houses and green farmland could be seen in front of me．I had got into the countryside and I had to ask the way．I told a friendly man what had(8) (发生)，but he shook his head without a word．He was
(9) (聋的)．I thanked him politely anyway and walked on．“Take it easy!”I thought．“Find another man，and maybe he will be(10) (有帮助的)”．
三、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．The ground is as (hard)as stone because of the drought．
2．Sad movies always make me (cry)．
3． you (buy)a travel guidebook yet?
4．They are against (build)a new ZOO in their town．
5．Why didn’t you tell me the (true)?
6．Young children shouldn’t spend too much time (watch)TV every day．
7．I don’t think that animals should (keep)in the ZOO．
8．Thank you for (tell)us the good news．
9．She told me (not forget)to bring the advertisement of Easy Care Shampoo to her．
10．Everyone must admire the (beautiful)of a mother’s love．
四、用方框内所给词的适当形式填空
farmer，wait，pollute，take，slow
1．Teenagers should know how care of themselves．
2．Working on the is tiring but interesting．
3．He didn’t show up until 11:30． for him really made us angry．
4．The environment is becoming worse and worse．
5．Would you mind speaking more ，please?I can’t catch what．you said．
五、单句改错
( )1．He wanted to make money buy an MP3．
A B C D
( )2．I think this important for children to have a good habit．
A B C D
( )3．The news made us happily and we couldn’t help jumping．
A B C D
( )4．No one knows how solve the problem．
A B C D
( )5．The sunglasses don’t keep in the sun in the slightest．
A B C D
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·丽水)
Eric was terribly ill．He couldn’t move and had to spend all day in l ．Because his friends were not allowed to go near him，he felt quite 2 ．Every day he just looked out of the 3 ，doing nothing at all．As time passed，Eric became more and more hopeless．
One day，however，he saw something very 4 in the window．A panda was eating sandwiches there．Erie was very surprised．Before he could 5 what had happened，he saw a monkey playing the violin．After a while，he saw more and more 6 characters outside the window．This time he began to 7 a lot and could hardly stop．
No one would stop laughing when they saw a pig playing a drum，or a d09上a pair of glasses and acting like a teacher．Eric didn’t tell anyone about this 9 he thought nobody would believe this．Anyway，those strange characters brought happiness back l0 his heart．Soon he got well and was able to go back to 11 again．
When class was over．Eric told his l2 about all the strange things he had seen．While he was talking，he saw something coming out of Tom’s 13 ．He wanted very much to know what it was，so he asked Tom l4 ．Finally Tom had to 15 him what was in the bag．There，inside，were all the fancy-dress(假面)toys that Tom had used to cheer him up!
And from that day on，Eric always did his best to make sure that no one was sad or lonely．
( )1．A．school B．bed C．church D．class
( )2．A．happy B．tired C．sad D．excited
( )3．A．window B．book C．door D．wall
( )4．A．delicious B．warm C．useful D．strange
( )5．A．find out B．pick up C．take away D．get back
( )6．A．quiet B．brave C funny D．dangerous
( )7．A．cry B．laugh C．run D．sing
( )8．A．making B．selling C．inventing D．wearing
( )9．A．because B．but C．so D．or
( )10．A．for B．with C．into D．by
( )11．A．work B．school C．town D．hospital
( )12．A．parents B．brothers C．sisters D．classmates
( )13．A．eyes B．shoes C．jacket D．schoolbag
( )14．A．again and again B．as usual C．day and night D．in time
( )15．A．teach B．show C．lend D．sell
二、阅读理解
Words of lire and death
A group of frogs were traveling through the woods when two of them fell into a deep pit(坑)．All the other frogs gathered around the pit．When they saw how deep the pit was，they told the two frogs that they were as good as dead．The two frogs ignored their words and tried to jump out of the pit with all of their might．The other frogs kept telling them to stop，and that they were as good as dead．
Finally，one of the frogs listened to what the other frogs were saying and gave up．He fell down and died．The other frog continued to j ump as hard as he could．
Once again，the crowd of frogs shouted at him to give up and wait for death．
He jumped even harder and finally made it out．When he got out．the other frogs asked：“Didn’t you hear us?”
To their surprise，the frog explained to them that he was almost deaf．He thought they were encouraging him the whole time．
Words have the power of life and death．An encouraging word spoken to someone who is down can lift them up and help them make it through their difficulties．
A destructive(破坏性的)word to someone who is down can be fatal(致命的)．So always be careful of what you say．
( )1．What happened while a group of frogs was traveling through the woods?
A．Two of them lost their way． B．The hunter caught two of them．
C．Two of them fell into a deep pit． D．Two of them died．
( )2．Why did one of the two frogs give up at last?
A．Because he was too tired to j ump．
B．Because the other frogs above said he couldn’t jump out．
C．Because he wanted to live in the pit．
D．Because his legs were broken．
( )3．Why could the other frog finally jump out of the pit?
A．Because he thought the other frogs were encouraging him
B．Because he wanted to tell the other frogs they were wrong．
C．Because he wanted to help save the other frog．
D．Because he wasn’t afraid of destructive words．
( )4．What does the writer want to tell us through the story?
A．Words have nothing to do with life and death．
B．We should be careful of what we say to others．
C．Destructive words can also be helpful．
D．We shouldn’t try to give others advice．
兰、任务型阅读
阅读短文，根据其内容，完成下列任务。
(1)Da Sham a Canadian,is perhaps China's most famous foreigner．He speaks Chinese well．He was born in l965．He(2)started to learn Chinese when he studied at Toronto University．In order to remember more Chinese words，(3)wrote，he，them，often，on，cards，down，small．But he would only memorize words he met with while reading，listening or talking in the following two weeks．“There’s no use learning words that don’t appear often。”he said．“And the best way to learn a foreign language is to keep using it and understand the culture behind it，or you’ll forget everything quickly．”
Da Shan says it is important to get into the language environment．(4)与中国朋友交谈has helped him learn not only the words，but also the country and its people．
任务一：请将(1)处的句子翻译成汉语。
1．
任务二：请用适当的词替换(2)处的单词。
2．
任务三：将(3)的单词组合成一个完整的句子。
3．
任务四：将(4)处的短语译成英语。
4．
任务五：请回答下面的问题。
5．What does Da Shan think is the best way to learn a foreign language?
四、句子翻译
1．他宁愿呆在家里也不愿出去。(would rather．．． than．．．)
2．我们都觉得很难解决这个问题。(find it+adj．+to do)
3．他所说的话使我们大笑。(make…do)
4．他们从科学研究中学到了许多。(learn from)
5．这种竹子适合熊猫吃。(be suitable for)
五、书面表达(2011·东营)
初中三年的学校生活就要结束了；回顾三年的学校生活；你(Jack)感慨万分。校园网的英语论坛开辟了“My School Life”专栏，供同学们发表感言。请你为该专栏写一篇短文，回顾自己三年的学校生活。
短文主要包括回顾、感谢、祝愿等，回顾应涉及到生动有趣的课堂，活泼可爱的同学，丰富多彩的活动，自己的优点及不足等，你可以适当发挥。
要求：1．字数在100词左右，第一句已经给出，不计人总词数。 。
2．文中不得出现真实姓名及校名。
I’m lucky to study in this beautiful school．
答案
【名师预测】
1．room 2．also 3．tired 4．means 5．for
【同步训练22】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 CBBAA 6—10 DBCCA 11—15 DCABA
二、1．fresh 2．heart 3．made 4．walking 5．problems 6．sights 7．quickly 8．happened 9．deaf l0．helpful
三、1．hard 2．cry 3．Have，bought 4．Building 5．truth 6．Watching 7．be kept 8．telling 9．not to forget l0．beauty
四、1．to take 2．farm 3．Waiting 4．pollution 5．slowly
五、1．C，to buy 2．A，it’s 3．C，happy 4．D，to solve 5．C，keep out
[能力提升]
一、1—5 BCADA 6—10 CBDAC 11—15 BDDAB
二、1—4 CBAB
三、1．大山，加拿大人，或许是在中国最有名的外国人。 2．began 3．he often wrote them down on small cards．4． Chatting／Talking with Chinese friends 5．He thinks that the best way to learn a foreign language is to keep using it and understand
the culture behind it．
四、1．He would rather stay at home than go out．2．We find it difficult to solve the problem． 3．What he said made us laugh．4．They learned a lot from scientific studies． 5．This kind of bamboo is suitable for pandas．
五、One possible version：
I’m lucky to study in this beautiful school．The teachers are great．They always try to make their lessons lively and interesting．The classmates are lovely and friendly．The school life is rich and colorful．They make me happy every day．
In the past three years，I am hardworking and have made great progress．I do well in the exams．I am good at communicating and I like to make friends with others．
However，I have problems，too．I will spend less time online．I will do more sports and become stronger．
Thank you my teachers and classmates．Wish my school more beautiful， my teachers and classmates a happy life!
Jack from Grade 3
第2讲七年级(上)Units 7—12
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．help(v．)帮助→helpful(adj．)有帮助的，有用的→helpless(adj．反义词)无帮助的，无用的
2．successful(adj．)成功的→success(n．)成功→succeed(u)成功→suecessfully(adv．)成功地
3．nine(num．)九→ninth(序数词)第九→nineteenth (序数词)第十九
twenty(num．)二十→twentieth(序数词)第二十
4．show(n．)演出，表演-，show(v．)展示，给……看
5．music(n．)音乐→musician(n．)音乐家，擅长音乐的人
6．young(n．)年青的→old(adj．反义词)老的，旧的
7．science(n．)科学→scientist(n．)科学家→scientific(adj．)科学的
【重点短语】
1．at a very good price价格优惠2．on sale廉价出售；出售 3．speech contest演讲比赛
4．school trip学校郊游 5．basketball game篮球赛 6．go to a movie去看电影
7．1earn about学习 8．how much多少 9．Art Festival艺术节
10．action movie动作片 11．Chinese history中国历史 12．on weekends在周末
13．play the guitar弹吉他 14．join the chess club加入棋类社团 15．play chess下象棋
16．want to do sth．想要做某事 17．be good with sb． 与某人相处好
18．help…with… 帮助(某人做某事)19．get up起床 20．favorite subject最喜爱的科目
21．go to work去上班 22．get to到达 23．go to bed上床睡觉
24．go home回家 25．1isten to music听音乐 26．do homework做家庭作业
27．tell sb．about sth．告诉某人关于某事 28．a little少量 29．take a shower洗澡
【重点句型】
1．－How much is／are…? 某物是多少钱? －It’s／They are… 它／它们是……
2．That sounds boring． 听起来令人生厌。
3．－Can I help you? 你想买什么?
－Yes,please．I want a／an／some… 我想买……
4．What color do you want? 你想要什么颜色?
5．I’ll take it． 我买下了。
6．－When is your birthday? 你的生日是什么时候? －My birthday is… 我的生日是……
7．一How old are you? 你多大了? －I am．．． 我……
8．－what kind of movies do you like? 你喜欢哪类电影?
－I like action movies． 我喜欢动作片。
9．－Do you want to go to a movie? 你想去看电影吗?
－Yes，I do．／No，I don’t． 是的，我想去。／不，我不想去。
10．－What club do you want to join? 你想加入哪类俱乐部?
－1 want to join．．．club． 我想加入……俱乐部。
11．－Can you play the guitar? 你会弹吉他吗?
－Yes，I Call,／Yes，a little．／No，I can’t． 是的，我会。／是的，会一点儿。／不，我不会。
12．－Can I help you？ 需要效劳吗?／买点什么呢? －Yes，please．是的，谢谢。
13．－What time is it now?几点了? －It’s eight thirty．8点半。
14．What time do you usually get up? 你通常几点起床?
15．What’s your favorite…? 你最喜欢的……是什么?
16．－why do you like．．．? 你为什么喜欢……? －Because it’s…这是因为……
17．When do you have math? 你什么时候上数学课?
18．What a funny time to eat breakfast! 吃早饭的时间很有意思!
19．It’s Tuesday，November 11th． 今天是11月11日，星期二。
考点精讲-
【重点单词短语】
1．be good with
be good with sb．意为“善于待人，与某人相处很好”。而be good with sth．意为“善于使用某物”。如：
He’s very good with kids．他很会照看孩子。
He’s very good with hands．他的手很巧。
适时点津
be good for意为“对……有好处”，反义词是be bad for意为“对……有害处”。
be good at意为“在……方面(学得，做得)好，擅长……”，近义词组为do well in。
活学活用
John is good children．
A．at B．for C．with D．in
解析：本题考查good和介词搭配的用法。be good with是“对某人很好，相处得好”的意思，be good at是“擅长……；在某方面有特长”的意思。be good for意为“对……有好处”的意思。
答案：C
2．put on
put on意为“穿上，戴上”，强调动作，后接代词宾格时，代词宾格只能放在on之前。如：
Please put on your socks． 请穿上袜子。 Put it on，please． 请把它穿上。
适时点津
in，wear，dress
(1)in是介词，表示“穿着，戴着”之意，后接表示衣服或颜色的词。
(2)wear意为”穿着，戴着”，表示状态，其宾语可以是衣帽，也可以是饰物、奖章等。
(3)dress常用人作宾语，意为“给……穿衣服”。在表示“自己穿衣”时可说get dressed或dress oneself。dress表示状态时，一般用be dressedin形式。dress up意为“穿上盛装，乔装打扮”。
活学活用
It’s raining outside! your raincoat，or you’ll get wet．
A．Wear B．Put on C．Dress
解析：根据语境，强调动作，穿上雨衣。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．How much are these pants?这些裤子多少钱?how much可以提问不可数名词，也可询问物品价格。询问价格时谓语动词根据后面的名词或数量决定。如：
How much coffee is there in the cup? 杯子里有多少咖啡?
How much are the apples? 这些苹果多少钱?
How much is the orange? 这些橘子汁多少钱?
适时点津
询问价格常用句式：How much is／are…?可替换为How much does／do…cost?或What’s the price of…?
活学活用
－ ?
－Oh，$5．It’s very cheap．
A．What time is it B． How many do you want
C．How much is it D．What’s wrong
解析：从答语“$5”可以看出问句是对价格提问。
答案：C
2．Can I help you?你想买点什么?Can I help you?相当于What can I do for you?这两个句型在英语中使用很广泛，在不同的场合有不同含义：如果你看见别人有麻烦时，你可以说Can I help you?(我可以帮助你吗?)；当饭店的服务员对顾客说这句话时，表示“你想吃点什么?”；当商店的售货员对顾客说这句话时，表示“你想买点什么?”；如果是图书馆的管理员对借书者说这句话时，表示“你要借什么书吗?”
－Can I help you?我可以帮助你吗?
－Thanks a lot．It’s very kind of you． 非常感谢，你太好了。
－Can I help you? 你想吃什么?
－I’d like a hamburger and a glass of milk． 我想要一个汉堡包和一杯牛奶。
活学活用
－ ?
－Yes,I want to buy some flowers for my mother．
A．Can I help you B．Can you help me
C．Are you ok D．Do you like it
解析：根据句意，判断是购物用语。你想买点什么?
答案：A
【巧辨异同】
1．a little
(1)a little修饰不可数名词，表示肯定意思，意为“一点儿，少量”。如：
There’s a little water in the glass．玻璃杯里有点水。
(2)a little还可以用作副词，修饰动词或形容词。如：
I like action movies a little．我有点喜欢动作片。
适时点津
little，a few与few
(1)little修饰不可数名词，表示“很少的，几乎没有的”，其反义词是much。
(2)a few用作定语，修饰可数名词，意为“少数的，几个，一些”，表示肯定。
(3)few意为“很少的，几乎没有的”，表示否定，其反义词为many。
活学活用
－Can you English?
－Yes，but just ．
A．say；a little B．speak；a little C．speak；a lot D．say；a lot
解析：说某种语言，可排除A或D，第二空根据but just可判断只会讲一点儿。
答案：B
2．介词for有多种用法，不同的场合有不同的意思。for的用法小结如下：
(1)表示对象、用途等，表示“为……”的意思。如：
You can buy a red skirt for your daughter．
Do you need a bag for sports?
(2)表示目的。如：
You should save money for the future．
He has gone back home for his glasses．
(3)表示等值或比例关系，常表示“以多少钱买或卖……”的意思。如：
He sold his old car for $500．
(4)表示时间、距离、数量等，表示“达，计……”的意思。如：
I won’t be here for too long．
They have been in the USA for many years．
(5)与名词或代词连用，后接动词不定式，构成名词短语。如：
It is important for US to look after our health．
The grapes are too high for the monkey to reach．
(6)表示原因，表示“由于，因为”的意思。如：
The West Lake is famous for its scenery．
(7)表示“至于，就……而言”的意思。如：
He is tall for a ten-year-old boy．
As for homework，most students do a lot of exercises every day．
(8)表示方向。如：
Mr Smith is leaving for California tomorrow．
活学活用
You can buy socks only $5 each．
A．in B on C．of D．for
解析：本题考查介词for的用法。for+价格意为“以多少钱买某物”。
答案：D
真题解析
真题1 (2011·凉山)John can play guitar，but he can’t play chess．
A．the；／ B．／：the C． the；the
解析：本题考查冠词的用法。表示“弹奏乐器”使用定冠词the，表示“下棋”不使用冠词。
答案：A
真题2 (2011·广安) －How much is the pair of shoes? －Twenty dollars enough。
A．is B．are C．am
解析：本题考查be动词的用法。根据句意，twenty dollars看成一个整体，表示单数概念，故用is。
答案：A
真题3 (2011·雅安)PIease tell the students too much noise in class．
A．to make B．to take C． not to take D．not to make
解析：本题考查不定式的用法。其句式结构肯定形式为：tell sb to do sth；否定形式为：tell sb not to do sth。句意为“请告诉学生们在课上不要发出太多噪声”。
答案：D
真题4 (2011·河源) －Has Mary been back? －Not yet．She will come back the evening of June ．
A．at；first B．to；thirtieth C． on；the twelfth D．on；the nineteen
解析：具体某一天的早、中、晚用介词on。第二个空考查日期的正确表达，要使用序数词。
答案：C
真题5 (2011·无锡) －There used to belots of fish in the lake． －Yes，but there are very now．
A．few B．fewer C．1ittle D．less
解析：very修饰形容词或副词原级；根据but there are…可知答案选A，few修饰可数名词复数(fish)。
答案：A
真题6 (2011·北海) －what’s your favorite。 ? －Summer．Because I can swim in rivers．
A．season B．subject C．music D．sport
解析：本题考查名词辨析。根据答语“Summer”一词可知答案。
答案：A
名师预测
( )1．－Have you ever listened to the song PrettyBoy?
－Yes．It really beautiful．All of us like it very much．
A．looks B．smells C．so Hnds D．tastes
( )2．－What time do you usually get up on weekends?
－ around eight．
A．At B．On C．In D．For
( )3．There some milk，two eggs and a few cakes on the table．
A．is ·B．are C has D．have
( )4．－Have you bought the digital camera?
－No.I can’t afford it．The price is a bit ．I think
A．low B．high C．cheap D．expensive
( )5．It’s raining outside． a raincoatwith you，please．Remember to it back tomorrow．
A．Bring；take B．Take；bring C ．Take；carry D．Take；take
同步训练2七年级(上)Units 7—12
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．I like comedies， I don’t like documentaries．
A．and B．but C．or D．then
( )2．—What is your favorite ? —Science．
A．sport B．movie C．subject D．food
( )3．They have a basketball game December 22nd．
A．in B．on C．at D．for
( )4．I can play football but I can’t play violin．
A．the；the B．a；the C．/ ；the D．the；/
( )5．Do you want some vegetables?
A．buy B．to buy C．buys D．buying
二、语篇填空
Dear Wei Fang,
I am very happy to get your letter．It’s very exciting to have a pen pal like you．I have many e-pals from different(1) (城市)．They often send me emails and tell me about(2)
(他们的)study．
I was born in(3) (六月)the sixth month of the year，and next(4) (星期四)is my birthday．I plan to ask you and some(5) (别的)friends to come to my small(6) (聚会)．These days I am very busy and(7) (累的)，because I have to get ready for the exam．We are going to have the exams in(8) (三)days．I have to study l0(9) (小时)every day．
Can you write and(10) (说)something about your life?
Yours．
Ming Shu
三、阅读短文，从所给词中选择合适的单词填空，使短文完整，通顺
English,boring,interesting,favorite,funny
I often go to movies with my friend，Mike．My(1) actor is Paul Jackson．
He has a(2) movie，My Father’s Birthday．It's a very(3) comedy．Mike likes the actor Rick Smith．He really likes his movie，Black September．It's a very successful thriller，but I think it’s(4) ．One new thing．Mike is(5) ，but he likes Beijing Opera!He often goes to see Beijing Opera on weekends．Mike’s father likes it，too!
四、句型转换
1．What time is it now?(改为同义句) the now?
2．I have some friends in Beijing．(改为否定句) I have friends in Beijin9．
3．Tom likes computer games because they’reingteresting．(就划线部分提问)
Tom computer games?
4．I like science and history．(改为否定句)I like science history．
5．She has lunch at twelve．(就划线部分提问) does she have lunch?
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·淄博)
Robby was 11 years old when his mother sent him to have his first piano lesson．I prefer that students begin at an earlier age，but Robby said 1 had always been his mother’s dream to hear him play the piano．So I took him on 2 my student．
Although Robby tried very hard， 3 he was not good at music．However，he continued and 4 the end of each weekly lesson he’d always say：“My mom is going to hear me play someday．”But it seemed hopeless．He didn’t have a talent for music．
One day，Robby stopped 5 to our lessons．He told me that his mom had been sick and unable to take him to piano lessons，but he was still practicing．He asked 6 he could take part in my concert and I agreed．
The night of the concert came．The high school gym 7 with parents，friends and relatives．The concert was going well．Then Robby came up on the stage，and began to play the piano．
He played 8 well that everyone was on their feet，clapping(鼓掌)excitedly．In tears，I ran up on the stage，“Oh，Robby ! 9 did you do it?”
“Well，Miss Green…remember I told you my mom was sick?Well．actually she had cancer and died this morning．And well…she was born deaf．So tonight was the 10 time she ever heard me play the piano．1 wanted to make it special．”
( )1．A．it B．it’s C that D．he
( )2．A．with B for C．in D．as
( )3．A．and B．but C．in D．so
( )4．A．in B．by C．to D．at
( )5．A．come B．to come C．coming D．came
( )6．A．why B．if C．when D．how
( )7．A．packed B．was packed C．were packed D．packing
( )8．A．so B．such C．very D．quite
( )9．A．Why B．How C．What D．When
( )10．A．good B．better C．best D．worst
二、任务型阅读
Elizabeth lived with her six children in a small house．One winter，there was a big flood(洪水)，and quite a few houses were washed away，but Elizabeth’s house was high enough to escape it．
Elizabeth helped one of the families which had lost everything．She shared her home until the family could build a new house．Elizabeth’s friends could not understand her since she already had so many children to take care．
“Well，”Elizabeth explained to her friends。“at the end of World WarⅡ，there was a poor woman in a town in England．Her husband had been killed in the war and she had a lot of children,just like me now．The day before Christmas，this woman said to her children，‘We won’t be able to have much for Christmas．I’m going to get just one present for us all．Now I’ll go and get it．’She came back with a little girl who had no parents．‘Here’s our present．’She said to her own children．The children were more than excited to get such a present．They welcomed the little girl warmly，and she grew up as their sister．I was that Christmas present．”
1．How many children did Elizabeth have?
2．What did Elizabeth do after the flood?
3．The Christmas present was Elizabeth herself．wasn’t it?
4．What do you learn from the story?
三、书面表达
暑假就要到了，John想应聘一份做老师的社会实践工作，请你根据提示帮他设计一份60～80同的应聘信。要点如下：
(1)想得到这份工作，自我形象介绍。
(2)他的能力：会说英语，擅长运动。如篮球、足球、游泳等。
(3)去年暑假他曾经在少年宫任过老师，带孩子们练过英语，和孩子们相处得很好。
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 CAABB
【同步训练2】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 BCBCB
二、1．cities 2．Their 3．June 4．Thursday 5．Other 6．party 7．tired 8．three 9．hours l0．say
三、l．favorite 2．funny 3．interesting 4．Boring 5．English
四、l．What’s，time 2．don’t，any 3．Why does，1ike 4．don’t，or 5．What time
[能力提升]
一、1—5 ADCDC 6—10 BBABC
二、1．She had six children． 2．She helped one of the families which had lost everything．(She shared her home until the family could build a new house．
3．Yes，it was． 4．We should try to help those who are in trouble．
三、One possible version：
Hello．my name is John．I am a student from NO．4 Middle School．I am a lovely boy．I am in Class Six，Grade Seven.
I like English and I often help my classmates．I am good at sports，such as playing basketball，playing football and swimming．I think sports can make us strong．
Last year I once worked in the Children’s Palace．I taught children English．We got on well with each other．I loved them and they loved me．
If I get the job，I believe I can do it well．
第3讲七年级(下)Units l—6
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．live(v．)居住→living(adj．)活着的→lively(adj．)活泼的，有生气的→alive(口力．)活着的
2．hunger(n．)饥饿→hungry(adj．)饥饿的
3．begin(v．)开始→start(v．同义词) →beginning(n．)开始
4．ugly(adj．)丑陋的→beautiful(adj．反义词)漂亮的
5．friend(n．)朋友→friendly(adj．)友好的→unfriendly(adj．反义词)不友好的
【重点短语】
1．write to sb．给某人写信 2．post office邮局 3．pay phone投币电话
4．across from在……对面 5．next to紧挨 6．in front of在……前面
7．on the right／left在右／左边 8．go straight笔直走 9．turn left／right向左／右转
10．welcome to sp． 欢迎来某地 11．take a walk散步 12．the beginning of……的开始
13．have fun玩得开心 14．let sb．do sth． 让某人做某事．
15．have a good trip旅途愉快 16．during the day在白天 17．at night在晚上
18．kind of有几分 19．between．．．and．．． 在……和……两者之间
20．the way to…去……的路 21．tell sb．about sth． 告诉某人关于某事
22．in the neighborhood在附近 23．want to be想要成为
24．work with… 与……打交道 25．talk with／to sb．about sth． 和／对某人谈某事
26．give sth．to sb．／give sb．sth． 给某人某物
27．get sth．from sb． 从某人那里拿某物 28．be busy doing sth． 忙于做某事
29．go out to dinners出去吃饭 30．work for sb．as．．． 作为……为某人工作
31．work hard努力工作 32．want sb．to do sth． 想让某人干某事
33．talk on the phone电话聊天 34．wait for sb．等待某人
35．thanks for(doing)sth． 感谢(做)某事 36．in order to为了 37．pretty good相当好
38．on vacation度假 39．take photos拍照 40．1ie on the beach躺在沙滩上
41．play beach volleyball打沙滩排球 42．have a good time过得愉快
【重点句型】
1．－Where’s your pen pal from? 你的笔友来自哪里?
－He’s from Australia． 他来自澳大利亚。
2．－what language do you speak? 你说哪一种语言? --I speak English． 我说英语。
3．－Where does he live? 他居住在哪里? 一He lives in Paris． 他住在巴黎。
4．Does she have brothers or sisters? 她有兄弟姐妹吗?
5．－Is there a bank near here? 附近有银行吗?
－Yes，there is．It’s on Center Street． 是的，它在中心街上。
6．－Where’s the post office? 邮局在哪里?
－It’s next to／across from．．． 它在……隔壁／对面。
7．Just go straight and turn left． 只要一直往前走，然后向左转。
8．It is a very busy street． 这是条很繁忙的街道。
9．－Why do you like…? 你为什么喜欢……?
－Because it’s／they’re．．． 这是因为它／它们……
10．What other animals do you like? 你还喜欢其他的什么动物?
11．－What do you do? 你是干什么的? --1’m a doctor． 我是一个医生。
12．－Where does your sister work? 你姐／妹在哪里工作?
－She works in… 她在……工作。
13．－What do you want to be? 你想成为什么? －I want to be a／an．．．我想成为一名……
14．－Why do you want to be a／an．．． 你为什么想当……?
－Because it’s a／an．．．job．因为这是一项……的工作。
15．－What are you doing? 你正在干什么? －I ant watching TV． 我正在看电视。
16．－when do you want to go? 你想几点出发? －Let’s go at… 让我们……点出发吧。
17．－Where is he swimming? 他在哪里游泳? －At the pool． 在游泳池。
18．－How’s the weather in．．．?／What’S the weather like in．．．? 某地气候怎么样?
－It’s sunny／cloudy／windy． 晴朗／多云／刮风。
19．－How’s it going? 进展如何?
－It’s great／not bad／terrible． 很好／不错／糟糕透了。
20．－What do you usually do when it’s raining?当天下雨时，你通常干什么?
－I usually read a book． 我通常看书。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．be from
be from意为“来自于……”，相当于come from，但come为实义动词，句子变化时应借助于助动词。
活学活用
Where is your pen pal from?(改为同义句)
Where your pen pal ?
解析：本题考查befrom和comefrom的区别用法，使用动词come时，第三人称作主语，在问句中应加助动词does。
答案：does；come from
2．in front of
in front of通常指物体或人位于另外的物体外部的前面。如：
There are some trees in front of the house．房子的前面有一些树。
活学活用
in the front of指在某个物体本身或范围之内的前部。如：
The girl is standing in the front of the bus．这个女孩站在公共汽车前部(在车内)。霹期
－Why are you standing there，Maggie?
－I can't see the blackboard clearly．Two tall boys are sitting me．
A．behind B．in front of C．beside D．next to
解析：根据句意：有两个男孩坐在我的前面，所以我看不清。
答案：B
3．have fun
have fun意为“玩得高兴，过得愉快”，相当于have a good time或enjoy oneself。
适时点津
have fun doing sth．意为“高兴地做某事”。
活学活用
－I’m going to sanya for the summer holiday．
－ !
A．Have 8good time B．Well done C．Best wishes to you D．Thanks a lot
解析：本题考查交际用语，A选项意为“祝旅行愉快”，符合语境。
答案：A
【重点句型】
1．What does he do?他是干什么的?“What+do／does+主语+do?”可用来询问某人的职业或身份。如：What do you do?你干什么工作?
适时点津
询问职业还可用：
(1)What+be+主语?如：What，S he?他是做什么的?
(2)What+be+one’s+job?如：What is his father’s job?他父亲是干什么的?
活学活用
－What your father ?
－He is a teacher．
A does；do B．is；doing C．are；do D．do；do
解析：根据回答“他是一名老师”判断是询问职业，故选A。
答案：A
2．there be句型
“There is／are+某物／人+某地／时”结构表示“某地／时有某物／人”。句中的be(is／are)和后面的名词在数方面必须保持一致。there be结构的一般现在时的基本句型如下：
肯定句：There is／are+…
否定句：There is／are+not+…
一般疑问句：Is／Are+there+…?
肯定回答：Yes，there is／are．
否定回答：No，there isn’t／aren’t．
适时点津
there be句式符合“就近原则”，there be句式中的be的形式往往根据第一个主语的单复数来确定动词be的形式。 ．
活学活用
－Have you got some water to drink?
－Here you are．There still some in thebottle．
A．are B．has C．is D．have
解析：本题考查there be句型。water为不可数名词。故be动词选用is。
答案：C
【巧辨异同】
辨析：pay，cost。spend，take
(1)pay用于以下结构：
①pay sb．付钱给某人 ②pay sb．for sth．／pay sb．sth．为某物而付钱给某人
③pay some money for sth．为……而付款 ④pay for sth．为……而付款，偿付
(2)cost只能用物或事作主语，而不可用人作主语，常用于sth．costs sb．some money或sth．costssome money结构中。
(3)spend的主语必须是人，常用于spend time／money on sth．或spend time／money(in)doing sth．结构中，其中in可省略。
(4)take主要指花费时间，其常见结构为：It takes sb．some time to do sth．，it在此作形式主语，真正的主语是后面的不定式to do sth．。
活学活用
I bought some CDs for my friend and they me$30．
A．spent B．paid C．cost D．took
解析：they指前面的some CDs，表示“花费”，且主语是物而不是人时，应用cost。
答案：C
真题剖析
真题1(2011·南充) －How，s it going? －
A．It’s great B．You are welcome C Thanks a lot
解析：本题考查情景交际。问句意为“近况如何?”，回答“很好”。
答案：A
真题2(2011·湘剐The of most trees will fall in autumn．
A．1eaf B．1eafs C．leaves
解析：本题考查名词复数的用法。根据句意：秋天，大多数的树叶都会落。leaf的复数形式为leaves。
答案：C
真题3(2011·湘潭) －Excuse me．Isthere a hank near here?
－No， ．But you can find one in Zhongshan Road．
A．there isn’t B．it isn’t C．they aren’t
解析：本题考查there be否定句的用法。根据句意：一请问，这附近有银行吗?一不，没有。但中山路上有一个。there is的否定句直接加not，或简写为there isn’t。
答案：A
真题4(2011·北海)David usually takes 一walk for an hour after dinner．
A．a B ．an C．the D．／
解析：本题考查冠词的用法。take a walk意为“散步”，是固定搭配。
答案：A
真题5(2011·凉山)My pa。rents oftenask me too much time computergames．
A． not to spend；playing B．not to spend；to play C．to not spend；play
解析：本题考查非谓语动词的用法。根据asksb．not to do sth．和spend time(in)doing sth．结构可知答案选A。
答案：A
名师预测
( )1．Don’t worry．Let me you．
A． helping B． helps C．to help D．help
( )2．－ at this season of the year in the north?
－It’s much hotter than last year．The high temperature has lasted for days．
A．How are things going
B．How are you getting on
C．What’S the weather like
D．What do you do
( )3．The American student could speak only Chinese，but he managed to communicate with US．
A．few B．little C．a few D．a little
( )4．I like flowers．I’m going to buy a house a small garden in front of it．
A．in． B．near C．with D．between
( )5．一Is the woman a teacher? 一Yes，she teaches English．
A．you B．US C．our D．your
同步训练3七年级(下)Units l—6
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．—Can you French? —Yes，but only ．
A．speak；a little B．talk；much C．say；a little D．speak；much
( )2．Look!There a bank and two pay phones near here．
A．have B．has C．are D．is
( )3．Koalas are from Australia．They’re cute．
A．a kind of B．kinds of C．kind of D．all kinds of
( )4．—Excuse me．Can you tell me the way the hospital? —Go along this street，it's your right
A．to；on B．to；in C． of；on D．in；in
( )5．Tom likes very much and he can very well．
A．drawing；draws B．drawing；drawing
C．to draw；draw D．to draw；drawing
( )6．—Let’s to the movies now． —That great．
A．go；sound B．go；sounds C．going；sound D．going；sounds
( )7．—How’s your family vacation going?— ．One of my sisters is lost．We can’t find her．
A．Terrible B．Not bad C．Pretty good D．Great
( )8．Mr Zhang，thank you very much for me math so well．
A．teach B．to teach C．teaching D．teaches
二、语篇填空
I am Li Lei．I am a student in No．10 Middle School．I (1) (住)in Linhai，Zhejiang．My house is on Jinshan Avenue．
There is a big(2) (超市)near my house．It is“CBEST”．It has a lot of things．You can buy many things，like pens，rulers and exercise books．You can also buy drinks，fruits，and all(3)
(种)of food．
Some of them are cheap，but(4) (另外的)are expensive．It is(5) (营业的)every day from 9：00 a．m．to 9：00 p．m．
The workers in it are very(6) (友好)to us．They wear beautiful uniforms，so they(7) (看起来)cool．They work(8) (努力)all day．They can help you to find what you want．The“CBEST”is full of people on weekends．It is a very interesting place．The people are really very(9) (放松)．Look!Today many people are(10) (购物)there!So let’s go to the supermarket!
三、用所给单词的适当形式填空
1．I like (elephant)，because they are very cute．
2．Jimmy (come)from Australia．But he can speak very good Chinese．
3．Tony，let’s go (shop)．OK?
4．My grandparents want (take)a walk after supper．
5．Listen，who is (sing)in the next room?
[能力提升]
一、完形填空
Here is an e-mail from Hu Dong to Tom．
Hello，Tom!Nice to read l ．My name is Hu Dong．I’m a 2 boy from Beijing．Beijing is the capital of 3 ．It is big and nice．There are many universities in Beijing．I’m a student in Beijing University．There are 4 foreign students in our university．They 5 hard．
I’m 6 English now．I want 7 English with foreigners， 8 I find it very difficult．I know English words，but I can’t speak English well．I don’t know why．Can you help me?
I am 9 to know you are 10 to China soon．Then we can talk about everything in English．
( )1．A．his letter B．your e-mail C．my letter D．his e-mail
( )2．A．Chinese B．China C．Australia D．Australian
( )3．A．Chinese B．China C．our D．we
( )4．A．one B．many C．any D．a
( )5．A．play B．works C．are work D．study
( )6．A．1earn B．1earning C．work D．to work
( )7．A．speak B．to speak C．say D．to say
( )8．A．or B．but C．and D．so
( )9．A．happy B．well C．fine D．sorry
( )10．A．go B．going C．come D．coming
二、阅读理解
This is a beautiful park．Most people like to go to the park after work or at the weekend．Some of them go to the park every day．Look!This is Ms Black．She is sitting under a tree and watching the birds flying in the tree．Many children are playing the game of hide_and seek under the tree，too．Some boys are playing with yo-yo．Some women are singing and dancing near a
small river in the park．We can see some boats in the river．The boats are like ducks．This"is really a nice park．I come here to read English after school every day．But today I am boating with my parents here．I am so happy．
( )1．Most people like to go to the park
A．every day B．after work C．on weekends D．B and C
( )2．Ms Black is watching
A．the birds under the tree B．the birds in the tree
C．the children under the tree D．the children in the tree
( )3．The writer can’t see in the park．
A．ducks B．children C．women D．men
( )4．What are the writer’s parents doing now?
A．They are singing． B．They are reading English．
C．They are boatin9． D．They are dancing．
( )5．Which one is WRONG?
A．The writer is having a good time today．
B．The writer likes the park very much．
C．The writer isn’t reading English now．
D．The writer comes to the park to read English before school is over．
三、任务型阅读
Who makes your lunches?Who takes care of you when you are sick?Who is always there for you?
It’s your mother．That’s why there is a special dayfor mothers around the world．This year it is on May 9．
There are many ways to celebrate Mother’s Day．Lots of people buy gifts and carnations for their mothers．In the language of flowers，carnations mean happiness and love．
1．Your makes your lunches．
2． is a special day for mothers a round the world．
3．In the language of flowers，carnations mean and ．
( )4．We can infer that the writer won’t for her mother on Mother’s Day．
A．make breakfast B．do housework C．make a card D．dress up
四、书面表达
Mary一家人正在海南旅游，如果你是Mary，请给你的好友Dick寄上一张照片并写一封信告诉他：你在哪里；你和家人分别在做什么；那里天气怎样；感受如何。要求：语言通顺，流畅；正确运用书信的格式及表达；不少于60词。
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 DCDCB
【同步训练3】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 ADCAC 6—8 BAC
二、1．live 2．Supermarket 3．kinds 4．Others 5．open 6．friendly 7．look 8．hard 9．Relaxed 10．shopping
三、l．elephants 2．comes 3．Shopping 4．to take 5．singing
[能力提升]
一、1—5 BABBD 6—l0BBBAD
二、1—5 DBACD
三、1．mother 2．Mother’s Day 3．happiness，love 4．D
四、0ne possible version：
Dear Dick，
I’m in Hainan on vacation with my family．The weather is sunny．And it’s very hot now．We are on the beach．My mother and my sister are playing games．My brother is swimming in the sea．My father is lying on a chair and watching them．What am I doing ? Look!I’m drawing a picture．We are all having a good time．
Yours，
Mary
第4讲七年级(下)Units 7—12
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．practice(v．)练习，训练→practice(n．)练习(不可数)，实践
2．decide(v．)决定，下决→6-+decision(n．)决定，决心
3．agree(v．)同意，赞成→agreement(n．)同意，意见一致
disagree(v．)不同意→disagreement(n．)意见不一致
4．thin(adj．)瘦的，苗条的→heavy／fat(adj．反义词)胖的
5．suggest(v．)建议→suggestion(n．)建议，意见
6．expensive(adj．)昂贵的→cheap(adj．反义词)便宜的
7．loud(adj．)声音大的→quiet(adj．反义词)安静的→noisy(adj．同义词)
loudly(adv．)大声地→aloud(adv．)高声地，大声地
【重点短语】
1．1ook like看起来像 2．medium build／height中等身材／高度
3．short curly blonde hair金色的短卷发 4．love to do sth． 喜欢做某事
5．a little bit一点儿 6．tell iokes开玩笑
7．stop doing sth． 停止做某事 8．wear glasses戴着眼镜
9．have a beard留着胡子 10．have a new look有一个新面貌
11．not…any more不再…… 12．a bowl of beef noodles一碗牛肉面
13．go to the beach去海滩 14．study for a test为考试复习
15．on Sunday morning在星期日上午 16．do some readin9阅读
17．stay at home待在家里 18．play computer games玩电脑游戏
19．practice doing sth． 练习做某事 20．go to the mountains去爬山
21．talk show谈话节目 22．go for a walk去散步23．play sports做运动
24．on vacation度假 25．go to summer camp去夏令营
26．study for exams为考试而学习 27．visit museums参观博物馆
28．have fun doing sth． 做某事有乐趣
29．find sb．doing sth． 发现某人正在做某事
30．make sb．do sth． 使某人做某事
31．decide to do sth．决定做某事 32．think of认为
33．game show游戏节目 34．in fact事实上，实际上
35．enjoy doing sth． 喜欢做某事 36．a thirteen-year-old boy一个l 3岁的男孩
37．arrive late for class上课迟到 38．wear a uniform穿校服
39．no talkin9不要说话 40．have to do sth． 不得不做某事
41．eat in the dining hall在餐厅吃东西
【重点句型】
1．－What does he look like? 他长什么样子?
－He is of medium build，and he has short hair．他中等身材，一头短发。
2．I don’t think he is so great． 我认为他没有这么好。
3．She doesn’t wear pants any more． 她不再穿长裤了。
4．－What kind of noodles would you like? 你想要哪一种面?
－I’d like beef and tomato noodles，please． 我想要西红柿牛肉面。
5．－What size bowl of．．．would you like? 你想要多大碗的……?
－I’d like a large bowl of… 我想要一份大碗的……
6．What size do you have? 你们有哪几种尺寸的?
7．－How was your weekend? 你的周末过得怎么样?
－It was great．／It was OK!／It wasn’t very good．很好。／还可以。／不是很好。
8．What did you do last weekend?上周末你做了什么?
9．What／How about…? 那……呢?
10．It’s time to go home． 该回家了。
11．Where did you go on vacation'? 你去了哪里度假?
12．How was your vacation? 你假期过得怎么样?
13．－What do you think of．．．? 你认为……怎么样?
－I love／like them．／I don’t mind／like them．／I can’t stand them． 我爱／喜欢它们。／我不在乎／喜欢它们。／我无法容忍它们。
14．Don’t eat in class． 上课不能吃东西。
15．－Do you have to wear a uniform at school? 你在学校必须要穿校服吗?
－Yes，I do．／No，I don’t． 是的，必须穿。／不，不一定。
16．－What else do you have to do? 你还必须做什么?
－We have to clean the classroom． 我们必须打扫教室。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．stop
(1)动词，意为“停止，使停止；阻止”。如：
We stopped eating．我们停止吃东西。
They stopped me going out of the door．他们阻止我出门。
(2)名词，意为“汽车站”。如：
He is waiting for you at the bus stop．他在公共汽车站等你。
适时点津
stop to do sth．表示“停下来去做另外一件事情”；
stop doing sth．表示“停止正在做的事情”。
活学活用
Since June lst last year，all the supermarkets have free plastic bags．
A．to stop to provide B．to stop providing
C．stopped to provide D．stopped providing
解析：根据“自从去年6月份以来”，可以判断句子时态为现在完成时，并非have to结构，故可排除A和B。stop doing sth．意为“停止做某事”，stop to do sth．意为“停 下来去做某事”，由句意可知应选stop doing sth．。
答案：D
2．make n使，迫使，促使，做，制作
The teacher made the noisy boy stand up．老师迫使那个吵闹的男孩站起来。
The fried food makes me sick．油炸的食品使我恶心。
适时点津
make sb．stb．= make sth．for sb．为某人制作某物
make sb．do sth．让某人干某事make+宾语+宾补(宾补为形容词，名词或介词短语)使处于某种状态，使成为
活学活用
What do you think her ?
A．make；sad B．makes sadly C．made；sad D．made sadly
解析：make+宾语+形容词，可排除B和D，A中动词的形式是原形，不符合。
答案：C
3．would like意为“想要”，具体用法如下：
(1)would like(sb．)to do sth．一want(sb．)to dosth．想要(某人)做某事。如：
We’d like to go for a picnic next Sunday．=We
want to go for a picnic next Sunday．下周日我们想去野餐。
(2)Would you like sth．?你想要某物吗?表示客气的请求，句中用some而不用any。肯定回答为“Yes，please．”，否定回答为“No，thanks．”。如：
一Would you like some coffee? 来点咖啡吧?
一Yes，please． 好的。
(3)Would you like to do sth．?你想做某事吗?
表示提建议，其肯定答语为“Yes，I’d love／like to．”，否定回答为“I’d love／like to，but I…”(说明具体原因以拒绝)。如：
－Would you like to go shopping with me?和我去买东西好吗?
－Sure，I’d love to． 当然好，我乐意去。
－Would you like to play soccer with us? 和我们一起踢足球好吗?
－I’d love to，but I have too much homework to do．我想去，但我有太多的作业要做。
活学活用
－Would you like some more soup?
－ ．It is delicious，but I’ve had enough．
A．Yes，please B．No，thank you C．Nothing more D．I’d like some
解析：句型“Would you like sth．?”的肯定回答为：“Yes,please．”，否定回答为：“No，thanks．”根据“but I’ve had enough”，本题应选B。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．－what does your friend look like? 你的朋友长什么样?
－She is of medimn build。and she has long hair．她中等身材，留着长发。
这个句型用于询问人的外部特征，回答时常用高矮、胖瘦、中等个、大眼睛、高鼻子等。既可用“主语+系动词+形容词”句式，也可用“主语+have／has+名词”句式，意为“某人长着……”。如：
－What does your brother look like?你哥哥长得怎么样?
－He is tall and thin． 他又高又瘦。
适时点津
询问人的外部特征，也可用句式What is／are sb．like?但What is／are sb．1ike?句式除用于询问人的外部特征外，还可用来询问人的性格。如：
－What’s your sister like? 你妹妹什么性格?
－She is outgoing． 她很外向。
活学活用
－What does the lady look like?
－ 。
A．She’s fine and well B．She’s really a nice lady
C．She’s tall and thin D．She likes wearing skirts
解析：问句是问长相如何，故C符合语境。
答案：C
【巧辨异同】
have to与must
(1)have to意为“不得不，只好”，主要强调的是外界客观因素，可用于多种时态(一般不用于进行时态)，且有人称和数的变化。如：
It’s raining hard．We have to stop．雨下得很大，我们不得不停下来。
(2)must表示说话人主观认为“应该，必须”，它无人称、数和时态的变化。
适时点津
must的否定形式是在其后加not(即mustn’t)，表示“不准，严禁”。而have to的否定式don’t／doesn't／didn’t have to或have not to表示“不必”。
活学活用
－Could you come to the party this weekend?
－I’m afraid I can’t join you．I look aftermy grandma．
A．used to B have to C．prefer to D．belong to
解析：根据答句“恐怕我不能参加，因为我必须照顾我奶奶”，说明应用表示有客观原因的have to。
答案：B
真题剖析
真题1(2011·北海)Xu Qian is a funnygirl．She loves to jokes．
A．speak B．say C．tell D．talk
解析：本题考查动词辨析。tell jokes(讲笑话)是固定搭配。
答案：C
真题2 (2011·广安) －What do you usually do at weekends?
－I often practice English．
A．speak B．to speak C．speaking
解析：本题考查动词用法。practice doing sth．(练习干某事)是固定搭配。
答案：C
真题3(2011·北海)The movie is too scary．I can’t it．
A．stand B．see C．have D．play
解析：本题考查动词辨析。句意：电影太恐怖了，我忍受不了。stand在句子中是“忍受”之意。
答案：A
真题4(2011·南充)Class is be9’inning．Please stop ．
A．talking B．to talk C．talk
解析：本题考查非谓语动词。stop to do sth．意为“停下来(正在做的事)去做其他事”。stop doing sth．意为“停止正在做的事”。句意：上课了，请停止说话。
答案：A
真题5(2011·湘潭)The movie Mr．Bean made US a lot last night．
A．laugh B．laughed C．to laugh
解析：本题考查make sb．do(让某人做某事)的用法。根据题意：昨晚的电影《憨豆先生》让我们笑声连连。
答案：A
名师预测
用所给单词的适当形式填空，每个单词限用一次。
stay，rule，talk，heavy，tomato
1．It was raining last Sunday．I at home all day．
2．Tom eats too much meat，So he is getting kind of ．
3．There are too many for me at home．
4．I’d like some beef and noodles．
5．No !The children are having a lesson．
同步训练4七年级(下)Units 7—12
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．He stopped because he is tired．
A．work B．to work C．working D．worked
( )2．Please remember the door when you come in．It is cold outside．
A．opening B．to open C．to close D．closing
( )3．Every day he listen to the teacher in class．
A．has to B．have to C．must to D．can to
( )4．My mother said to me，“Tom， in bed．’’
A．not read B doesn’t read C．don’t read D．no read
( )5．Emily practices guitar on saturday morning．
A to play B．playing C．play D．playing the
( )6．I like wearing in hot summer．
A．a glass B．glass C．some glasses D．glasses
( )7．The show is boring．She it．
A doesn’t like B．doesn’t stand C．loves D．don’t mind
( )8．—What does he look like? —He is of ．
A．good B．shy C．beard D．medium height
二、用方框中单词的适当形式填空。使短文意思正确。连
贯(每个单词限用一次)
do，one，help，leave，be，can，see，child，have，year
Mrs Smith had a good vacation last month．She took her children to the beach．
She(1) five children．John，the oldest，is fifteen(2) old and little Rose，the baby，is only two．
That was the(3) time for the children to go to the seaside．They(4) very happy．
John(5) his mother look after the other children，and so (6) Mary．She is thirteen years old．
It was a fine day．They got up very early because they wanted(7) home soon after breakfast．They made the journey by bus．
They arrived at the seaside town early in the afterrloon，and when they arrived，the(8) asked if they(9) go down to the beach and see the sea at once．When they(10) the sea，they were very happy．
三、用所给单词的适当形式填空
1．Xiao Liang enjoys (take)a walk．
2．Would you mind my (sing)songs here?
3．Can you please (come)in?
4．Let Jill (play)baseball with us．
5．Everyone (be)here．
四、单句改错(下列各句四个选项中均有一处错误，请选出并改正)
( )1．Would you like any beef'?
A B C D
( )2．I’d like tomatoes and potatos．
A B C D
( )3．What size of bowl noodles would you like?
A B C D
( )4．There is many cheese on the pizza．
A B C D
( )5．I would like have a rest．
A B C D
[能力提升]
一、完形填空
Some years ago．I l in a middle school in a big town,I liked 2 very much．And l was good 3 it． 4 I was free，1 went to 5 small river near the school and wanted to catch 6 fish．But there 7 few， 8 the water in the river was 9 dirty．But I really liked fishing．So one summer．er vacation I went 10 the seaside 11 stayed at a small hotel．
12 the first morning．I caught l3 fish and I was so happy．I gave l4 to the hotel。and the cook there l 5 them for all the people staying in the hotel．They were very happy to eat such fresh fish．
( )1．A．work B．works C．worked D．working
( )2．A．fishing B．fishes C．to fish D．fish
( )3．A．of B．for C．in D．at
( )4．A．What B．When C．Where D．How
( )5．A．an B．the C．a D．／
( )6．A．any B．much C．some D．other
( )7．A．was B．is C．were D．are
( )8．A．so B．because C．but D．and
( )9．A．more B．much C．very D．many
( )10．A．for B．with C．from D．to
( )11．A．and B．so C．or D．but
( )12．A．To B．With C．on D．At
( )13．A．a lot of B．more C．much D．a lot
( )14．A．it B．them C．they D．its
( )15．A cook B．cooking C．cooked D．to cook
二、任务型阅读
Many boys and girls like to watch 7’V And they usually spend some time(a) TV every day．I asked some children something about TV shows．Here
are their likes and dislikes：
Jenny likes Healthy Living．She says it’s very interesting．Her sister Cindy doesn’t like it．She likes Sports News．She thinks it’s very exciting．Bob likes
Chinese Cookin9．He likes Chinese food very much．Alan can’t stand Chinese Cooking．(b)He thinks cooking is for moms．He loves Animal World．Oh，last month Alan joined CCTV’s Animal World．(c)He went to South Africa with the host．There he Saw lots of elephants．
根据短文内容，完成下列任务。
1．选择适当的词填入(a)处。 ( )
A．watches B．watched C．watching
2．将画线部分(b)译为汉语。
3．将画线部分(c)改为否定句。
4．根据短文内容回答问题。
(1)What does Cindy like?
(2)What did Alan see in South Africa?
5．根据短文内容，判断句子的正(T)误(F)。
( )Many children don’t like to watch TV．
( )Bob likes Chinese Cooking．
三、书面表达
假如你是Bill，在Green High School上学。请你结合表格内容给新结识的笔友Jill发一封电子邮件，介绍你的外貌、爱好、学校生活等，可适当发挥。70词左右。 。
外貌
tall，medium build，short black hair
爱好
soccer，computer games
学校生活
seven classes a day，play with friends after class
答案
【名师预测】
1．stayed 2．heavy 3．rules 4．tomato 5．talking
【同步训练4】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 CCACD 6—8 DAD
二、1．has 2．years 3．first 4．were 5．Helped 6．did 7．to 1eave 8．children 9．could l0．saw
三、1．taking 2．Singing 3．come 4．play 5．is
四、1．D，some 2．D，potatoes 3．C，bowl of 4．B，much 5．A，would like to
[能力提升]
一、1—5 CADBC 6--10 CCBCD 11—15 ACABC
二、l．C 2．他认为烹饪是妈妈们的事。 3．He didn’t go to South Africa with the host．4．(1)Sports News． (2)A lot of elephants． 5．F，T
三、0ne possible version：
Dear Jill，
How are you?
Now let me tell you something about myself．I’m a student in Green High School．I’m tall and of medium build．I have short black hair．I like playing
soccer very much．After school I often play soccer with my friends．I also like playing computer games．
I have seven classes a day from Monday to Friday．Class starts at eight o’clock．I have four classes in the morning and three in the afternoon．After class I play with my friends．I like all the subjects．
Yours，
Bill
第5讲八年级(上)Units l—2
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．exercise(v．) →exercise(n．)锻炼，运动
2．about(adv．)大约→about(prep．)关于
3．drink(v．)喝→drink(n．)饮料
4．health(n．)健康→healthy(adj．)健康的
5．grade(n．)分数→grade(n．)年级
6．different(adj．)不同的→differently(adv．)不同地
7．cold(n．)感→cold(adj．)冷的
8．back(n．)背→back(adj．)后面的
9．illness(n．)疾病→ill(adj．)生病的
10．traditional(adj．)传统的；惯例的→tradition(n．)传统
11．angry(adj．)生气的→anger(n．)生气
12．western(adj．)西方的→west(n．)西方
13．important(adj．)重要的→importance(n．)重要性
【重点短语】
1．how often多久一次 2．hardly ever几乎不 3．twice a week一星期两次
4．once a month一个月一次 5．three or four times a week一个星期三四次
6．as for至于7．drink milk喝牛奶 8．be good for。 对……有利
9．junk food垃圾食品 10．eating habits饮食习惯 11．get good grades取得好成绩
12．try to do sth． 尽力做某事 13．keep in good health保持健康
14．have a cold感冒 15．have a sore back背疼 16．have a stomachache肚子疼
17．have a fever发烧 18．see a dentist看牙医 19．two days a90两天前
20．too much太多 21．be stressed out有压力的
【重点句型】
1．How often do you exercise?你多久锻炼一次?
2．But my mother wants me to drink milk．She says it’s good for my health．
但是我妈妈要我喝牛奶。 她说这有利于我的健康。
3．My health lifestyle helps me get good grades．健康的生活方式帮助我取得好成绩。
4．A lot of vegetables and fruits help you to keep ingood health．多吃蔬菜水果有助于保持健康。
5．－What’s the matter with you?你怎么啦? －I have a sore throat．我喉咙痛。
6．You should lie down and rest．你应该躺下休息。
7．I’m not feeling well．我感觉不舒服。
8．I hope you feel better soon,我希望你早点康复。
9．Eating Dangshen and Huangqi is also good for this．吃党参和黄芪对这点也有好处。
10．Chinese medicine is now popular in western countries．现在中医在西方国家很受欢迎。
11．It's important to eat a balanced diet．平衡饮食很重要。
12．I’m sorry to hear that．听说那样的事我很难过。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．how often多久一次。是对频率进行提问。
－How often do you exercise? 你多久锻炼一次?
－I exercise four times a week．我一周锻炼四次。
适时点津，
表示频率并回答how often的词还有：always，never，sometimes，usually等。如：
He learns to sing all by himself．He never goes to any training class．他自学唱歌。他从未去过任何培训班级。
活学活用
(2011·北京) －do you play football? － once a week．
A．How much B．How long C．How often D．How far
解析：本题考查疑问副词词组，根据答句可以判断出是询问动作发生的频率，故选C。
答案：C
2．hardly adv．几乎不
hardly本身具有否定意义，表示频率。如：I hardly ever go skateboarding．我几乎不去踩滑板。
适时点津
hardly在句中一般位于实义动词之前，助动词、情态动词和系动词之后。如：
He liked piano very much，but he could hardly afford to buy one．他很爱钢琴，但却买不起。
活用活用
(2010·荆门) －Does Antonia always finish his homework on time?
－Yes．of course．He leaves today’s homework for tomorrow．
A．also B．hardly C．only D．usually
解析：本题考查副词。根据答句可以判断出Antonia一直是按时完成作业的，几乎没有把作业留到第二天。
答案：B
3．should情态动词，意为“应该”
should用于表示劝告或推荐，shouldn’t意为“不应该”。如：
You should lie down and rest．你应该躺下休息。
适时点津
表示建议的句型还有：why not…?What／How about…?You’d better…如：
How about going to the movie?去看电影怎么样?
活学活用
(2011·哈尔滨)In order to speak English better。we be afraid of losing face．Because themost important thing is to practice．Remember，practice makes perfect．
A．should B．shouldn’t C．have to
解析：本题考查情态动词。句意：为了说好英语，我们不应当害怕丢面子。故用shouldn’t。
答案：B
4．although conj．尽管
although引导的从句放在主句前后均可，有时还可放在句中，但它不能和but同时出现。如：He often helps me with my English although he is quite busy．尽管他相当忙，但是还常常帮我学英语。
适时点津
though也可以表示“尽管”，但一般不放在句首。
活学活用
(2011·杭州)I really enjoyed your lecture，there were some parts I didn’t quite understand．
A．because B．unless C．though D．after
解析：本题考查连词的用法。由后句句意“有一些我不理解的”和前句句意“我真的很喜欢你的讲座”可判断为转折关系。
答案：C
【重点句型】
1．She says it’s good for my health．她说这对我身体有
好处。
(1)be good for…意为“对……有好处”，当主语是动词时，用动名词形式。如：
Eating Dangshen and Huang qi is good for yourhealth．吃党参和黄芪对身体有好处。
(2)be bad for…意为“对……不利”。
Watching TV too much is bad for your eyes．电视看太多对眼睛不利。
适时点津
be good at…意为“擅长于……”，be good to…意为“对……友好”。如：
My brother is good at swimming．我哥哥擅长于游泳。
You should be good to the kids．你应该善待孩子。
活学活用
(2011·乌鲁木齐)I think drinking milk is good our health．
A．for B．to C．with D．at
解析：本题考查短语be good for…的用法。
答案：A
2．It’s important to eat a balanctxt diet．均衡饮食很重要。
It’s+adj．+for sb．+to do sth．意为“做某事对某人来说……”。如：
It’s difficult for me to learn English well．对我来说学好英语很难。
活学活用
(2011·沈阳)It is very important people to have food and water every day．
A．for B．of C．with D．about
解析：本题考查固定句式：It is+adj．+for sb．to do sth．意为“做某事对某人来说是……的”。
答案：A
3．－What’s the matter?怎么啦? －I have a cold．我感冒了。
(1)What’s the matter?意为“怎么啦?”，What’s the matter with sb．?是用来询问某人怎么啦或出什么事了。如：
What’S the matter with her?她怎么啦?
What’S the matter with your bike?你的自行车怎么啦?
(2)have+a+病的名称表示身体某个部位不舒服或有什么病。如：
I have a stomachache．我肚子疼。
适时点津
表示“怎么啦”还可以用What’s wrong with sb．?句型。如：
What’s wrong with you?你怎么啦?
活学活用
(2011·昆明) －What’s the matter with Tina? － .
A．She is away B．She is cool
C．She has a sore throat D．She should take some medicine
解析：本题考查交际用语。根据问句“Tina怎么了?”直接的答案是“她喉咙痛。”
答案：C
【巧辨异同】
1．try to do sth．与try doing sth．try是动词，意为“试图；努力”，它的宾语有两种形式，即try to do sth．和try doing sth．。其区别是：
(1)try to do sth．意为“努力去做某事”。如：
I try to eat a lot of vegetables．我尽量多吃蔬菜。
(2)try doing sth．意为“尝试做某事”。如：
－I usually go there by train．我通常乘火车去那儿。
－Why not try going by boat for a change?为什么不换乘船呢?
适时点津
表示尽力做某事还可以用try one’s best to do sth．。如：
I’ll try my best to improve my English．我会尽我最大努力去提高英语成绩。
活学活用
Try (do)more exercise，you’ll soon lose weight．
解析：本题考查try的用法。句意：试着多参加锻
炼，你的体重很快就会减轻。
答案：doing
2．too much与too many
(1)too much意为“太多”，修饰不可数名词。如：
She spent too much money on clothes．她花太多钱买衣服。
(2)too many意为“太多”，修饰可数名词复数形式。如：
He’s got too many questions to ask you．他有很多问题要问你。
适时点津
much too的中心词是too，用来修饰原级形容词或
副词。如：
much too cold／hot／expensive…太冷／热／贵……
活学活用
We both have too work to do．
A．many B．more C．much D．most
解析：work是不可数名词，故用much。
答案：C
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·广元) －How often do you exercise? －
A．Two B．Twice C．Second
解析：本题考查词义辨析。two为基数词；twice意为“两次”；second为序数词。根据问句“你多久锻炼一次?”，B选项符合语境。
答案：B
真题2 (2011·滨州)Work hard,and you’ll get good 。
A．lessons B．notes C．grades D．answers
解析：本题考查名词辨析。句意：努力，就会得到好的成绩。
答案：C
真题3 (2011·滨州) －Do you often go to the gym?
－No． ．I don’t like sports at all．
A．always B．never C．sometimes D．usually
解析：本题考查词义辨析。由答句“我根本不喜欢运动。”可推测应该是“从未去过”。
答案：B
真题4 (2011·泰安) － do you read English newspapers?
－I read China Daily every day．
A．How long B．How soon C．HOW often D．How far
解析：本题考查与how相关的词组。how long指时间或长度，意为“多长”；how soon指时间，意为“多久，多快”，常用于将来时；how often指频率，意为
“多久一次”；how far指距离，路程，意为“多远”。根据答语every day可知问“多久一次”。
答案：C
真题5 (2011·东韵 )— Liu Wei has no hands，he can play the piano very beautifully．
A．If B．Unless C．Because D．Although
解析：本题考查连词的用法。句意：尽管刘伟没有手，但是他能弹钢琴弹得很优美。
答案：D
真题6 (2011·扬州) — did you sleep last night?
—Only five hours．I stayed up late to do my homework．
A．How soon B．How often C．How long D．How much
解析：本题考查词义辨析。how lon9指时间或长度，意为“多长”；how soon指时间，意为“多久，多快”；how often指频率，意为“多义一次”；how much指数量(不可数)或价格，意为“多少，多少钱”。
答案：C
真题7 (2011·乌鲁木齐)I think drinking milk is good our health．
A．for B．to C．with D．at
解析：本题考查介词for。be good for…“对……有好处”。
答案：A
真题8 (2011·南京)They will try their best in the Dragon Boat Racing they may fail．
A．if B．although C．unless D．until
解析：本题考查句子的逻辑关系和连词的用法。分析句子的逻辑关系，前后两个句子的关系，后半句是让步状语从句，if引导条件状语，although引导让步状语从句，unless从属连词，until引导条件状语从句，含有否定意义，引导时间状语从句。
答案：B
真题9(2011·德州)I go to thetheatre，because I don’t like operas at all．
A．always B．often C．sometimes D．never
解析：本题考查副词的用法。根据后句句意“因为我根本不喜欢戏剧”可知，“我”从不去剧院。
答案：D
真题10 (2011·东营)I don，t know how to deal with my family problem．Can you give me some ?
A．advice B．messages C．information D．instructions
解析：本题考查名词辨析。句意为“我不知道怎样处理我的家庭问题。你能给我一些建议吗?”advice是不可数名词。
答案：A
名师预测
( )1．—How often do you see your grandparents? —
A．Five days B．Once a month C．In a week
( )2．I have to speak to my grandpa loudly because something is wrong with his
A．eyes B．ears C．hands D．legs
( )3．—Would you like some coffee?
—No，thanks．I drink coffee．Coffee is bad for my stomach ．
A．almost B already C．hardly D．still
( )4．—Oh!What’s the matter?I’m really all the time．I have no energy．
A．busy B happy C．tired D．excited
( )5．The little boy ate a big meal he said he wasn’t unhappy．
A．if B．though C．because D．as
班级： 姓名：
同步训练5八年级(上)Units l--2
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．— do they play football? —Always．
A．How soon B．How much C．How many D．How often
( )2． the hotel，it’s very clean and near the downtown．
A．As for B．As C．Because D．／
( )3． think drinking milk is our health．
A．good at B．bad for C．good for D．good to
( )4．—I feel tired．I have so much work to do and don’t have much time for myself． —You should take 。I think．
A．health B．exercise C．lesson D．time
( )5．Good food and exercise study better．
A．help me to B．helps me to C．help me with D．helping me
( )6．Everyone needs a balance of yin and yang to be ．
A．health B．healthy C．healthier D．healthiest
( )7．Aunt Li always asks her son too much meat．
A．don’t eat B．not to eat C．not eat D．to not eat
( )8．—Is Mrs Black really badly ill?— ．She’s in hospital．
A．I don’t think so B．No，she isn’t
C．I don’t hope so D．I’m afraid so
( )9．Jim gave us on how to learn English well．
A some advices B．many advices C．some advice D．an advice
( )10．—How are you?—I am not ．
A．feel well B．feel good C．feeling well D．feeling good
( )11．If you have a toothache，you should see a ．
A．poticeman B．teacher C．nurse D．dentist
( )12．We’re tired because we have yin．
A．too many B．too much C．many too D．much too
( )13．Why are they and angry?
A．to stress B．to be stressed C．stressing out D．stressed out
二、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．I hardly ever exercise，so I think I’m kind of (health)．
2．It’s bad for your health to eat junk food three (time)a week．
3．They go to the movies (one)a month．
4．He usually (have)some milk and bread for breakfast．
5．What’s your (eat)habit?
6．He’s too young．He can (hard)ride a bike．
7．In winter，my father often goes (skate)．
8．She shouldn’t work any more (stay) healthy．
9．Eating a (balance)diet is good for our health．
10． (tradition)Chinese doctors believe we
need a balance of yin and yang to keep healthy．
三、根据句意和所给的首字母提示填写单词
1．We should brush our t every day．
2．I’m very t ，I want to drink some water．
3．I have an i meeting．I must go now．
4．—Peter．What’s the m with you? —I’m very tired．
5．His temperature is very high．He has a f ．
6．You have a sore throat．You should drink some hot tea with h ．
7．—How o does your mother shop? —Twice a week．
8．Some children often surf the l with the help of their parents．
9．Do you know the r of the football match?
10．To go to bed early and to get up early is a healthy l ．
四、选词填空
eat，habit，different，keep，Drogram，tired，take，unhealthy
1．My pen is red，your pen is green．Mine is from yours．
2．His favorite is Animal World．
3．We should do some sports and in good health．
4．I have a healthy ．I eat a lot of vegetables and drink milk every day．
5．He is kind of because he often eats junk food．
6．Mother felt after she did so much house work．
7．The doctor asked me more exercise every day．
8．She was hungry，but she didn’t feel like anything．
五、根据汉语提示完成句子
1．健康的生活方式帮助我取得好成绩。
My lifestyle helps me ．
—你感觉如何?一我觉得很累。 。
— you now? —I’m feeling very tired．
3．—你妹妹怎么了? —她压力很大。
— the with your sister? —She is ．
4．如果你累了，就应该躺下休息。
If you ，you should and ．
5．你每天晚上睡几个小时?
do you sleep every night?
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·岳阳)
It was too 1ate at night when an old man came to a small town．He found an inn(小旅馆)and wanted to stay there for the night．After he 1 his room，the owner said to his wife，“Look at his bag．There 2 much money in it．Let’s 3 when he’s asleep， 4 ?"
“No．no，”said the woman．“He must look 5 his bag tomorrow morning．If he can’t find it，he’11 telephone the police．’’
They thought for 6 minutes．Then the woman had an idea．“We have forgetful grass．Why 7 some forgetful grass into his food?If he 8 the food，he will forget 9 his bag away．”
The old man had the food l0 the forgetful grass and went to bed．The next morning when the owner got up，he found the door 11 and the old man had left with the bag．He woke his wife up and said to her l2 ，“What a fool(傻瓜)!Your forgetful grass isn’t l3 at all．’’
“No，I don’t think so．He must forget l4 ，”his wife said．
“Oh!I remember now!”cried out the man suddenly．“He forgot to 15 for the night．’’
( )1．A went B．has gone to C．had been to D．had gone to
( )2．A must have B．must be C．may have D．can be
( )3．A．take it away B．to take it away C．take away it D．to take away it
( )4．A．don’t you B．won’t you C．will you D．shall we
( )5．A．at B．like C．for D．after
( )6．A．few B．a few C．1ittle D．a little
( )7．A．not put B．not to put C．not putting D．don’t put
( )8．A．has B．will have C．is having D．is going to have
( )9．A．taking B．to take C．bringing D．to bring
( )10．A．in B．of C．with D．from
( )11．A．open B．opens C．opening D．to open
( )12．A．quickly B．happily C angrily D．politely
( )13．A．strong B．important C．delicious D．useful
( )14．A．nothing B．something C．anything D．everything
( )15．A．cost B．stay C．pay D．spend
二、阅读理解
A(2011·桂林)
Tom was three years old．He liked to watch TV with his parents after supper，but his parents never let him stay long．Mother would say，“It’s eight 0’clock now．It’s time for you to go to bed，Tom．’’
“But why don’t you go to bed．too?’’Tom always asked．
“We are adults(大人)，”mother would say，“And adults go to bed late．’’
One evening Tom asked his mother for an apple．
“But it’s too late，”his mother didn’t want to give him anything to eat at bedtime．“The apples are already asleep．”
“But not all of them，Morn．”Tom said，“The baby apples are perhaps asleep，but their parents are surely awake．’’
( )1．Tom liked to watch TV with after supper．
A．his father and mother B．his sister
C．his grandparents D．his brother
( )2．His parents let him stay long．
A never B．sometimes C．often D．usually
( )3．One evening Tom asked his mother for ．
A．an egg B an apple C．an orange D．a pear
( )4．His mother didn’t want to give anything to him to eat ．
A．in the morning B．in the afternoon C．at bedtime D．at noon
( )5．From the story we know
A．Tom was a quiet boy B．Tom was a bad boy
C．Tom was a lazy boy D．Tom was a clever boy
B(2011·河南)
When my son，Mark，was in the third grade，he saved all his pocket money for over three months to buy holiday presents．The third Saturday in December Mark said he had made his list and had twenty dollars in his pocket．
I drove him to a nearby supermarket．Mark pickedup a hand basket and went in while I waited and watched in the car．It took Mark over 45 minutes to choose his presents．Finally he come to the checkout counter(交款处)and reached into his pocket for his money．It was not there!There was a hole in his pocket，but no money．Mark stood there holding his basket tears falling down his face．
Then a surprising thing happened．A woman came up to Mark and took him in her arms．“You would help me a lot if you let me pay for you，’’said the woman．“It would be the most wonderful gift you could give me．I only ask that one day you will pass it on．When you。grow up．I would like you to find someone you can help．When you help others，I know you will feel as good about it as I do now．”
Mark took the money，dried his tears and ran back to the checkout counter as fast as he could．That year we all enjoyed our gifts almost as much as Mark enjoyed giving them to us．
I would like to say“thank you”to that very kind woman．and tell her that four years later，Mark went house to house collecting blankets(毯子)and clothes for the homeless people in the fire．And l want to promise her that Mark will never forget to keep passing it on．
( )6．When did the story probably happen?
A．On Christmas Day． B．Before Christmas Day．
C．On New Year’s Day． D．After New Year’s Day．
( )7．When they got to the supermarket，Mark went in ．
A．with the writer B．by himself
C．with the woman D．with his friends
( )8．What happened to Mark in the supermarket?
A．His gifts were stolen． B．He broke his basket．
C．He lost his money． D．He lost his way．
( )9．Why did the writer want to say“thank you”to the woman?
A．Because she bought Mark a nice present．
B．Because she always paid money for others．
C．Because she collected clothes for the homeless．
D．Because she taught Mark to help people in need．
( )10．What’s the best title for this passage?
A．A big supermarket B．A kind woman
C．A happy family D．A wonderful gift
三、任务型阅读(2011·北海)
Some birthday customs are quite similar in many parts of the world--birthday candles(蜡烛)，birthday games，and birthday cakes．But some customs are more specific to certain countries．Here are some children talking about their customs．
Linda—I am fourteen．I come from Aruba．In our country，children take something special to school for their classmates and all teachers．Each teacher gives the birthday child a small gift like a pencil，an eraser or a postcard．The birthday child is also allowed to wear special clothes instead of the school uniform．
Lucy—I am one year older than I．inda．Denmark is my country．A flag is flown outside a window to show that someone who lives in that house is having a birthday．Presents are placed around the child’s bed while they are sleeping so they will see them at once when they wake up．
Tom—I am as old as Linda．I am from Brazil．The birthday child receives a pull on the earlobe(耳垂)for each year in my country．The birthdafperson also gives the first slice of cake to his／her most special friend or relative，usually Morn or Dad．
根据短文，完成下面表格，每空不超过4个单词。
Names
Countries
Ages
Special customs
Linda
Aruba
Fourteen
Each teacher receives something special from(1)
and gives him or her a small gift．
Lucy
Denmark
(2)
If you see(3) flying outside a window，you may know someone in that house is having a birthday．
Tom
(4)
Fourteen
(5) of the birthday cake is usually given to Morn or Dad．
四、句子翻译
1．她的生活方式和我的一样。(the same as)
2．我的英语老师要我每天读英语。(want sb．to do sth．)
3．传统中医认为我们需要阴阳平衡。(a balance of…)
4．为了保持健康要多吃蔬菜和水果。(keep healthy)
5．听到你感觉不舒服我很遗憾。(be sorry，feel well)
五、书面表达(2011·宜宾)
健康一直是人们关注的问题，我校要举行以“关爱健康”为题的主题班会，请根据以下内容谈谈你的看法。
(1)保持健康的重要性。
(2)保持健康的方法：多吃水果蔬菜；每天锻炼一小时；早睡早起；勤洗手。
(3)自己的看法(至少一条)。
注意：(1)文中不能出现校名和自己的姓名；(2)内容可适当扩展。(3)字数为60～80词；(4)文章开头和结尾已给出，但不计入总词数。
Boys and girls，
It is very important for US students to keep healthy．
Thank you．
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 8】BBCCB
【同步训练5】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 DACBA 6—10 BBDCC 11—13 DBD
二、1．unhealthy 2．times 3．once 4．has 5．eatin9 6．hardly 7．skating 8．to stay 9．balanced l0．Traditional
三、1．teeth 2．thirsty 3．important 4．matter 5．fever 6．honey 7．often 8．Internet 9．result 10．1ifestyle
四、1．different 2．program 3．keep 4．habit 5．unhealthy 6．tired 7．to take 8．eating
五、1．healthy，get good grades 2．How are，feeling 3．What’s，matter，stressed out 4．are tired，lie down，rest 5．How many hours
[能力提升]
一、1-5 DBADC 6—10 BAABC 11—l5 ACDBC
二、1—5 AABCD 6—10 BBCDD
三、1．the birthday child 2．15／Fifteen 3．a flag 4．Brazil 5．The first slice
四、l．Her lifestyle is the same as mine． 2．My English teacher wants me to read English every day． 3．Traditional Chinese doctors believe we need a balance of yin and yang．4．Eat more vegetables and fruits to keep healthy． 5．I’m sorry to hear that you are not feeling well．
五、One possible version．
Boys and girls，
It is very important for us students to keep healthy．
There are many ways to be healthy．We’d better eat more fruits and vegetables．Take exercise for at least one hour every day．We need enough sleep and rest so it is important to go to bed early and get up early．Besides，we should wash our hands as often as possible．In my opinion，we mustn’t drink wine or smoke．They are bad for our health．
Thank you．
第6讲八年级(上)Units 3—4
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．camp(v．)宿营→camp(n．)野营
2．Italy(n．)意大利→Italian(adj．)意大利的
3．Spain(n．)西班牙→Spanish(n．)西班牙语
4．Europe(n．)欧洲→European(adj．)欧洲的
5．nature(n．)自然界→natural(adj．)自然界的
6．forget(v．)忘记→forgetful(adj．)健忘的
7．tour(n．)旅游→tourist(n．)游客
8．train(n．)火车→train(v．)训练
9．quick(adj．)快的→quickly(adv．)快地
10．stop(n．)车站→stop(v．)停止
11．north(n．)北方→northern(adj．)北方的
12．depend(v．)依赖→dependent(adj．)依赖的
13．ill(adj．)生病的→illness(n．)疾病
14．worry(v．)担心→worried(adj．)担忧的
【重点短语】
1．babysit one’s sister照顾妹妹 2．visit one’s grandmother看望奶奶
3．spend time with friends和朋友一起度过时光 4．go camping去野营
5．go hiking去徒步远足 6．go bike riding去骑自行车
7．go sightseeing去观光旅游 8．go fishing去钓鱼
9．how long多久 10．have a good time玩得开心
11．send sb．sth．=send sth．to sb． 送某物给某人
12．show sb．sth．=show sth．to sb． 出示某物给某人看
13．take walks散步 14．rent videos租录像带
15．take a vacation度假 16．think about doing sth． 考虑做某事
17．plan to do sth． 计划做某事 18．can’t wait to do sth． 迫不及待做某事
19．finish doing sth． 完成做某事 20．get to school到校
21．ride a bike骑自行车 22．take the subway乘地铁
23．take the train乘火车 24．take the bus／by bus乘公共汽车
25．take the taxi乘出租车 26．walk to school走路到学校
27．how far多远 28．have a quick breakfast匆匆吃过早饭
29．depend on取决于 30．leave for前往 31．the early bus早班车
32．around the world全世界 33．North America北美
34．3 small number of．．． 少数…… 35．be in hospital生病住院
【重点句型】
1．—What are you doing for vacation?你假期打算干什么?
—I’m babysitting my sister．我要照顾妹妹。
2．—who are you going with?你打算和谁一起去?
—I’m going with my parents．我要和父母一起去。
3．I don’t like going away for too long．我不喜欢离家太久。
4．Show me your photos when we get back to school．当我们回到学校时，你把照片给我看。
5．Can I ask you a few questions about your vacation plan?我可以问几个关于你假期计划的问题吗?
6．He thought about going to Greece or Spain，but decided on Canada．他在考虑去希腊或西班牙，但最后决定去加拿大。
7．I hear that Thailand is a good place to go sightseeing．我听说泰国是个旅游观光的好地方。
8．—How do you get to school?你是怎样到校的?
—I ride my bike．我骑自行车。
9．—How long does it take?要花多长时间?
—It takes about 25 minutes to walk and lo minutesby bus．走路要花25分钟，乘车10分钟。
10．—How far is it from your home to school?你家离学校多远?
—It’s three miles．三英里。
11．In China，it depends on where you are．在中国，这取决于你所在的地方。
12．That must be a lot more fun than taking a bus!那一定比乘车更有趣。
13．when it rains I take a taxi to sch001．下雨天我打的去学校。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．be doing是现在进行时，但它有一种特殊的用法，可以表示按计划或安排将要发生的动作。
I’m going to Hainan with my parents for vacation．
我打算和我父母一起去海南度假。
活学活用
(2011·淮安) —Shall we go out for a swim? —Sorry，I can’t．I housework for my mother now．
A．am doing B．is doing C．are doing D．did
解析：本题考查动词时态。第二句句意：我不能出去游泳，(因为)我现在正在为我妈妈做家务。句中有now，故用现在进行时。
答案：A
2．finish doing sth．完成做某事
He finished reading the storybook last week．上周他看完了那本故事书。
适时点津
finish的近义词是end，但end是不及物动词，后面不能直接跟宾语。如：
The book ends on Page 80．该书在第80页结束。
活学活用
(2011·昆明)The reporter didn’t go to bed until he finished the article．
A．writing B．write C．to write D．wrote
解析：本题考查finish doing sth．的用法。
答案：A
3．something pron．某个东西
something是不定代词，用于肯定句，它的否定形 式是nothing。它们的修饰词要后置。
I have something important to tell you． 我有一些重要的事情告诉你。
适时点津
类似的修饰词后置的还有：anything，nothing，
somebody，anybody，nobody等。如：
Is there anything important in today’s newspaper?
今天的报纸有什么重要内容吗?
活学活用
(2011·凉山)I have to tell you．Maybe you will be in it．
A．interesting something；interested
B．something interesting；interesting
C．something interesting；interested
解析：本题考查形容词的用法。形容词修饰不定代词时，应该放在其后面。be interested in是固定结构，意思是“对……感兴趣”。
答案：C
4．by bus乘公共汽车
by为“通过(方式、途径)”的意思，by bus是“通过乘坐巴士”的意思。如：
My father went to Hangzhou by bus yesterday．昨天我父亲坐汽车去杭州。
适时点津
相关的词组还有by bike，by train，by subway，byplane等。如：
Some students go to school by subway．有些学生坐地铁去上学。
活学活用
(2011·重庆)I go to school bus everymorning．
A．in B．on C．at D．by
解析：本题考查介词的用法。by+交通工具意为“乘……”；in和on后跟交通工具表示乘车方式时，中间须加冠词或形容词性物主代词。
答案：D
5．leave n离开
(1)leave+某地，意为“离开某地”。如：
Tom will leave China next week．汤姆下周要离开中国。
(2)leave for+某地，意为“前往某地”。如：
Are you going to leave for Beijing? 你打算动身去北京吗?
适时点津
leave sth．+某地，意为“把某物落在某地”。如：
I left my English book in your home．我把英语书落在你家了。
活学活用
(2010·铜仁) —Jack is busy packing luggage(行李)．—Yes．He for America on vacation．
A．1eaves B．1eft C．is leaving D．has been away
解析：本题考查“离开”的英语表达形式，根据答句“他要去美国度假”，需要用将来时态。
答案：C
6．depend on动词短语，意为“视某物而定；取决于某事”。
In China，it depends on where you are．在中国，这取决于你所在的地方。
活学活用
(2011·聊城)I’m not sure whether I can hold a party in the open air，because it
the weather．
A．stands for B．depends on C．lives on D．agrees with
解析：本题考查词义辨析。A项意思是“代表，象征……”；B项意思是“取决于……”；C项意思是“靠……生活”；D项意思是“同意……”。句意：是否举行宴会不确定，得取决于天气状况。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．It takes 25 minutes to walk and l0 minutes by bus． 走路要花25分钟，乘车l0分钟。
It takes sb．+时间+to do sth．意为“做某事花了某人多少时间”，此处的take意为“花费”。如：
It usually takes me two hours to finish my home-work．我通常要花两小时来完成作业。
适时点津
spend也表示花费时间，但句型是：sb．spend+时
间+doing sth．。如：
Mark spends two hours practicing playing the piano every day．马克每天花两小时练习弹钢琴。
活学活用
(2011·呼和浩特) —How long does it take us to go to your hometown from here?
—It takes us hour or more to go to my hometown by train．
A．an；a B．a；an C．an；／ D．a；／
解析：本题考查冠词的用法。一小时用“an hour”表示，by后面跟交通工具是没有冠词的。
答案：C
2．How far is it from your home to your school?你家离学校有多远?
How far is it from．．．to…?用来询问距离，指路程上的远近。如：
How far is it from Beijing to London?北京到伦敦有多远?
适时点津
how long意为“多久”，用来询问时间，指时间上的
长短。如：How long are you staying in Hong Kong?你要在香港呆多久?
活学活用
(2011·无锡) — is it to your hometown from here？ —Well．it takes a little over three hours to get there by coach．
A．How soon B．How much C．How long D．How far
解析：本题考查对距离提‘问，用how far“多远”表示。
答案：D
【巧辨异同】
1．by与take
(1)by是介词，表示交通路线或工具，后接名词，不用冠词，意为“乘；坐”。如：
go by bus／plane／train乘汽车／飞机／火车去
travel by land／sea／air陆上／海上／空中旅行
(2)take是动词，意为“乘车(船)”等，后接名词，常有冠词。如：
Shall we go there by bike or take a taxi?我们是骑自行车去那里还是坐出租车去?
活学活用
—Did you go to school by bus yesterday?
—No.I took taxi．
A．a；the B．the；a C．／；the D．the；the
解析：本题考查“乘车(船)”的常用表达法，by后不
接冠词，take后要接冠词。
答案：C
2．a number of与the number of
(1)a number of+复数名称，意为“许多，若干”，后常跟可数名词。表数量的多少时，要用large和small修饰number。如：
A small number of students take the subway to school．一小部分学生坐地铁去上学。
(2)the number of+名词，其中心词是number，意为“……的数量”，谓语动词通常用单数形式。如
The number of the students in our school is about 3，000．我们学校的学生人数大约有三千。
活学活用
A number of students (be)on the playground playing basketball．
解析：本题考查“a number Of+复数名词”的用法，其谓语动词要用复数形式。
答案：are
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·广元)I live the market．So I have to drive to buy vegetables andfruits．
A．far away B．near to C．far from
解析：本题考查词组辨析。far away为副词短语，意为“很远，遥远”，可作表语、状语和后置定语；near to意为“靠近于”；far from意为“离某处很远”。
答案：C
真题2 (2011·淄博) — do you play computer games every week?
—About two hours．
A．How often B．How much C．How soon D．How long
解析：本题考查疑问副词辨析。根据答语about two hours故选D。
答案：D ‘
真题3 (2011·gh安) —Did you get there by bike?—No，I took taxi．
A．a；a B．不填；a C．the；the D．a；the
解析：本题考查冠词的用法。习惯用语by bike中间不加冠词；a taxi不定冠词加单数名词表示一类东西。
答案：B
真题4 (2011·盐城) — I’ll go to Beijing for the coming summer holiday．
—
A．Thank you B．It doesn't matter
C．The same to you D．Have a good time
解析：本题考查情景交际。对方要去度假或出差，应该说“Have a good time／trip”。
答案：D
真题5 (2011·德州) —How about going to the Disneyland together?—
A．Enjoy yourself! B．Good luck!
C．What’s up? D．Sounds like a good idea!
解析：本题考查交际用语。根据问句可知，是提建议，只有D项“听起来像是个好主意”符合语境。
答案：D
真题6 (2011·无锡) —I’ll fly to Qingdao for my holiday this weekend．—Wonderful!
A．Why not? B．I hope so．
C．With pleasure． D．Have a good time!
解析：本题考查情景交际。由上句可知要去度假，故D符合语境。
答案：D
真题7(2011·东营) — did Prince William’s wedding(婚礼)last?
—It lasted for about 5 hours．
A．How far B．How long C．How soon D．How often
解析：本题考查疑问词用法。how far“多远”提问距离；how lon9“多长，多久”提问时间；how soon“多久”提问将来时态；how often“多久一次”提问频率。句意：一威廉王子的婚礼持续了多久?一大约持续了5小时。
答案：B
真题8 (2011·上海)Now my father his bike to work every day instead of driving．
A．ride B．rode C．rides D．will ride
解析：本题考查时态，根据every day，我们知道应用一般现在时。
答案：C
名师预测
( )1．—What about a rest?
—OK．Let’s go out and have a walk．
A．to take B．takes C．taking D．take
( )2．May I have a rest?I have already finished the report．
A．write B．writing C to write D．written
( )3．—Lily is coming by plane tomorrow．
—Let’s go to airport to meet her．
A．a；a B．／；a C the；the D．／；the
( )4．—How far is your home from here?—It’s about ten walk．
A minute’s B．minute C．minutes’ D．minutes
( )5．— are you going to Shanghai?
—I’m taking the plane．
A．When B．Why C．What D．How
同步训练6八年级(上)Units 3—4
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．— are you doing for vacation?—We are going to Yunnan for five days．
A．When B．Where C．What D．How
( )2．—Who are you going sightseeing ? —My parents．
A．to B．for C．at D．with
( )3．They decided to Shanghai．
A．to go B．going C．go D．to going
( )4．— are you staying there? —Just for two days．
A．How often B．When C．How long D．How many
( )5．Please me your new photos．
A．look B．show C．make D．see
( )6．—How does he go to Hong Kong? —
A．Take the plane B．Take plane
C．By the plane D．By the air
( )7．— do you lire from school? —8 miles．
A ．How long B．How far C．How much D．Where
( )8．Yesterday we went to a lonely village．It us about two hours to get there．
A．spent B．took C．cost D．made
( )9． he／He is old， he is in good health．
A．Although；but B．／；then C Although；so D．／；but
( )10．—How do you usually go to school? —I usually go to school ．
A．by a bike B．on bike C．ride a bike D．by bike
( )11．Mr Wang is leaving Guangzhou next week． ·
A．to B．with C．in D．for
( )12．I don’t think there is ．
A．something serious B．nothing serious
C．anything serious D．serious anything
( )13．—How long is he away?
A．One o’clock B．Three days ago
C．For three days D．Tomorrow
( )14．— does it take him to do the housework? —For two hours．
A．How soon B．How long C．How many D．How often
( )15．—I’m going toTibet next Monday．—
A．I know B．That sounds exciting
C．I’m sorry to hear that D．Thank you
二、根据旬意及首字母提示。填入适当的单词
1．She often b her sister on Sundays．
2．What’s she doing for v ?
3．I’m going c with my parents．
4．He likes to go bike r in the countryside．
5．He thought about going to Shanghai or Qingdao，but d on Tibet．
6．Zhou Xun says，“I just finished m my last movie．’’
7．Many t come to the Great Wall every year．
8．The bus r usually takes about 5 minutes．
9．You cannot d on your parents forever．
10．It’s about two k from here to there．
三、用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空
1．How long you (stay)in Beijing next month?
2．They often (take)vacations in Daliar
3．He thought about (spend)time nea the sea．
4．Hawaii is a good place (surf)．
5．A small number of students (take)the subway every day．
6．How long does it take you (get)to the park?
7．Traveling by train is more relaxing than (drive)．
8．Tom was (illness)yesterday，so he didn’t go to school．
9．Li Hua had a (quickly)breakfast and then went to work．
10．The most popular way of (get)to school is walking．
四、根据中文提示完成英文句子
1．My home is (近的)．I (步行)to school．
2．Li Lei (乘地铁)to school every day．
3．His father often goes to Shanghai (坐飞机)．
4．If you don’t want to be late，you’d better a (打的)．
5． (骑自行车)to work is good for our health。I think．
6．It isn’t (离……远)the school to the bus stop．
7． (读)more is good for you；English．
五、用方框中所给词组的正确形式填空，每个词组限用一次
take the subway，think of，get to，look after，have a picnic
1．My mother was out，so I had to I my little sister at home．
2．What about in the park on Sunday?
3．Miss Gao often to work．
4．He school at 7：30 every day．
5．—What do you Chinese people? —They are very friendly．
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·鸡西)
Every child has his own dream．Every child hopes to be an adult． 1 ，is it really like what they imagine?As a boy 2 lives in modern times and in a modern city，I feel 3
pressure(压力)on me with the city’s development．Although we上worry about money，we still have some 5 problems，such as competition among classmates and expectation(期望)
from parents．These experiences are very 6 to our future．But 7 ，they really give me a lot of pressure．I still clearly 8 the happiness of my childhood． 9 ，we had to face the fact with time passing by．We began to 10 this invisible(无形的)pressure come upon us．We get up before sunrise and 11 after sunset．We work and study l2 an adult，even harder． 13 we do is in order to get an excellent l 4 ．Growing up is very boring，but we 15 try to find happiness while growing up．I think friendship among our friends，the support from our parents and the encouragement from our teachers can help us．Why not enjoy the pleasure of growing up and its delicious taste?
( )1．A．However B．And C．So
( )2．A．which B．who C．whom
( )3．A．less B．fewer C．greater
( )4．A．always B．often C．seldom
( )5．A．other B．another C．others
( )6．A．helpful B．happy C．bad
( )7．A．at first B．for example C．in fact
( )8．A．think B．remember C．forget
( )9．A．Luckily B． Unluckily C．Impossibly
( )10．A．see B．touch C．feel
( )11．A．come out B．come down C．come back
( )12．A．as B．1ike C．alike
( )13．A．What B．That C．How
( )14．A．progress B．mark C．success
( )15．A．should B．shouldn’t C．mustn’t
二、阅读理解
A(2011·苏州)
Mitzi
Lost Wednesday evening
French poodle(卷毛狗)called Mitzi
Brown，5 years old，good reward
Phone Barbara
Bluey
Lost blue／white Persian male cat
12 months old，friendly nature
Any info about Bluey
Large reward
Tom 555—2732 evenings
Pet-Cats
Burmese kittens ll weeks old
2 female 4 male l red
Others various colours
Gentle and registered(注册)$250
Sandy 555—0001 mornings
Pet-Dogs
Small dogs／short legs／long body
3 red 2 male l female
5 months old，registered
Sale$280
Phone Carl 555—9019 afternoons
555-4140 anytime
( )1．If you want to buy a little dog，you can call
A．555—9019 B．555-0001 C．555—4140 D．555—2732
( )2．If you tell the owner where Bluey is，you will be given ．
A．a gold medal B．a large pet C．a great prize D．a lot of money
( )3．Who is available to answer the call 24 hours a day?
A．Barbara． B．Tom． C．Carl． D．Sandy．
( )4．The above four notices are all about
A．dogs B．cats C．pets D．selling pets
B(2011·乐山)
Alexis Rocha is a l 3-year-old boy from California，US．He weighs l47 pounds(67 kg)．But six months ago，he weighed more than 202 pounds(91 kg)．How did he lose all that weight in only half a year?
“One day．I was surprised to find that I weighed about 200 pounds．”Roeha says．“I thought I had to do something．”
Rocha is from a boxing(拳击)family--his father and two older brothers are professional boxers．So he decided to start boxing．He began with simple exercises，like sit-ups and push-ups(俯卧撑)．Then Rocha started jogging(慢跑)．“No kid likes running，”he says．“I don’t want to do it，either，but I have no choice but to keep on．”
Months later，Rocha joined a boxing club in his city．He is always the first kid at the club to begin exercising，and the last to leave with sweat(汗水)on his face．Every day he boxes for about three hours．
“Rocha works very hard。”says his coach，Hector Lopez．“It’s surprising to see him lose the pounds so quickly．I’ve never seen anything like this in my 20 years of coaching．’’
Rocha is very happy with his weight now．There is a family photo in his room from l8 months ago．“Each time I look at the photo。I laugh at myself．I was so big back then。”Rocha says．“I look l00 times thinner and 1.000 times stronger now．”
( )5．How much weight did Rocha lose in six months?
A． At least 24 pounds． B．At least 30 pounds． C．At least 55 pounds．
( )6．Rocha said he had no choice but to keep on running because ．
A．he liked running very much
B．he wanted to be thin and strong
C．he wanted to be a professional boxer
( )7．What makes Coach Hector Lopez surprised?
A．Rocha lost weight so quickly．
B．Rocha was so fat l8 months ago．
C．Rocha comes from a boxing family．
( )8．What’s the correct order of the following sentences?
a．He did some sit-ups and push-ups．
b．He lost the pounds quickly．
c．He joined a boxing club．
d．He began running．
f．He boxed for about three hours every day．
A．a→d→c→f→b B．d→a→f→c→b C．a→d→f→c→b
( )9．The writer mainly wants to tell us ．
A．Rocha is a hardworking boy
B．It is important to get exercise
C．everything is possible if you work hard
三、任务型阅读(2011·连云港)
请认真阅读下面短文，在短文后表格中的空白处填上适当的单词(注意：每空一个单词)。
If you think you are too shy and want to be a little bit braver，just try the following things：
Be open to others．Tell people you are shy．There is no need to hide it．When they get to know you are a shy kid，they will understand you better．This also helps you feel more comfortable in talks．
Try to smile more．When you smile，people think you are friendly and easy to talk with．Remember that other people have feelings，too；and most people will stay away from an angry-looking face．
Leam to be a good talker．If you find it hard to start a conversation，say something nice about people around you．Think about how great you feel when someone says something nice to you．Doesn’t it make you want to keep talking to that person?
Get your attention elsewhere．Think more about ways to enjoy parties or games．Don’t waste time worrying about your look or whether people like you or not．You will become relaxed and find it’s not so hard to talk with others．
Take one small step at a time．Each time when you say“Hi!”or smile at someone，say to yourself“You can make it．”Keep trying and one day you’ll never feel shy when you talk to others．
Title：Advice on(1) to be a little braver
Advice
Reasons
Don’t(2) the fact
If you tell people you are shy，they will understand you better．
Advice
Reasons
Smile more．
People don’t(3) the one with an angry-looking face．
Start a conversation with(4) words．
People will feel great and want
to talk to you．
Pay more attention to ways to enjoy(5)
or games．
You will become relaxed．
Encourage yourself to say“Hi!”or smile at someone．
Keep doing this and you’ll be braver to talk to others(6) the future．
四、句子翻译
1．他想到西藏徒步旅行，计划过一个轻松的假期。(go hiking，plan to do sth．)
2．当你到意大利后，别忘了给我看明信片和你的照片。 (forget to do sth．，show sb．sth．)
3．坐火车去北京需用多长时间?(It takes+some time +to do sth．)
4．你每天怎样去学校?(get to school)
5．多喝水对你的健康有好处。(be good for)
五、书面表达．
根据下列育英中学八年级(1)班学生上学方式的调查表，用英语写一篇短文。不少于70词。
上学方式
学生人数
Bus
15
Walking
10
Bike
25
Car
0
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 CBDCD
【同步训练6】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 CDACB 6一l0 ABBDD 11—15 DCCBB
二、1．babysits 2．vacation 3．camping 4．Riding 5．decided 6．making 7．tourists 8．ride 9．depend l0．kilometers
三、1．are，staying 2．take 3．spending 4．to surf 5．take 6．to get 7．driving 8．ill 9．quick l0．getting
四、l．near，walk 2．takes the subway 3．by air／by plane 4．take，taxi 5．Riding a bike 6．far from 7．Reading
五、l．look after 2．having a picnic 3．takes the subway 4．gets to 5．think of
[能力提升]
一、1—5 ABCCA 6—10 ACBBC 11—15 CBABA
二、1—4 ADAC 5—9 CBAAC
三、1．how 2．hide 3．like／love 4．nice／good 5．parties 6．in
四、l．He’s going hiking in Tibet．He plans to have a relaxing vacation． 2．Don’t forget to show me the postcard and your photos when you get to Italy． 3．How long does it take by train to Beijing? 4．How do you get to school every day? 5．Drinking more water is good for your health．
五、One possible version：
There are fifty students in Class 1，Grade 8 at Yuying Middle School．Every day they go to school in different ways．Fifteen students take buses because they live far from the school．Ten students walk．They think walking is good for their health and they live near the school．Twenty-five students ride their bikes to school because they like riding bikes very much and their homes are not very far from the school．No one goes to school by car．
第7讲八年级(上)Units 5—6
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．whom(pron．)谁的→who(pron．)谁
2．invitation(n．)邀请函→invite(v．)邀请
3．training(n．)训练→train(v．)训练
4．American(adj．)美国的→America(n．)美国
5．over(adv．)那边→over(prep．)超过
6．free(adj．)空闲的→free(adj．)免费的
7．athletic(adj．)擅长运动的→athlete(n．)运动员
8．note(n．)注释→note(n．)便条
9．mean(v．)意思是→means(n．)手段
10．interest(n．)兴趣→interest(v．)使……感兴趣
11．though(conj．)尽管→although(conj．)尽管
12．care(v．)对……在意→careful(adj．)小心的
【重点短语】
1．come to my party来参加我的聚会 2．go to the doctor去看医生
3．have a piano lesson上钢琴课 4．have to不得不
5．on Saturday afternoon在星期六下午 6．too much homework太多的作业
7．another time下一次 8．Come and join us! 来加人我们吧l
9．have tennis training网球训练 10．the day after tomoi：row后天
11．go to the mall去商场 12．keep quiet保持安静
13．the whole day一整天 14．be free有空．
15．dome over to my house顺便来我家 16．in some ways在某些方面
17．look the same看起来一样 18．look different看起来不一样
19．more than超出 20．in common共有(的)，公有(的)
21．be good at擅长 22．as…as和……一样 23．make sb．1augh使某人笑
24．the same as… 和……一样 25．beat sb．in sth． 在某方面打败某人
26．primary school students小学生 27．stay at home呆在家里
【重点句型】
1．－Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon?周六下午你能来参加我的生日聚会吗?
－Sure，I’d love to．当然可以，我很乐意去。
2．Sorry，I can’t．I have a piano lesson．对不起，我去不了。我有钢琴课。
3．Maybe another time．那下次吧。
4．Thanks for asking．谢谢邀请。
5．－What’s today?今天几号? －It’s Monday the l4th．十四号，星期一。
6．Thank you for your invitation．谢谢你的邀请。
7．I’m more outgoing than my sister．我比我妹妹更加外向。
8．My friend is the same as me．We are both quiet．我朋友和我一样，我们两个都很文静。
9．－Do you look the same?你们看起来很像吗?
－No，I’m a little taller than her．不，我比她高一点。
10．I like to have friends who are like me．我喜欢拥有像我一样的朋友。
11．－Who do you think should get the job，Ruth or Rose?你认为谁该得到这份工作，是鲁思还是罗斯?
－Well，Ruth is smarter．I think she should get the job．鲁思更加精明。我认为她应该得到邀份工作。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．both既是代词又是形容词，意为“两者；双方；二人”。
Both my mother and father are teachers．我父母两人都是老师。
适时点津
both指代两者，all指代三者或三者以上。如：
All of my students like playing sports．我的学生都喜欢运动。
活学活用
(201 1·泰安) －I prefer speaking to listening in English learning．
－Oh，really!I think you should be good atof them．
A．both B．neither C．some D．all
解析：本题考查代词的用法。both指两者都；neither指两者都不；some指多个；all指三者以上。根据句意应是listening和speaking两者都要喜欢，所以应该用both。
答案：A
2．be good at擅长……；在……方面做得好此处的at是介词，介词后面动词一定要用动名词形式。如：
Yao Ming is good at playing basketball．姚明擅长于打篮球。
适时点津
be good at…=do well in．．．如：Tom said he did well in playing the pian0．汤姆说他钢琴弹得很好。
活学活用
(2010·宜宾)Mr．Yang’s daughter is pretty good drawing pictures and won many prizes．
A．with B．for C．in D．at
解析：本题考查短语“be good at doing sth．”的用法。
答案：D
3．make sb．do sth．使某人做某事
当make作“使……”解时，后面的动词用省略to的不定式。如：
Mark likes telling jokes．He often makes US laugh．
马克喜欢讲笑话，他经常逗我们笑。
适时点津
make sb．／sth．+n力．意为“使……怎么样”。如： 。
His words made me angry．他的话让我很生气。
活学活用
(2011·贵阳)Many students said that they were willing to work hard to make their dreams true．
A．come B．came C．comes
解析：本题考查make的用法，make sb．do sth．让某人做某事。
答案：A
4．invite v． 邀请
(1)invite sb．to do sth．意为“邀请某人做某事”。如：
He didn’t invite me to have dinner with them．
他没有邀请我和他们一道吃饭。
(2)invite sb．to+某地意为“邀请某人到某地”。如：
He invited me to his house yesterday．昨天他邀请我到他家。
适时点津
invitation是名词。如：Thank you for your invitation．谢谢你的邀请。
活学活用
(2011·河南) －Why are you so excited? －Peter invited me on a trip to Yuntai Mountain．
A．to go B．go C．going D．went
解析：本题考查非谓语动词。invite sb．to do sth．邀请某人做某事。to do sth．作宾语补足语。
答案：A
【重点句型】
1．Can you come to my party?你能来参加我的聚会吗?
Can you…(please)?意为“你能……吗?”，常用于发出邀请。它的回答有两种：
(1)表示接受邀请的肯定回答用“Sure，I’d love／like to．”。如：
－Can you come to my party on Wednesday evening?星期三晚上能来参加我的聚会吗?
－Sure.I’d love to．当然，我很乐意去。
(2)表示谢绝邀请的否定回答用“Sorry，I can’t．／No，thank you．／I’d love to,but l’m afraid．．．”。如：
－Can you go to the movies with me on Saturday evening?周六晚上能和我一起看电影吗?
－I’m sorry，I can’t．I have too much homework this weekend．对不起，我不能去。这个周末作业很多。
活学活用
(2010·荆州) －Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon?
－ ．I’ll have to help my parents．
A Sorry，I can’t B．Yes，I’d love to
C Let’s go D．No，I don’t think so
解析：根据答语“我不得不帮助父母”，说明“我”拒绝了邀请。
答案：A
2．I’m more outgoing than my sister．我比我姐姐性格更外向。句型“A+比较级+than B”意为“A比B更加……”。如：
Tom has shorter hair than Sam．汤姆头发比萨姆短。
活学活用
(2011·上海)We hope that with the help of the new skill，Liu Xiang can run than before．
A．fast B．falster C．fastest D．the fastest
解析：本题考查比较级。看到than就很容易能选出faster，故选B。
答案：B
3．Iiu Ying is as good at sports as Liu li．刘瑛和刘莉都擅长于运动。“…as+形容词或副词原级+as…”表示一种原级比较，意为“……和……一样”。如：
I’m as tall as you．我和你一样高。
He sings as well as me．他和我唱得一样好。
活学活用
(2011·宿迁)Paul isn’t as as Sandy．He often makes mistakes in his homework．
A．careless B．more careful C．more careless D．careful
解析：本题考查连词的用法。as…as意为“和o…一样”，表示同级的比较。使用时要注意第一个as为副词，第二个as为连词。其基本结构为：as+“彩．／adv．+as。B、C都是比较级故应排除，A与句意不符，故也应排除。
答案：D
【巧辨异同】
beat与win
(1)beat意为“打败，胜过”，宾语一般是人或团队。
beat sb．／team in．．．“在……方面打败某人(某队)”。如：
I think Jack can beat all the runners in the country．我认为杰克可以胜过这个国家的所有赛跑选手。
(2)win意为“在……获胜”。宾语一般是game，match，prize等。如：
Hemingway once won the Nobel Prize for literature．海明威曾一度获得诺贝尔文学奖。
活学活用
We (打败)their team by ten points．
解析：本题考查win和beat的辨析，动词的宾语是团队，所以应该用beat。
答案：beat
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·凉山) －What a carefulboy you are! －Thank you．In fact,Tom does everything than me．
A．more carefully B．more careful C．much careful
解析：本题考查比较级的用法。由句意“实际上，汤姆做每件事情都比我仔细”可以得知此处应该使用副词的比较级形式。
答案：A
真题2 (2011·泰安) －Which do you like ，summer or winter?－I prefer summer．
A．good B．well C．better D．best
解析：本题考查形容词比较级的用法。此处是两者相比较，故应该用good的比较级better。
答案：C
真题3 (2011·泰安) －Happy birthday to you，Mary! －
A．Thanks a lot B．The same to you
C．You’re welcome D．It’s kind of you
解析：本题考查情景交际。The same to you!是互相祝贺的答语。而生日是私人化的节日，所以只有“Thanks a lot．”符合语境。
答案：A
真题4 (2011·昆明)If everyone pours less polluted water into Dianchi Lake，it will be ．
A．deeper and deeper B．cleaner and cleaner
C．dirtier and dirtier D．wider and wider
解析：本题考查形容词比较级辨析。根据句意：如果每个人少倒污水进滇池，那么滇池就会越来越干净。
答案：B
真题5 (2011·广安) －Oh，so many people in the park? －Nobody likes to stay at home Sunday morning．
A．in B．on C．at
解析：本题考查介词。in表示在某年、某月、某星期；on表示在某天或某天的早上、中午、晚上；at表示在某时某刻。根据句意“在周日早晨”用介词on。
答案：B
真题6 (2011·安徽)Jack is good at Drawing．I think no one draws ．
A．better B．best C．worse D．worst
解析：本题考查形容词比较级的用法。句意：杰克擅长画画，我想没有人比他画得更好了。此处暗示其他人与杰克比较，故选A。
答案：A
真题7 (2011·南京) －Mr Smith，I don’t think we can get there on time by bike．
－You mean it’s for us to take a taxi．
A．necessary B．important C．possible D．difficult
解析：本题考查词义辨析。理解句意，对于我们而言，乘出租车是必要的。necessary必要的；imporrant重要的；possible可能的；difficult困难的。
答案：A
真题8 (2011·德州) －Are you coming to my birthday party? －
A．You bet! B．Never mind． C．Much better! D．What a pity!
解析：本题考查交际用语。You bet!“当然了／一定”；Never mind．“别担心”；Much better!“好多了”；What a pity!“太遗憾了!”。根据问句“你来我的生日聚会吗?”，只有A符合语境。
答案：A
名师预测
( )1．－How is your father feeling today? －Mucn ．He can’t go to work today．
A．bad B．worse C．better
( )2．－Many people eat meat than they did before．－Yes，that’s why they’re getting fatter and fatter．
A．more B．1ess C．fewer D．much
( )3．It is our duty our hometown cleanand beautiful． We must do something
for it．
A．to keep B．keeps C．keeping
( )4．The more you smile，the you will feel．
A．happy B．happier C．happily D．more happily
( )5．Some Chinese singers sing English songs just as as native speakers do．
A．good B．better C．well
同步训练7八年级(上)Units 5—6
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．— you go to the music lesson? —Sorry，I can’t．
A．Do B．Can C．Must D．May
( )2．—Can you go to the Great Wall with US tomorrow? —
A．Yes，I can’t B．I’m afraid I can
C．Sorry，I may not D．I’m sorry，I can’t
( )3．I’m sure he would love ．
A．come B．to come C．coming D．came
( )4．I have housework to do this weekend．
A．much too B．too much C．many too D．too many
( )5．Liven is than I am．
A．funny and outgoing B．more funnier and outgoing
C．funnier and more outgoing D．more funny and outgoing
( )6．I’m glad to get your to spend vacation with you．
A．invite B．invitation C．inviter D．inviting
( )7．I’m sorry I visit you next week．
A．can B．can’t C．may D．may not
( )8．For is the birthday party，do you know?
A．when B．who C．whom D．where
( )9．Thank you for me．
A．invite B．inviting C．invitation D．to invite
( )10．Li Ping and Li Ming black eyes．
A．has both B．have both C．both have D．both has
( )11．Here are photos of twin sister and
A．me；I B．I；me C．me；my D．my；me
( )12．My friend is as me．We are both quiet．
A．as same B．so same C．the same D．not the same
( )1 3．She likes singing，dancing and talking with others．But I often stay at home and read
books．So I am than her．
A．quieter B．funnier C．more outgoing D．wilder
二、根据旬意和首字母提示，填入适当的单词
1．Can you come to my birthday p next week?
2．She can’t come，because she h to babysit her brother．
3．All the boys go to play football，but l can’t．I have to have a piano l ．
4．Let’s watch the basketball m at 5：00 pm on TV．
5．Class ,you can d this question first，and then tell me the answer．
6．I have a r busy week．
7．Can you come o to my house this weekend?
8．Are you f or busy tomorrow afternoon?
9．B Lily and I are outgoing．They have lots of friends．
10．Edison showed great i in science when he was a little boy．
三、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．My grandparents live in a village nearby．I go (see)them once a week．
2．Does your brother enjoy (take)a walk after supper?
3．I would love (make)friends with him．
4．Can you come to (I)birthday party?
5．Thanks for (tell)me the way to the post office．
6．Are you good at (play)chess?
7．Jackson (be)my favorite singer．I enjoy (1isten)to his songs．
8．She likes to have friends who are (difference)from her．
四、用方框中所给词的适当形式填空
real，love，Let’s，have to，the day after tomorrow，heavy，outgoin9，funny，cheap，athletic
1．一Can you come to my party? 一Yes，I’d to．
2．What a fine day! go out for a walk．
3．I enjoy working here．
4．I have to have a piano lesson ．
5．He can’t go to movies because he study for his test．
6．An elephant is much than a horse．
7．My friend Tim plays basketball every day．He is than me．
8．This T-shirt is too expensive．Do you have a one?
9．Tom and Peter are twin brothers．In some ways they are different．Tom is quieter，but Peter is ．
10．Tony is than any other student in our class．He always makes us laugh．
五、句子翻译
1．蒂姆留的头发比萨姆短。
Tim has hair Sam．
2．萨姆比汤姆安静得多。
Sam is much than Tom．
3．我们俩都喜欢运动，尽管她看上去比我更强健。
We like sports， she looks than me．
4．蒂娜更外向一些，泰拉更严肃一些。
Tina is ，but Tara is .
5．我妈妈没有爸爸高。
My mother is not my father．
6．霍莉比玛利亚滑稽，她喜欢讲笑话。
Holly is much than Maria．She jokes．
7．我的堂兄比我瘦，他为人友善，总爱帮助别人。
My cousin is than me．He is a boy．He always helps others．
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·恩施)
How many plastic bags do you use every day? 1 there any chance for us to live without them?what can we do to have上plastic pollution?A performance in Hangzhou makes people 3
more about the overuse of plastic bags in our lives．
In front of a supermarket in Hangzhou，five volunteers 4 white plastic bags and walked around and through the crowd．The performance 5 people to use more cloth bags 6 plastic ones．
Some of the plastic bags worn by the performers were collected from customers in two food markets and 7 were collected by 700 students from a middle school．
On that day，when leaving the food markets，customers were told to hand over 8 plastic shopping bags． 9 plastic bags were collected in two hours．
“If we do 10 about it，the earth will be eaten up by white pollution．And 11 will become‘plastic men’，”said one of the performers．
“How can you breathe in l2 plastic bags?”A 13 woman asked one performer．“How can the earth breathe l4 there are too many plastic bags?’’the performer answered．
Starting from June in 2008，plastic bags were 15 given for free in supermarkets，shopping malls or food markets all over the country．
People are called on(号召)to use cloth bags when they go shopping．
( )1．A．Are B．Were C．Is D．Was
( )2．A．few B．much C．fewer D．less
( )3．A．think B．thinks C．to think D．thinking
( )4．A．worn B．wore C．tried on D．try on
( )5．A．called back B．called C．called on D．cheered on
( )6．A．instead B．take the place of C．instead of D．take place
( )7．A．other B the other C．another D．the others
( )8．A．helpful B．unnecessary C．useful D．necessary
( )9．A．Hundred B．Hundreds of C．Hundred of D．Hundreds
( )10．A．nothing B．anything C．something D．everything
( )11．A．human being B．human beings C．humen beings D．humans beings
( )12．A．so much B．too much C．such many D．so many
( )13．A．40-year-old B．40-years-old C．40 year old D．40-years old
( )14．A．until B．because C．if D．unless
( )15．A．no longer B．always C．not longer D．usually
二、阅读理解
A(2011·齐齐哈尔)
Part-time Cleaning Help
Are you looking for a vacation job?Can you clean the house and cook?Then。I need you．The work is boring，but the pay is good．I need you from 2：00 pm_5：00 pm，Monday to Saturday．Please come to the cleaning center or call Mrs．Johnson at 544—9968．
A Fitness Camp For Overweight Kids
Are you too fat?Can you run as fast as your classmates?Have you failed your PE examination?
Our fitness camp can help you lose weight and get fit again．Come and join us!Please call Nathan at 475—2300．
Next Wave Music Store
After lo years of teaching the piano，David Smith has made his first CD!Come and meet him this weekend．Special presents for the first 50 people．Time：Sat．7：00 pm Call Marsha at 8732059．
( )1．The cleaner will work hours one week．
A．12 B．15 C．18
( )2．In the fitness camp，you can ．
A．clean the house B．lose weight C．meet David Smith
( )3． needs a cleaner．
A．Mrs．Johnson B．Marsha C．Nathan
( )4．You can call ，if you want to go to the fitness camp．
A．544-9968 B．475-2300 C．8732059
( )5．If you’re the tenth to come to ，you can get a special present．
A．the cleaning center B．the fitness camp C．Next Wave Music Store
B(2011·呼和浩特)
Monkeys are clever and lively。but they are naughty and greedy(贪婪的)as well．Whenever they find delicious food．they will eat enough．What’s more，they will take it when they leave．They have suffered(吃亏)a lot because of this．But they never change this way．
In India，people use monkeys’greed to Catch them．Do you know how they can catch monkeys?Here are some instructions．
◆Make a hole in a big pumpkin(南瓜)．The hole must be just right-neither too big nor too small．
◆Put some jujubes(枣)in the hole．
◆Leave the pumpkin under a tree．Make sure there are some monkeys in the tree．
◆Hide yourself and watch the monkeys．
As soon as you leave，the monkeys can’t wait to come down to the pumpkin．When they find a hole in the pumpkin。they don’t know what’s in it and one of them can’t help putting its hand into the hole to find what on earth there is．When it touches the jujubes，it will clench(拽紧)some of them in its hand．As a resuIt。it isn't able to take its fist(拳)out of the hole．You can't come close until this time．Will the monkey drop off the pumpkin?Don’t worry．It prefers the pumpkin than its life．It will run with the pumpkin，clenching its fist more tightly．In the end，it is caught helplessly．
( )6．Monkeys haven’t changed their way of doing with nice food because they are ．
A．clever B．1ively C．greedy D．naughty
( )7．“The hole must be just right”means it is
A．big enough for the monkey to put its hand in
B．smaller than a monkey’s hand
C．bigger than a monkey’s fist
D．bigger than a monkey’8 hand but smaller than its fist
( )8．Seeing the hole in the pumpkin，a monkey will
A．be interested in it B．be afraid of it
C．run away at once D．take the pumpkin away in arms
( )9．Which of the following is true according to the passage?
A．Indians often catch the monkeys in this way．
B．Sometimes monkeys are stupid．
C．As soon as the monkeys come to the pumpkin，you can rush to catch it．
D．In India，monkeys like pumpkins every much．
( )10．What should we learn from the passage?
A．We should catch monkeys in this way．
B．One mustn’t be greedy．
C．We should protect monkeys．
D．Come up with another way to catch mortkeys．
三、任务型阅读(2011·清远)
Last Tuesday，a little girl died after eating some fried chicken．Her father bought the chicken for her from a street seller in Fenzhuang Village，Fengtai，Beijing．After testing the girl，the doctor said she was poisoned(中毒)by nitrites(亚硝酸盐)．Some experts suggest that we should buy foods witff QS signs．They are safer．
After hearing about the accident，many people feel more worried about the food safety because there have been many food safety problems in our country these years．For example，poisonous(有毒的)rice，oil，milk and so on have been found out recently．People feel quite afraid because these poisonous foods are rather bad for their health and even kill them．They want the government to do something to stop such poisonous foods and drinks appearing again so that they can have safe and healthy foods and drinks．
Information Card
1．The little girl died after she ate ．
2．Some experts suggest that we should buy foods with
3．Many people feel about the food safety after hearing about the accident．
4．The poisonous foods are for people’s health and even kill them．
5．The people want stop such poisonous foods and drinks appearing agairl
四、句子翻译
1．你能帮我照看一下我的女儿吗?(help sb．do sth．)
2．在星期四，我必须准备化学考试。(have to do sth．)
3．请保持安静!我正在努力学习。(try to do sth．)
4．他们俩都喜欢参加晚会。(enjoy doing sth．)
5．戴夫擅长打篮球。(be good at doing sth．)
五、书面表达
Ann和Anna是一对孪生姐妹。请根据下表，写一篇短文介绍她们姐妹。内容可适当发挥，60词左右。
Ann
Anna
Height
tall
★
★
Hair
long
★★★
★
Personality
outgoing
★
★★★
Clothes
cool
★
★★★
Schoolwork
good
★★★
★
第7讲八年级(上)Units 5--6
【名师预测】
1—5 BAABC
【同步训练7】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 BDBBC 6—10 BBCBC 11—13 DCA
二、1．party 2．has 3．1esson 4．match 5．discuss 6．really 7．over 8．free 9．Both 10．interests
三、1．to see 2．taking 3．to make 4．my 5．telling 6．playing 7．is，listening 8．different
四、1．love 2．Let’s 3．really 4．the day after tomorrow 5．has to 6．heavier 7．more athletic 8．cheaper 9．more outgoing 10．funnier
五、1．shorter，than 2．quieter 3．both，although，more athletic 4．more outgoing，more serious 5．as tall as 6．funnier，likes telling 7．thinner，kind
[能力提升]
一、1—5 CDABC 6—10 CDBBA 11—15 BDACA
二、1—5 CBABC 6--10 CDAAB
三、1．some fried chicken 2．QS signs 3．more worried 4．rather bad 5．the government to do something to
四、1．Can you help me babysit my daughter? 2．On Thursday,I have to study for my chemistry test． 3．Please keep quiet!I’m trying to study．4．They both enjoy going to parties． 5．Dave is good at playing basketball．
五、One possible version：
Ann and Anna are twins．In some ways，they look the same，and in some ways，they look different．Ann is as tall as Anna，and she has longer hair than Anna．Anna is more outgoing than Ann．They both have a lot of beautiful clothes，but Anna’s clothes are much cooler．They are in the same school and are both good at schoolwork，thought Ann’s schoolwork is better than Anna’s．
第8讲八年级(上)Units 7--8
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．turn on(v．)打开→turn off(v．)关掉
2．instruct(v．)指令→instruction(n．)用法说明
3．final(adj．)最后的→finally(adv．)最后地
4．mix(v．)混合→mixture(n．)混合物
5．salt(n．)盐→salty(adj．)咸的
6．hang(v．)逗留→hang(v．)悬挂
7．win(v．)获胜→winner(n．)获胜者
8．visit(v．)参观→visitor(n．)参观者
9．outdoor(adj．)户外的→indoor(adj．)室内的
10．drive(n．)驾驶→drive(v．)驾驶
11．rain(n．)雨→rain(v．)下雨→rainy(adj．)下雨的
12．1uck(n．)运气→lucky(adj．)幸运的→luckily(adv．)幸运地
13．compete(v．)竞赛→competition(n．)竞赛
14．play(v．)运动→player(n．)运动员
【重点短语】
1．make a milk shake做奶昔 2．peel the bananas剥香蕉
3．cut up the bananas切香蕉 4．pour the milk in the blender把牛奶倒人果汁机
5．turn on the blender打开果汁机 6．put…into…把……放入……
7．one teaspoon of honey一茶匙蜂蜜 8．make fruit salad做水果沙拉
9．a cup of yogurt一杯酸奶 10．mix up搅拌 11．add…to… 把……添加到……
12．two slices of bread两片面包 13．on the top在顶上
14．hang out with friends和朋友闲逛 15．see some sharks看鲨鱼
16．buy a souvenir买纪念品 17．get one’s autograph得到某人的签名
18．win a prize获奖 19．have a great time玩得开心
20．watch a movie看电影 21．watch a dolphin show看海豚表演
22．at the end of… 在……的结尾 23．day off休息 24．sleep late睡过头
25．go for a drive兜风 26．have fun doing… 做……很开心 27．get wet淋湿
28．in my opinion在我看来 29．singing competition演唱比赛
30．in the future在将来
【重点句型】
1．－How do you make fruit salad?你是怎样做水果沙拉的?
－First cut up three bananas，three apples and a watermelon．Next put the fruit in a bowl．Then put in two teaspoons of honey and a cup of yogurt．Finally mix it up．首先切三根香蕉，三个苹果和一个西瓜。接下来把水果放在碗里。然后放入两茶
匙蜂蜜和一杯酸奶。最后搅拌。
2．－How much yogurt do we need?我们需要多少酸奶?
－We need one cup of yogurt．我们需要一杯酸奶。
3．Pour the milk into the blender．把牛奶倒人果汁机。
4．Here’s a recipe for a great turkey sandwich．这是火鸡三明治的菜谱。
5．How was your last school trip?上次学校郊游怎么样?
6．－Were there any sharks in the aquarium?水族馆里有鲨鱼吗?
－No，there aren’t any sharks．but there weresome really clever seals．没有鲨鱼，但有聪明的海豹。
7．Did you have fun camping?郊游开心吗?
8．Luckily，we brought our umbrellas and raincoats，so we didn’t get wet．幸运的是我们带了雨伞和雨衣，所以我们没有淋湿。
考点精讲
【重点单词短语】
1．turn on是动词短语。意为“打开”。
turn off是它的反义词，意为“关闭”，主要指打开或关闭各类电器，如电视、电灯、电脑等。如：
He forgot to turn on the radio and thus missed the program．他忘了打开收音机，因此错过了那个节目。
Turn off the switch when anything goes wrongwith the machine．如果机器出故障，就把开关关掉。
适时点津
与turn相关的短语还有：turn up(把音量)调大，调高／turn down(把音量)调小，调低
turn around翻转／turn left／right向左／右转turn．．．into…把……转变成……
turn to转向
活学活用
(2011·内江)Remember to your mobile phone when the plane takes off．
A．turn on B．turn down C．turn off
解析：本题考查词组辨析。turn on打开(家电、收音机、水龙头等)；turn down调低(音量)；turn off关掉(家电、收音机、水龙头等)。句意：记得当飞机起飞时关掉你的手机。
答案：C
2．slice n．薄片
a slice of…意为“一片……”，复数为“slices of．．．”。如：
Please give me a slice of bread．请给我一片面包。
适时点津
a slice of也可以用a piece of。
活学活用
(2011·清远)I’m so hungry．Please give me to eat．
A．three bread B．three pieces of bread
C．three pieces of breads D．three piece of bread
解析：本题考查可数名词与不可数名词的用法。bread为不可数名词，不加s，也不能直接用数字修饰，排除A和C。量词piece(片)是可数的，要加s。
答案：B
3．have fan玩得高兴
“have fun(in)doing sth．”意为“在某方面玩得开心”，in可以省略。如：
Did you have fun camping?野营好玩吗?
活学活用
have fun=have a good time=enjoy oneself=have a wonderful time
活学活用
(2011·贵港)We went to the beach last Sunday，and we had great fun volleyball．
A．play B．playing C．played D．to play
解析：have fun“过得高兴”，其后跟动词ing形式。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．How do you make a banana milk shake?你是怎样做奶昔的?
这是一个由疑问词how引导的特殊疑问句，how意为“怎样，如何”，用以对做某事的方法、方式等进行提问。如：
How did you climb to the top of that building?你是如何爬上楼顶的?
适时点津
与how组成的疑问词有：how long，how often，how many，how much，how soon。如：
－How soon will you be back?你要多久才回来?
－In ten days．十天后回来。 。
活学活用
(2010·达州)My father has a computer，but he doesn’t know to use it．
A．what B．how C．who D．which
解析：本题考查疑问词的用法，what“什么”，how“怎样”，who“谁”，which“哪个”。句意：我父亲有一台电脑，但他不知道怎样使用电脑。
答案：B
2．－Were there any sharks?有鲨鱼吗?
－No,there weren’t，but there were some really clever seals．没有鲨鱼。但有聪明的海豹。
(1)there be句型表示的是“某处有(存在)某人或某物”，其结构为There be(is，are)+名词+地点状语。它的过去式是：there was／were。如：There were many people in the street yesterday．昨天街上有很多人。
(2)如果有两个或两个以上的名词作主语时'be动词要和最靠近它的那个主语在数上保持一致，也就是我们常说的“就近原则”。如：There is an orange and some bananas in thebasket．篮子里有一个橘子和一些香蕉。
适时点津
there be后面如果是不可数名称，be动词用is。如：There is some iuice in the bottle．瓶子里有果汁。
活学活用
(2011·苏州)There are millions of websites on the Internet and there a lot of useful on the websites．
A．are；informations B．are；informations
C．is；information D．is；information
解析：本题考查there be结构。information意为“消息”，是不可数名词'be动词应用单数，排除A、B、D；故选C。
答案：C
【巧辨异同】
1．open与turn on
(1)open指“用手或某工具打开某物”，如：I opened the window after I got up．我起床后便把窗子打开。
(2)turn on指“打开某种电器，如电灯、电视等的开关”。如：He asked me to turn on the radio for him．他让我替他打开收音机。
活学活用
the Tv，I want to watch sports news．
A．Open B．Turn on C．Close D．Turn off
解析：本题考查动词的辨析，根据句意是要打开电视看体育新闻；
答案：B
2．how many与how much
(1)how many意为“多少”，后面总是跟一个可数名词的复数。如：
How many dynasties are there in China’s history?中国历史上有多少个朝代?
(2)how much意为“多少”。用来询问事物的数量，后接不可数名词。如：How much milk is there in the glass?玻璃杯里有多少牛奶?用来询问事物的重量。如：
－How much does the pig weigh?这头猪多重? －Eighty kilos．八十公斤。
(3)how much意为“多少钱”时，可单独使用，也可构成词组how much money，但英语中常省略money，用来询问某物的价钱、价格。如：
－How much is the T-shirt?这T恤多少钱? －Ninety yuan．九十元．
活学活用
milk do you usually drink every day?
A．How much B．How often C．How many D．How
解析：句意：你每天喝多少牛奶?牛奶是不可数名词。
答案：A
3．finally，at last与in the end
(1)finally可以放在句首，也可放在动词前。有两个用法：一是在列举事物或论点时，用来引出最后一项内容；二是用在句中动词前面，表示“等了好久才……”。既可指时间位置，也可指时间的先后顺序，无感彩，只用于过去时。如：Finally we finished the work．=We finally finished the work．最后我们完成了这项工作。
(2)at last只能指时间位置，而不能指时间顺序，在语意上指经过周折、等待、耽搁后的“最后，终于”得到所期待的结果。常常带有较浓厚的感彩。at last也可用来表示“等候或耽误了很多时间之后才……”，语气比较强烈。如：At last，he passed the exam．最后他终于通过了考试。
(3)in the end表示事物发展的自然“终结”，in theend有时还可以预测未来。finally和at last没有这种用法。如：In the end，We found the house．我们终于找到了那所房子。
活学活用
—How do you make fruit salad?— cup up three bananas and a watemelon．Next put them in a bowl．
A．First B．Next C．Then D．Finally
解析：根据答语中Next put them in a bowl可以推测出答案应该是A，C、D选项都应该在next之后。
答案：A
4．there be句型与have／has
there be句型表示“存在有”，have／has表示“拥有，所有”，两者不能同时使用。如：There are three books on the desk．桌子上有三本书。
I have three books．我有三本书。
活学活用
(2011·凉山)Ten minutes ago，there an eraser，a pen and some books on the desk．
A．was B．were C．is D．have
解析：本题考查时态及there be句型。由ten minutes ago可知应该用过去时，there be句型中谓语动词使用就近原则。
答案：A
5．some与any
some意为“一些”，常用在肯定句中作主语、宾语或定语；any意为“一些；任何”，常用在否定句和疑问句中，也可以用在条件状语从句中。some和any作定语时，既可以修饰可数名词，也可以修饰不可数名词。如：You ought to plant some trees here．你应当在这里种一些树。
适时点津
some还可以用在表示邀请的疑问句中。如：Would you like to have some coffee?你要来点咖啡吗?
活学活用
(2011·凉山)Morn bought oranges for me，but I’d like to drink some ．
A．many；oranges B．much；orange C．many；orange
解析：本题考查形容词和名词的用法。oranges为可数名词复数形式，应该使用many来修饰。表示“喝一些橘子汁”应该使用不可数名词orange。
答案：C
真题剖析
真题1 (2011·广元) —How was you，weekend，Jeff? —I had great watching a footballgame．
A．interest B．time C．fun
解析：本题考查固定搭配。have great fun doing sth意为“做某事很高兴”。
答案：C
真题2 (2011·金华) —Have you ever been to Canada? —Yes’I there last year with my parents．
A．have been B．have gone C．went D．go
解析：本题考查动词时态。由时间状语last year可推断出该句为一般过去时态。
答案：C
真题3 (2011·昆明) —You should the shower when you are washing your hair．
—OK，I will．We need to save water．
A．put on B．put off C．turn off D．turn on
解析：本题考查动词短语辨析。put on穿上；上演，put off推迟；turn off关上；turn on打开。根据语境：洗头发时应该把水关上。
答案：C
真题4 (2011·安徽)I can hardly hear what it is saying on TV．Would you please ?
A．turn it up B．turn it down C．turn it on D．turn it off
解析：turn up“调大”；turn down“调小”；turn on“打开”；turn off“关闭99。由前句“我几乎听不见电视在说什么”可知，应该是调高音量。
答案：A
真题5 (2011·山西)Read the carefully．They will help you know how to use the popper．
A．instructions B．decisions C．results
解析：本题考查名词辨析。instruction意为“说明”，decision意为“决定”，result意为“结果”。根据句意“仔细阅读说明”可知选A。
答案：A
真题6 (2011·资阳) —There are so many over there．What’s happening?
—Let’s go to have a look．
A．flower B．car C．child D．people
解析：本题考查名词辨析。many后接可数名词复数。选项中只有people表示复数。
答案：D
名师预测
( )1．—Can I help you，sir? —I’d like to have l00 ．1 want my students to draw pictures．
A．piece of paper B．pieces of paper
C．pieces of papers
( )2．—There a big earthquake in Japan this March． —Yeah．Many Chinese volunteers went there to help the people in trouble．
A．was B．is C．were
( )3．—Let's some dumplings right now． —OK．I’11 cut up the meat first．
A．eat B．buy C．heat D．make
( )4．--How was your trip to Hangzhou，Jim? —Great!We to Xixi National
Wetland Park
A．go B．are going C．will go D．went
( )5．—Mr Smith always has to tell us．—So he does．
A．some good pieces of news B．some pieces of good news
C．some good piece of news D．some piece of good news
同步训练8八年级(上)Units 7—8
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．Let’s banana and apple milk shake．
A． make B．makes C．do D．doing
( )2．I need two ．
A．teaspoon of honey B．teaspoons of honeys
C．teaspoons of honey D．teaspoon of honeys
( )3．—I am thirsty．May I have something to drink? —OK．Here’s some ．
A．rice B．water C．bread D．egg
( )4．First put some salt in the water and then ．
A．mix them up B．mix up them C．mix it up D．mix up it
( )5．Here is a recipe Super Chicken Sandwich．
A．at B．in C．for D．on
( )6．Please add a tomato the sandwich．
A．on B．in C．to D．at
( )7．Please cut the banana small pieces．
A．up；to B．up；into C．off；to D．off；into
( )8．Please turn the light when you leave the room．
A．off B．on C．up D．down
( )9． teaspoons of honey do you need?
A．How B．How many C．How much D．What
( )10． the end of the day，they were all tired．
A．On B．In C．At D．By
( )11． my opinion，the girl in red is the most intellectual．
A．On B．In C．For D．To
( )1 2．—Were there any dolphins at the aquarium? —No, ．
A．they didn’t B．there weren’t C．there wash’t D．they weren’t
( )13．Finally， ，we took the bus back to school．
A．tired and happy B．exciting but happy
C．tired but happy D．tiring and happy
( )14．Were there actors the aquarium?
A．some；at B．any；at C．some；in D．any；on
( )15．After lunch they to the Gift Shop where they lots of gifts．
A．go；buy B．go；bought C．went；buy D．went；bought
二、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空
1．How (many)yogurt do we need?
2．Next you need (cut)up three bananas．
3． (make)dinner is a very interesting thing for me．
4． (add)the salt to the noodles，please．
5．He can drink three cups of (juice)． ’
6． (be)there any sharks in the aquarium last year?
7．I like dessert so I don’t like to drink coffee (with)sugar．
8．The students(have)a school trip yester day．
9．Would you cut up some (tomato)for me?
10． (not drink)too much milk when you are hungry．
三、用所给词的适当形式填空
turn，buy，live，gift，eat，pour，get，take，put，win
1．She got lots of on her fourteenth birthday．
2．The Greens like to sandwiches with lettuce．
3．Don’t waste water into the river．
4．Next you need to all these things into the blender．
5．Finally， on the blender and you’ll get some fruit salad．
6．1 went to the museum and some souvenirs．
7．—Who the first prize? —Tony did．
8．Tina Dean’s autograph．
9．He in California and worked as an actor．
10．After that，they the bus back home．
四、单词拼写
1．Last Sunday I brought a (纪念品)from Japan．
2．We saw many fish and sharks in the (水族馆)．
3．—what (别的)did you do there?—We took some photos．
4． (幸运地)，he found his dog at last．
5．It’s going to rain．You should take an (雨伞)with you when you go out．
6．Why are your clothes (湿的)?
7．The students (观看)a movie about dolphins．
8． (最后)mix it up，please．
五、单句改错。
( )1．She often helps her mother doing some housework ．
A B C D．
( )2．Do you have delicious something to eat?
A B C D
( )3．First，put the mayonnaise in a slice of bread．
A B C D
( )4．Who is the girl at the bike?
A B C D
( )5．Here are three slice of chicken．
A B C D
六、句子翻译
1．我们需要两茶匙蜂蜜。
We need two of honey．
2．—你想要多少橙汁? —一杯。
— orange do you want? —One cup．
3．这是一份黼作草莓冰激凌的食谱。
Here is a strawberry ice cream．
4．你们上次郊游都干什么了?
you your last school trip?
5．学生们看了一场关于未来生活的电影。
The students a movie in the future．
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·淮安)
Our English teacher was like a friend to us，and we all liked her．One day she came into the classroom and shouted．“Who did this?’’She held up a piece of broken glass and asked，“Who 1
the window?”She seldom became angry， 2 this time she was．
I broke the window．I had done 3 by throwing a baseball．I didn’t want to admit(承认)it 4 I didn’t have enough money to pay for a big window like that．“My father will be 5 ，”I thought．At first I didn’t上my hand，but later something strong in my heart suddenly made me stand up．“I did it，”I said 7 ．How difficult it was for me to say that!
My teacher 8 a book from one of our book shelves and then began walking 9 my desk．1 was afraid that she was going to punish(惩罚)me．
“I know you like collecting 10 very much．”she said，looking down at my 11 face．
“Here is the book about collecting stamps that you are looking for．Now，the book is l2 and I shall not punish you．Remember，it’s because you l3 the truth．’’
I couldn’t believe it!My teacher wasn’t punishing me．I didn’t l4 to pay for the broken window．And I got my favourite book!
As time goes，the book is l5 ，so is my wonderful teacher．But l will never forget the lesson the teacher gave me that day．
( )1．A．cleaned B．climbed C．broke D．mended
( )2．A．and B．but C．so D．or
( )3．A．them B．one C．that D．those
( )4．A．because B．if C．when D．though
( )5．A．pleased B．excited C．frightened D．angry
( )6．A．put on． B．put up C．put out D．put away
( )7．A．terribly B．honestly C．easily D．hardly
( )8．A．read B．wrote C．took D．bought
( )9．A．towards B．opposite C．against D．behind
( )10．A．books B．desks C．stamps D．windows
( )11．A．nervous B．pretty C．happy D．square
( )12．A．you B．your C．yours D．yourself
( )13．A．talked B．spoke C．said D．told
( )14．A．like B．want C．use D．need
( )15．A．opened B gone C．1eft D．closed
二、阅读理解
It was at least two months before Christmas when nine-year-old Almie Rose told her father and me that she wanted a new bicycle．As Christmas drew nearer，her desire for a bicycle seemed to fade(消退)，or so we thought．We bought her a lovely doll，and a doll house．Then，much to our surprise，on December 23 rd，she said that she“really wanted a bike more than anything else．”But it was just too late．With such a lot of preparations to do for the Christmas dinner we did not have the time to buy our little girl a bike．So，here we were Christmas B，e around 9：00 P．m．，with Almie and her six-year-old brother，Dylan，sleeping in their beds．Now we could only think of the bicycle and the disappointment of our child．“What if I make a little bicycle out of clay(泥)and write a note that she could trade(交易，交换)the clay bike in for a real bike?”her dad asked．So he spent the next four hours making a tiny clay bike．On Christmas morning，we were excited for Almie to open the little gift box with the beautiful red and white clay bike and the note．Finally，she opened it and read the note aloud．“Does this mean that I can trade in this bike that Daddy made me for a real one?”I said，“Yes．”Almie had tears in her eyes when she replied．“I could never trade in this beautiful bicycle that Daddy made me．I’d rather keep this than get a real bike．”At that moment，we would have moved heaven and earth to buy her every bicycle in the world!
( )1．Choose the right time order of the following events．
a．The girl asked for a new bike．
b．The girl opened the little gift box．
c．The parents bought the girl 8 modern and popular doll．
d．The father made the girl a bike with clay．
e．The girl would rather keep the clay bike than get a real one．
A．a，b，e，e，d B．a，c，d，b，e
C．a，e，b，d，e D．a，b，d，c，e
( )2．Which of the following statements is true according to the passage?
A．The parents wanted the girl to have the clay bike for ever．
B．Tears were in the girl’s eyes because she didn’t like the present at all．
C．The girl never lost her desire for a bike．
D．The parents paid little attention to the daughter’s desire for a bike．
( )3．Why did Dad make the clay bicycle?
A．He wanted his daughter to buy a real one．
B．He didn’t want to disappoint his daughter．
C．He thought his daughter would like it．
D．He wanted to give his daughter a surprise．
( )4．What can we know from the last sentence?
A．The parents were sad and encouraged．
B．The parents felt neverous and shy．
C．The parents were moved and felt proud of the girl．
D．The parents felt unhappy for the girl．
( )5．Which do you think is the best title(标题)for the story?
A．A lovely little girl B．A great and serious father
C．A clay bike D．Christmas shopping
三、任务型阅读(2011·沈阳)
A young girl sits at her desk，reviewing her homework for the evening．English：Read three chapters and write a report．Math：Complete 30 problems．Science：Do a worksheet，front and back．French：(A)Study new words for tomorrow’s test．It’s going to be a long night．
This happens to students in America．Now it’s time to start a homework revolution(变革)．
Do students in the United States receive too much homework?According to the National Education Association，a student should be assigned(布置)no more than l0 minutes per grade level per night．For example，a first grader should only have lo minutes of homework,a(B) grader，20 minutes，and so on．This means that a student in my grade-seventh should have no more than 70 minutes of work(C) each night．Yet this is often doubled，sometimes even worse!
It’s no good giving students too much homework．According to research，kids are developing more illness at school。such as stomachaches，headaches and sleep problems than before．
Everybody(D)that teachers are the ones who as-sign homework，but they are not the only ones to blame(受责备)．“Many teachers are under greater pressure
(压力)than ever before，”says Kylene Beers，President of the National Council for teachers of English，“Some of(E)it comes from parents，some from the wish for high scores on tests．’’Teachers who are under pressure feel the need to assign more homework．
Some people have different ideas，saying that homework prepares kids for doing better in high school，better in college，and(F)今后找到更好的工作．But too much homework is sapping students’strength，curiosity(削弱学生的个性和好奇心)，and most importantly，their love of learning，is that really what teachers and parents want?
1．写出文中划线部分(A)和(C)的同义词或近义词：
2．在文中(B)和(D)的空白处分别填入适当的单词：
3．文中划线部分(E)指代的是：
4．将文中划线部分(F)译成英语：
5．从文中找出能说明本文主旨大意的中心词：
四、句子翻译
1．在这一天结束时，科学老师很高兴，因为班长在旅游后打扫了公共汽车。(at the end of．．．)
2．下个休息日，我不想开车兜风。(day off，go for a drive)
3．你去野营玩得开心吗?(have fun doing sth．)
4．下雨时，我在家读点书。(do some reading)
5．在顶上放上另外一片面包。(on the top)
五、书面表达
按下列提示写一篇题为“一次愉快的旅行”的短文，字数80词左右，文章开头已给出，不计入总词数。
提示：在暑假完成作业后，和好朋友坐公共汽车一起去爬泰山(Mount Tai)。要描述山上环境及游人状况。吃野餐并拍照，感觉累但……
A HappyTrip
On holidays。after I finished my homework．．．
答案
【名师预测】
1—5 BADDB
【同步训练8】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 ACBCC 6--10 CBABC 11—15 BBCBD
二、1．much 2．to cut 3．Making 4．Add 5．juice 6．Were 7．without 8．had 9．Tomatoes 10．Don’t drink
三、1．gifts 2．eat 3．pour 4．put 5．turn 6．bought 7．won 8．got 9．lived l0．took
四、1．souvenir 2．aquarium 3．else 4．Luckily 5．umbrella 6．wet 7．watched 8．Finally
五、1．C，do 2．C，something delicious 3．D，on 4．D，on 5．C，slices
六、1．teaspoons 2．How much 3．recipe for 4．What did，do for 5．watched，about lives
[能力提升]
一、1—5 CBCAD 6—10 BBCAC 11—15 ACDDB
二、1—5 BCBCC
三、1．1earn，every 2．second，knows 3．Pressure 4．getting a better job in the future 5．homework
四、1．At the end of the day，the science teacher was very happy because the monitor cleaned the bus after the trip． 2．On my next day off，I don’t want to go for a drive． 3．Did you have fun camping? 4．When it rains．I do some reading at home． 5．Put another slice of bread on the top．
五、0ne possible version：
A Happy Trip
On holidays，after I finished my homework I decided to go to Mount Tai with my friends．We took the bus to the beautiful place．It took us about two hours to get there．Then we began to climb the mountain．There were many trees and flowers on it．And there were a lot of visitors．Some of them were foreigners．At noon we sat under the trees and had our picnic lunch．All the food was delicious．We took many photos during the trip．
We were all tired but very happy．
第9讲八年级(上)Units 9—10
要点梳理
【词汇拓展】
1．record(n．)记录-→record(v．)录音
2．Brazilian(adj．)巴西的-→Brazil(n．)巴西
3．national(adj．)民族的-→nation(n．)民族
4．achievement(n．)成就-→achieve(v．)实现
5．perform(v．)演出-→perfelrmance(n.)表演
6．gold(n．)金子-→golden(adj．)金色的
7．champion(n．)冠军-→championship(n．)锦标赛
8．golf(n．)高尔夫球-→golf(v．)打高尔夫球-→golfer(n．)高尔夫球运动员
9．talent(n．)天赋-→talented(adj．)天才的
10．10ve(n．)爱-→loving(adj．)慈爱的
11．create(v．)创造-→creative(adj．)有创造力的
12．usual(adj．)寻常的-→unusual(n西．)不寻常的
13．violin(n．)小提琴-→violinist(n．)小提琴手
14．tour(v．)观光-→tourist(n．)游客
15．piano(n．)钢琴-→pianist(n．)钢琴家
16．1ive(v．)活着-→alive(adj．)活着的
17．Asia(n．)亚洲-→Asian(adj．)亚洲的
18．grow(v．)成长-→growth(n．)成长
19．profession(n．)专业-→professional(adj．)专业的
20．act(v．)表演-→actor(n．)演员
21．move(v．)移动-→movement(n．)运动，活动
22．art(n．)艺术-→artist(n．)艺术家
23．save(v．)储存-→save(v．)拯救-→save(v．)节约
24．read(v．)阅读-→reader(n．)读者
25．fit(adj．)健康的-→fit(n．)适合
26．communicate(v．)交流-→communication(n．)交流
27．foreign(adj．)外国的-→foreigner(n．)外国人
28．build(v．)建造-→building(n．)建筑物
【重要短语】
1．be born出生 2．start doing／to do sth． 开始做某事
3．too…to…太……以致不…… 4．three years old三岁5．hum songs哼歌曲
6．write music谱写曲子 7．national team国家队 8．a movie star电影明星
9．at the age of… 在……岁的时候 10．take part in参加
11．computer programmer电脑程序设计者 12．computer science计算机科学
13．take acting lessons上表演课 14．grow up成长
15．a part-time job兼职工作 16．save money存钱 17．at the same time同时
18．hold an exhibition举办展览 19．buy sb．sth．=buy sth．for sb． 给某人买东西
20．travel all over the world环球旅游 21．1earn to play an instrument学会演奏乐器
22．make the soccer team组建足球队 23．make the New Year’s resolution制订新年计划 24．a few少许 25．communicate with sb． 与某人交流
26．major in主修 27．because of由于
【重要句型】
1．－ When were you born?你是什么时候出生的?
－I was born in l973．我出生于1973年。
2．－How long did he hiccup?他打嗝多久了?
－He hiccupped for 69 years and 5 months．他打嗝有69年5个月。
3．－When did he start hiccupping?他什么时候开始打嗝的?
－He started hiccupping in l922．他l922年开始打嗝。
4．You are never too young to start doing things．任何时候开始做事都不会嫌早。
5．He spends all his free time with his grandson．他与他的孙子一起度过了所有的业余时间。
6．Li Yundi，a well-known Chinese pianist，alwaysloved music．李云迪，一个中国著名的钢琴演奏家，他一直热爱钢琴。
7．When he was a small boy，he could hum songs anddifficult pieces of music．
在他还是一个小孩子的时候，他就能哼唱歌曲和难的乐曲。
8．－What are you going to be when you grow up?你长大了要成为什么?
－17 m going to be a computer programmer．我要当一名计算机程序设计者。
9．When I grow up，I’m going to do what I want to do．我长大后要做自己想做的事。
10．I’m going to find a part-time job for a year or two and save money．我打算找份兼职工作做一两年，然后存点钱。
11．I’m going to hold art exhibitions betause I want to buy a big house for my parents．我打算举办艺术展览，因为我想给父母买一座大房子。
12．One day，I’m going to retire somewhere quiet and beautiful．将来有一天，我要在一个安静美丽的地方退休。
13．They want to communicate better with their kids． 他们想和他们的孩子更好地沟通。
14．One old lady is going to leave her job and she wants to find a job as a language teacher in China．一位女士打算辞掉工作并且想在中国找一份当语言教师的工作。
【重点单词短语】
1．at the age of．．．在……岁时
这是一种多大年龄的表达方法，相当于when引导的从句。如：She was stiU beautiful at the age of forty．Shewas still beautiful when she was forty．她活到四十岁还是很美。
活学活用
(2011·广元)Susan joined an art club at age of six and paints well．
A．the B．an C．a
解析：本题考查冠词用法。at the age of为固定搭配，意为“在……岁时”。
答案：A
2．save n储存；节省；积攒
I saved part of my salary each month．我每月把工资的一部分存起来。
I am going to take the bus to save money．为了省钱，我打算乘公共汽车。
适时点津
save还可以表示“拯救，挽救”，save one’s life意为“救命”。如：
The doctor inanaged to save his life．医生救了他的命。
活学活用
(2011·十堰) －I think you can money by yourself to buy a birthday present for your mother．－OK．I’ll try．I’ll not let a penny waste．
A．spend B．save C．cost D．1eave
解析：本题考查词义辨析。spend花费；save节约；cost价值；leave离开。句意：－我认为你可以省着点钱给你妈妈买礼物。－好的，我尽量。我不会浪费每一分钱。
答案：B
【重点句型】
1．－when was she born?她什么时候出生的? －She was born in l973．她出生于1973年。
(1)be born意为“出生”，当问出生时间时，常用when提问；当问出生地点时，常用where提问。但若既要问时间又要问地点，那么往往会用when and where，且位置不可颠倒。如：When and where were you born?你是何时何地出生的?
(2)若表示出生的年份或月份，则用介词in；若表示出生于某一天或具体某天的上午、下午或晚上，则用介词on；若表示出生于某一时刻，则用at。如：Li Yundi was born in l982 in Chongqing．1982年李云迪出生于重庆。Jack was born on May l0th，1982．杰克生于1982年5月10日。I was bom at half past ten in the morning．我出生于上午十点半。
活学活用
(2011·苏州)一When and where were you born?一I Was born October last，1998 Suzhou．
A．on；on B．in；in C．on；in D．in；on
解析：本题考查介词。在具体某天前用介词on，地点前用in。
答案：C
2．You are ntjver too young to start doing things．任何时候开始做事都不会嫌早。
too…to…意为“太……而不能……”，too后跟形容词或副词，to是动词不定式的符号，后面跟动词原形。如： The boy is too young to go to sch001．这男孩年龄太小，不 能上学。
适时点津
too…to…句型可以和so…that…句型转换。如：
The boy is so young that he can’t go to school．这男孩年龄太小，不能上学。
活学活用
(2011·广元)The bag of rice is heavy for Tom to carry．Let’s go and help him．
A．too B．so C．very
解析：本题考查固定搭配。too…to…意为“太……而不能……”。句意：对汤姆来说，这袋大米太重，他搬不动，让我们去帮帮他。
答案：A
3．一What are you going to be when you grow up?你长大后要当什么?
一I’m going to be a basketball player．我要当一名篮球运动员。
be going to do sth．表示主观上打算在将来某时要傲某事，常与表示将来的时间状语tomorrow，nextweek，in a week等连用。如：They are going to move to a new house next week．下星期他们将迁入新居。
适时点津
there is going to be…表示“将来有……”。如：
There is going to be a concert this Friday．本周五将有一场音乐会。
活学活用
(2011·河源) 一Why are you in such a hurry，Mike? 一There an NBA basketball game in ten minutes．
A will be B．will have C is going to have D．are going to be
解析：本题考查there be句型。there be的将来时
表达形式有：there is going to be…／there will
be…，本题只有A项符合。
答案：A
【巧辨异同】
1．be going to do与will do
be going to与will两者都可表示将要发生的事，将要去做某事，但它们有如下几点区别：
(1)be going to表示近期、眼下就要发生的事情，will表示的将来时间则较远一些。如：
He is going to write a letter tonight．今晚他要写信。
He will write a book one day．将来有一天他要写本书。
(2)be going to表示根据主观判断将来肯定发生的事情，will表示客观上将来势必发生的事情。如：He is seriously ill．He is going to die．他病得很严重，快要死了。
He will be twenty years old．他快二十岁了。
(3)begoing to含有“计划，准备”的意思，而will则没有这个意思。如：She is going to lend us her book．她打算把书借给我们。He will be here in half an hour．他半小时后到。
(4)在有条件从句的主句中，一般不用be going to，而多用will。如： If any beast comes at you，I’ll stay with you and help you．如果有野兽袭击你，我会和你呆在一起帮助你。
适时点津
be doing也可以表达打算要做的事。如：
What are you doing for vacation?你假期打算做什么?
活学活用
一I’ve come out without money．一Never mind you some．
A．am going to lend B．will lend C．have lent D．am to lend
解析：本题考查be going to do和will do的辨析。若是强调某个意图事先考虑好的，则用be going to
do；若是表示某个意图没有经过事先考虑，而是在说话的当时才临时想到的，则通常用will do。本题就是在事先没有考虑的情况下做出的回答。
答案：B
2．job与work
(1)job是可数名词，指零活或某个具体的工作职位。如：She has a job at a children’s hospital．她在儿童医院工作。
(2)work是不可数名词，可以指体力劳动、脑力劳动等，不能和冠词a连用，但通常可以和job互换。如：He has too much work to do．他要做的工作太多。
适时点津
一份工作可以说成a piece of work。
活学活用
It’s not easy to keep house．
A．job B．work C．works
解析：根据句意“管家是件不容易的事。’’可知此处应填名词，另外此处没有冠词a，故应选work。
答案．B
真题剖析
真题1(2011·昆明) 一I，m not sure when the 6th national population census(人口普查)completed? 一 November，2010．
A On B．In C．At D．Of
解析：本题考查介词辨析。在某年或某月用介词in。
答案：B
真题2 (2011·德州)He was late this Morning，because the bus was too for him to get on．
A．quiet B．tidy C．crowded D．noisy
解析：本题考查形容词辨析。quiet安静的；tidy干净的，整洁的；crowded拥挤的；noisy吵闹的。句意：今天早晨他迟到了，因为对他来说公交车太挤了，以至于他没挤上。
答案：C
真题3 (2011·郴州)The drink is delicious everyone in the room enjoys it．
A．such；that B．too；to C so；that
解析：本题考查固定搭配用法。so后接形容词或副词，such后接a／an+形容词+可数名词单数或such+形容词+可数名词复数(或不可数名词)，so(或such)…that…意为“如此……以至于……”。
答案：C
真题4 (2011·东营)Bin Laden was killed May 2， 2011．
A．in B．on C．by D．at
解析：本题考查介词的用法。具体到某一天用介词on，在某年某月前用介词in。句意：本·拉登在2011年5月2日被杀死了。
答案：B
真题5(2011·天津)I some of my free time playing basketball for my school team．
A．spend B．cost C．take D．pay。
解析：本题考查动词词义辨析。这四个选项词都有“花费”的意思，其中只有spend可用于spend time(in)doing sth．。
答案：A
名师预测
( )1．一When were you born? 一I was born a cold Winter morning in l996．
A．on B．in C．at D．for
( )2．Zhou Yang is skating．She won a gold medal at the 2010 Winter Olympics．
A．good at B．weak in C．tired of D．angry with
( )3．一Where is my watch?I can’t find it．一Don’t worry．It must be in
your room．
A．somewhere B．anywhere C．everywhere D．nowhere
( )4．She likes reading．She usually some books from the library．
A．buys B．1ends C．borrows D．keeps
( )5．一How many teachers are there in your school? 一 them over two hundred．
A．woman；The number of；is B．women；The number of；is
C woman：A number of：is D．women；A number of；are
同步训练9八年级(上)Units 9—10
[基础检测]
一、单项选择
( )1．—What are you going to be when you grow up?—I’m going to be a because I like playing the violin．
A．musician B．player C．pilot D．actor
( )2．—Where are you going to move? —I’m going to move ．
A quiet somewhere B．somewhere quiet
C．quiet anywhere D．anywhere quiet
( )3．—Who’s that? — Michael Jordan．He’s a great basketball player．
A．This is B．It was C．That’s D．She’s
( )4．Some parents want to communicate better their children．
A．with B．on C．in D．for
( )5．She started ice skating she was four．
A．after B．when C．how D．where
( )6．— did he hiccup?—For lo years and 5 months．
A．How long B．What time C．How D．Whan
( )7．—Where are you going to work? — ．Maybe Beijing．
A．I hope so B．I’m not sure yet
C．That’s a good idea D．I think so
( )8．He all his free time with his grandma yesterday．
A．took B．spent C．spends D．takes
( )9．—When he born? —In 1995．
A． is B．was C．has D．does
( )10．Yao Ming was born September l2， 1980．
A．on B．in C．at D．to
( )11．She a skating champion when she was twelve．
A．becomes B．become C．becoming D．became
( )12．My sister is young go to school．
A．too；to B．enough；to C so；that D．very；to
( )13．I want to be a doctor when ．
A．grow up B．talk about C．agree with D．get up
( )14．I’m going to ome money to travel somewhere interesting．
A．keep B．build C．save D．hold
( )15．—I hope you’11 have a good journey．—
A．Well done B．Don’t mention it
C．Certainly D．Thank you very much
二、根据旬意和首字母提示完成单词
1．John always spart of his pay each month．He wants to buy a cell phone with the money．
2．Paul wants to be an e ．He studies math very hard．
3．All the students of Class 2 made their New Year’s r at the beginning of this term．
4．Kim is going to hold art e that will make him rich and famous．
5．He admires actors very much．He’s going to take a lessons every day．
6．Her parents make her l a new language．
7．I’m going to study a f language．
8．Mei Lanfang first P Beijing Opera when he was ten．
三、用方框中所给词的适当形式填空
move，grow up，write，manage，love
1．—What are you going to be when you ? —I’m going to be a singer．I like singing．
2．Mozart started music when he was four years old．
3．Mrs White is going to from Beijing to Shanghai next month．
4．Mr Zhang is a grandfather．
5．I want to learn something about ，because I am interested in business．
四、用所给词的适当形式填空
1．He wants (be)a basketball player．
2．am going to work harder (save)more money·
3．What you said made me (feel)worried．
4．She is going to eat (healthy)food than before．
5．Mrs Li (1ive)here many years ago．
6．Martina Hingis is an (outstand)tennis player．
7．She lived in the city (call)Shijiazhuang．
8．My little brother began (1earn)English at the age of three．
9．1 will never forget the day，it is an (usual)day．
10．Lin likes to play the violin，he wants to be a (violin)．
五、根据汉语提示完成句子
1．My brother wants to be a computer (程序师)．
2．We are going to visit (某处)beautiful next Sunday．
3．I made a (决心)to study hard．
4．Our school (建造)a tall building last year．
5．When did she start (写)music?
6．He (度过)a11 his free time with his anireals．
7．She wants to be an actor when she (成长)up．
8．Is the old famous singer still (活着)?
[能力提升]
一、完形填空(2011·黑龙江)
Many Chinese students don’t pay much attention to spoken English at school．They think it necessary to practice 1 English in class，but not 2 class．Here is a story to show you 3 important it is to speak the English langua ge freely in everyday life．
A foreigner once 4 hungry and went into a restaurant in London．He sat down at a table．When the waiter came，he 5 his mouth，put his fingers into it and took them out again in order to 6 that he wanted something 7 because he could not speak English．The waiter soon 8 him a cup of tea．The man shook his head．The waiter then took 9 the tea and gave him a cup of coffee．Still the man didn’t l0 what he wanted．He tried again and again，but he wasn’t able to make the waiter l l him．Finally
12 man came in．He spoke English l3 and fluently．After a few minutes，there was a large plate of meat and vegetables on the table in front of l4 ．
So you see a man can go hungry if he l5 master(掌握)a foreign language．
( )1．A．speak B．speaking C．to speak
( )2．A．outsider B．out C．out of
( )3．A．how B．how an C．what an
( )4．A．get B．gets C．got
( )5．A．open B．opened C．opens
( )6．A．express B．expressed C．expressing
( )7．A．eats B．eating C．to eat
( )8．A．took B．brought C．bought
( )9．A．away B．out of C．down
( )10．A．make B．give C．get
( )11．A．understand B．understood C．be understood
( )12．A．other B．the other C．another
( )13．Aclean B．clear C．clearly
( )14．A．he B．him C．his
( )15．A．doesn’t B．won’t C．isn’t
二、阅读理解
When we talk about stars，especially women stars，it seems that they are always young，pretty and own charming body shapes．But recently a Britain’s Got Talent(英国达人)star Susan Boyle has changed our views absolutely(完全地)．
Simon Cowell，one of the judges of the talent show spoke of his shock over Ms Boyle’s voice。“This lady came up，and l’m thinking，‘This will take five seconds and I can go to have a cup of tea．’That changed when she began to sing J Dreamed a Dream from Les Miserables．She knew we were going to have that reaction and just to see that look of satisfaction on her face midway through—it was one of my favorite moments，”Cowell said．
The performance was posted on line and before long，the 47-year-old Scottish woman has been famous all over the world．Speaking from her home in Scotland，Ms Boyle said that she hadn’t thought of changing her appearance．She said that her friend helped her with makeup．“I mean，that’s hardly a makeover．”she added．
Ms Boyle also spoke of the reason she first began to explore her vocal(歌唱的)talents．“l was kind of slow at school，so getting something like singing was a good way of hiding behind that and thus it built my confidence．’’
( )1．Susan Boyle is ．
A．a judge B．a reporter C．a beautifullady D．a Scottish woman
( )2．Susan Boyle had a look of satisfaction on her face when she was singing because ．
A．she was confident of her singing
B．she was satisfied with the judges
C she was pretty and in good shape
D．she sang the son9，J Dreamed a Dream from Les Miserables
( )3．What does the underlined word“views”mean?
A．见解 B．预告 C．复习 D．景色
( )4．According to the passage，which is NOT true?
A．It was the vocal talents that built Susan’s confidence．
B．Susan Boyle was not good at her lessons when at school．
C．Susan Boyle became famous because of her appearance．
D．Simon Cowell didn’t think Susan Boyle a good singer at the time sight．
( )5．What can we learn from Susan Boyle’s success?
A．It’s never too old to learn．
B．It’s easier to succeed at the age of 47．
C．If you have a dream，try to make it come true!
D．If you are not able to study well，to be a singer instead．
三、任务型阅读(2011·泰州)
Christmas is a season to spread joy．Can we spread this joy by caring a little more about nature and going green?Here are some good ideas．
Reduce the use of the decorative(装饰)lights．Make use of the eco-friendly(环保的)lights on the market．In this way you can save electricity．
Reuse the wrapping(包装)paper to wrap the gifts．You don’t need to buy new wrapping paper every year．Also try using the same small decorations for your Christmas tree．
Recycle(循环利用)all those decorations that you can not use any more．You can send out Christmas cards made from recycled paper．It’s a thoughtful way of going green for Christmas．(1)There are many charities selling these cards made from recycled paper．
There are some other ideal ways to go green forChristmas．
(2)You can Christmas gifts by ．You needn’t go to shops to buy presents for your family and friends．Homemade Christmas chocolates，handmade soft toys，homemade candles are wonderful．
If you have no time for gifts，you can also invite your family and friends over to have a home cooked meal．They can even help you with the cooking．This can make your relationship stronger．
Let’s use these green Christmas ideas to celebrate an eco-friendly Christmas!
1．将(1)句译成中文。
2．在(2)句的空白处分别填人一个适当的词使句意完整、上下文通顺。
3．回答问题：Why do we use the eco-friendly lights for Christmas?
4．在文中找出与“This can help improve your relationship．”意思相近的句子。
5．在文中找出最能表达该短文主题的句子。
四、句子翻译
1．你永远不会因为年龄太小而不能开始做事。 (too．．．to…)·
2，几个女孩子说，她们准备经常锻炼身体保持健康。 (keep fit)
3．听起来巴黎就是我能喜欢的城市．(sounds like…)
4．他们打算搬到某个有趣的地方。(somewhere interesting)
5．我的英语学得不好，我想参加一个英语学习班。 (take an English lesson)
五、书面表达(2011·苏州)
假定你是苏华，你在加拿大的笔友John在做一个关于世界各国中学生如何过暑假的调查，他给你发了一封电子邮件，想了解一下有关情况，请认真阅读下面的邮件，根据信中的内容及你的实际用英语回复，可以适当发挥。
注意：1．90个词左右，开头和结尾已经写好，不计人总词数。
2．回复中不得提及考生所在学校和本人姓名。
To：suhua@china．com．cn
From：johnsmith@yahoo．com．cn
Subject：summer vacation
Dear Su Hua。
I’m conducting a survey on how students spend their summer vacation in different countries．I need your help．Would you mind answering the following questions?
●When do you start your summer vacation and how long is it?
●How do you usually relax yourself?
●Will you go to a summer school?Why or why not?
●What do you want to do most?And why?
I look forward to hearing from you soon,
Best wishes!
John
To：johnsmith(@yahoo．com．cn
From：suhua@china．com．cn
Subject：summer vacation
Dear John，
Thank you so much for your email．I’m very happy to
answer your questions．
I wish to visit you in Canada one day．
Yours，
Su Hua
答案
【名师预测】
1--5 AAACB
【同步训练9】
[基础检测]
一、1—5 ABCAB 6—10 ABBBA 11—15 DAACD
二、1．saves 2．engineer 3．resolution 4．exhibition 5．acting 6．1earn 7．foreign 8．performed
三、1．grow up 2．writing 3．move 4．loving 5．management
四、1．to be 2．to save 3．feel 4．healthier 5．lived 6．outstanding 7．called 8．to learn 9．unusual l0．violinist
五、1．programmer 2．somewhere 3．decision 4．built 5．writing 6．spends 7．grows 8．alive
[能力提升]
一、1—5 BCACB 6—10 ACBAC 11—12 ACCBA
二、1—5 DAACC
三、1．有许多慈善机构卖这种用回收利用的纸制成的卡片。 2．make，yourself／yourselves 3．Because you can save electricity in this way．4．This can make your relationship stronger． 5．Let’s use these green Christmas ideas to celebrate an ecofriendly Christmas!
四、1．You are never too young to start doing things．2．Some girls said they were going to exercise very often to keep fit． 3．Paris sounds like a city that I could like．4．They are going to move somewhere interesting． 5．I don’t learn English well．I’m going to take an English lesson.
五、One possible version．
Dear John，
Thank you so much for your email．I’m very happy to answer your questions．
In China，we start our vacation at the beginning of July．It lasts about two months．We can do many things to relax ourselves in summer vacation．I often go swimming．surf the Internet and watch TV．I will go to a summer school for a month to study English because it is important and I like it．But what I want to do most is traveling with my parents．We have been to many places．This summer，we are going to Beijing．We always have a good time．
I wish to visit you in Canada one day．
Yours，
Su Hua
